Special
session of the Dispute settlement body
Report by the Chairman,
Ambassador Ronald Saborío Soto
1 Introduction
1.1. The objective of this report is to provide an overview of the work
conducted since the issuance of my last detailed written report[1]
and to present my assessment of the state-of-play and way forward towards
concluding the negotiations.
1.2. Overall, my sense is that the very constructive work conducted
recently provides a strong basis for a successful conclusion of the
negotiations. Improvements and clarifications to the DSU can make a very meaningful
contribution to the strengthening of the entire multilateral trading system.
The building blocks are there. Now is the time to consolidate the work and reap
the fruits of all the efforts made since the beginning of these negotiations,
by achieving the successful and rapid conclusion that Ministers have mandated.
1.3. This opportunity for us to bring our work to fruition is timely. As
the Director-General recently commented to the Dispute Settlement Body, dispute
settlement activity has been intensifying, confirming the importance that
Members attach to the settlement of their disputes through the DSU, and their
reliance on these procedures as a central component of the functioning of the
multilateral trading system. As the Director-General observed, two thirds of the
Membership have participated in dispute settlement proceedings in one way or
another.[2] Any
improvements to these procedures will therefore make an important contribution
to the functioning of the multilateral trading system as a whole.
1.4. As the Director-General also noted, this level of activity has
recently led to certain pressures on the system. Not all of these reflect a
need for improvement or clarification of the DSU itself. Nonetheless, to the
extent that the work of the Special Session has revealed areas in which
inefficiencies have arisen or may arise in the design of the procedures, a
successful resolution of such issues can contribute to greater predictability
and effectiveness in the processes, including by removing from litigation
certain issues generated by limitations or a lack of clarity in the procedures
themselves. This in turn will promote and facilitate the prompt settlement of
disputes in accordance with the fundamental goals of the DSU.
2 General overview
2.1. We had completed in 2012 a detailed text-based issue-by-issue
discussion of all twelve issues under consideration in the negotiations. This
intensive process had already led to significant progress. In some areas, the
technical work had been essentially completed at that stage, including with the
stabilization of draft legal text.[3]
In other areas, this comprehensive exercise had allowed a detailed
understanding of the proposals and of the respective positions of participants,
but convergence was not achieved.[4]
2.2. Since June 2013, the work of the Special Session has been based on a
"horizontal process" in which interested participants had the
opportunity to explore together possible solutions in all areas under
discussion, in parallel.[5]
At the start of this process, I provided an assessment of the state of play across-the-board
and identified specific areas for further work.[6]
I invited participants to focus on solutions, by searching for flexibilities
that would allow remaining gaps to be bridged. I urged them to be
open to alternative ways of achieving their objectives, to take into account
the views and concerns expressed by others and to reach out to proponents in
areas where they had concerns.
2.3. In this phase, work has been based primarily on efforts driven by
participants, with the goal of building convergence around approaches that
would have the broadest possible base of support. This has involved informal
consultations among interested participants, as well as periodic meetings in
which conceptual elements of solution were presented and discussed, covering
all 12 issues under discussion.[7]
In areas where competing proposals existed, participants focused on seeking
convergence towards a single approach. In other areas, participants expressed
willingness to show flexibility on the means to address their needs and sought
to explore possible avenues towards solutions that could attract greater
convergence.[8]
2.4. Throughout this process, I have been very encouraged by the
constructive spirit that characterized the work and by participants' readiness to
show flexibility in order to achieve convergence. Participants have also
stressed the constructive spirit in which work has been conducted and the
important contribution made by certain participants in steering the process
forward. Participants have also found that focusing on conceptual elements and
principles across the board, rather than specific text, had been very helpful
at this stage of the negotiations.
2.5. Not all issues are yet at the same level of progress, and the amount
of work remaining to achieve convergence still varies significantly from issue
to issue. The various elements of possible solutions identified in this phase do
not, at this stage, reflect full convergence. Nor do all participants perceive
these elements, taken together, as necessarily reflecting an adequate or
acceptable overall balance of interests. Nonetheless, the work conducted in the
context of this "horizontal process" has allowed the negotiation to
move towards an exploration of realistic and achievable outcomes in all 12
areas under discussion. This is a very important step, which can pave the way
for eventual agreement on outcomes reflecting the interests of all participants.
This is the work that must now be completed.
2.6. A resolution of a number of the issues that have been under
discussion in the negotiations would have the potential to significantly improve
the effective conduct of dispute settlement procedures under the DSU, to the
benefit of all Members alike. In this respect, it is important to bear in mind
that all Members share a common interest in systemic improvements to the DSU
that would increase the effectiveness of dispute settlement procedures, as a
key instrument of predictability and security in the multilateral trading
system. This is true for all Members alike, whether they have, to date, been
frequent users of procedures under the DSU or not.
2.7. A number of Members have also emphasized that they face particular
constraints in accessing dispute settlement procedures and defending their
interests effectively through recourse to such procedures. While the means to
address these concerns remain under discussion, it is widely acknowledged that
a successful outcome needs to take due account of this dimension. In this
respect, the work conducted in the context of the "horizontal
process" has been especially constructive. This work has been based on the
assumption that there should be flexibility on the part of all participants to
take due account of each other's sensitivities and needs. This is the direction
in which work should continue, in all areas of this negotiation.
3 Way
forward
3.1. I am persuaded that the horizontal process conducted since June 2013
and the elements presented in this context, combined with previously completed
technical work and stabilized draft text, have the potential to greatly
facilitate the development of meaningful and achievable improvements and clarifications
to the DSU. It is understood that the elements recently presented constitute,
at this stage, avenues for participants' consideration, drawing on the
proposals tabled by participants in earlier phases of the work, and are without
prejudice to the official positions of any participant. Participants need to
continue to build on this work to confirm possible flexibilities and solutions
across-the-board.
3.2. As described above, in certain areas, convergence of principle has
been achieved and this is reflected in draft legal text.[9]
In other areas, the elements that could form the basis of final outcomes will need
to be confirmed, building on the work to date, and translated and expressed in
legal text, in order to reach final outcomes. In this respect, we already have
a very significant body of previous work to build on, including, in many areas,
some very mature draft legal text.
3.3. In the conduct of this further work, participants should continue to
be guided by the objective of seeking agreement on achievable, realistic and
workable solutions reflecting the interests of all participants. The recent horizontal
exercise has allowed flexibilities to be tested across, and not just within,
the areas under discussion, and this has made it easier to visualize horizontal
trade-offs and potential overall balances of outcomes. My impression at this stage
is that engagement on outstanding issues should continue to advance in the same
spirit, with a view to what the overall picture of potential improvements could
look like. It may also be beneficial to envisage this overall picture from the
perspective of the successive stages of the dispute settlement process, as
recently discussed by participants. This could allow Members to explore how
different concerns can be addressed on the whole through a combination of
improvements at various stages of the process, and to consolidate the
achievements of previous work within the framework of a final outcome.
3.4. Participants could also continue to be guided by the general
considerations outlined at paragraphs 10 and 11 of my Report of 18 July 2008,
including limiting changes to what is necessary to achieve the intended
purpose, ensuring drafting consistency throughout the Understanding and bearing
in mind the procedural coherence of the system as a whole.
_______________
List of Annexes
ANNEX 1
Contents
|
Page
|
Summary of issues raised in
consultations, week of 10 June 2013
|
5
|
|
|
|
ANNEX 2
INFORMAL
MEETINGS (May 2011 to December
2012):
Chairman's Summaries of Work
Contents
|
Page
|
1. Weeks of 3-13 May 2011
|
11
|
2. Week of 20 June 2011
|
19
|
3. Week of 25 July 2011
|
26
|
4. Week of 26 September 2011
|
33
|
5. Week of 14 November 2011
|
43
|
6. Week of 30 January 2012
|
51
|
7. Week of 5 March 2012
|
60
|
8. Week of 7 May 2012
|
71
|
9. Week of 4 June 2012
|
83
|
10. Week of 16 July 2012
|
96
|
11. Week of 1 October 2012
|
102
|
12. Week of 12 November 2012
|
109
|
|
|
|
ANNEX
1
Summary of issues raised in consultations, week of 10
June 2013[10]
This
summary is presented by the Chairman under his own responsibility and without
prejudice to the views of any participant.
Meetings
were held in the week of 10 June 2013 on all issues, except sequencing[11], where technical work has been completed, and
mutually agreed solutions[12] and SCI[13], where limited issues remain to be addressed.
Remand
Convergence
exists on some essential features expected of a remand referral mechanism,
reflected in both proposals, namely:
·
Remand would be
available when the Appellate Body identifies that it cannot complete the
analysis for lack of sufficient undisputed facts on the record or factual
findings by the panel;
·
The initiative of
remand would be taken by a party to the dispute; and
·
The original
panel would be called upon to address the unresolved factual issues.
Further work should therefore
focus on key remaining conceptual issues, namely:
·
Which party may
initiate remand (and how recommendations are formulated);
·
Whether the
remand panel completes the factual analysis only or also the legal analysis
(and the role of new evidence in the remand procedure); and
·
What happens to
completed rulings while remand is on-going.
Two
broad factors seem to affect overall positions on these issues: (i) timeframe
implications (i.e. the time needed for the completion of remand procedures
and/or the time gained through remand compared to the re-initiation of
proceedings) and (ii) uncertainties relating to the operation of some proposed novel
procedures or processes.
These
two factors appear to be connected, to the extent that innovative procedural
suggestions are driven by an effort to avoid undue delays in the procedure. Part
of the challenge is therefore to determine an appropriate balance between an
acceptable timeline and ensuring that the process does not generate procedural
uncertainties or excessive complexities. Further work could therefore focus on
exploring possible solutions to the unresolved issues, taking into account
these broad parameters.
It
was suggested that a workshop could be useful, to explore the practical
operation and implications of different options, including a single report and
single adoption, two reports and "double adoption" or other
variations combining elements of either proposal. It was also suggested to
explore the functioning of various options by applying them to the types of
situations in which the Appellate Body had been unable to complete the analysis
in cases to date.
Post-retaliation
Convergence
exists at a conceptual level on a broad sequence of steps to address
post-retaliation situations, namely:
1. The Member concerned must assert and
substantiate its claim of compliance.
That is, the Member concerned must come forward with some form of action
that would explain what it has done to achieve compliance (without prejudice to
the exact form or legal status of this announcement);
2. Once the Member concerned has taken this
initial step, the next step is for the complainant to challenge the
respondents' assertion of compliance, if it disagrees with that assertion
(without prejudice to how exactly this is done);
3. If there is no disagreement that compliance
has been achieved, the retaliation authorization will be terminated;
4. If there is a disagreement, compliance
proceedings should take place to determine whether compliance has been
achieved;
5. Where compliance proceedings take place, the
existing retaliation authorization continues to be effective until their
conclusion; and
6. Where compliance proceedings have taken
place, if it is determined in these proceedings that compliance has been
achieved, the authorization will be terminated.
If it is determined that compliance has not been achieved, the level of
retaliation authorized may be revised to reflect the current level of
nullification or impairment.
These
are strong building blocks. Further work
could therefore focus on clarifying the exact procedural stages to achieve this
sequence. The proponents have identified
three key unresolved issues in this respect:
·
The contents and
legal status of the initial notification/statement to be made by the respondent
to assert compliance;
·
The process for
initiation of compliance proceedings (i.e. initiated by the complainant or
triggered by the respondent's declaration of compliance); and
·
The allocation of
burden of proof in these proceedings.
Proceedings
in the "pre-retaliation" stages provide important context for
proceedings in the "post-retaliation" phase. Two aspects in
particular may have a bearing on the way forward: Article 21.5 compliance
proceedings, taking into account the "sequencing" text, and Article
22 proceedings towards an authorization to retaliate. Parallelism with these
procedures could therefore be explored.
Third party rights
With
respect to third party rights in consultations, the shared objectives
are clear: automatic acceptance of requests to be joined in consultations in
the absence of a timely rejection notification by the defendant and
transparency on all responses to such requests – whether negative or positive.
Unless there are drafting concerns as to whether the most recent text achieves
these objectives, no further work seems necessary.[14]
With
respect to third party rights in panel proceedings, two aspects can be
distinguished, i.e. (i) when interest must be expressed, and (ii) what the
rights of third parties are in the proceedings.
With
respect to the first issue, there is support for codifying the current practice
of expressing interest within 10 days after panel establishment, but there is
also interest in clarifying the conditions of admissibility of later
expressions of interest. Consideration could be given to combining clarity in
this respect with a degree of flexibility.
This
question should also be considered in light of the potential improvements in
the standard rights to be granted to third parties at this stage of the
proceedings. There is support for enhancing default third party rights in panel
proceedings. Concerns have been expressed, however, in respect of allowing
third parties to make an additional statement in the context of the second
substantive meeting. Here also, consideration could be given to combining
clarity and a degree of flexibility.
Some
concern remains that allowing expressions of third party interest for the first
time at the appellate stage could result in an increased workload for
both the Appellate Body and the parties. Suggestions to address the balance
between the rights of the parties, greater opportunity for third party
participation and the workload of the Appellate Body could be explored further.
A
consideration of overall balances to be achieved would also be useful, taking
into account the possibly different balance of interests between parties and
third parties at various stages of the proceedings. This issue could also
usefully be considered in terms of the balance between the opportunity for
interested Members to have their views heard by WTO adjudicators, including at
the appellate stage, and a possible regulation of the conditions in which
others, including non-Members, may be authorized to express views at the same
stages of the proceedings. It has been noted in this respect that
"transparency" proposals would also benefit Members themselves (see
below the section on "Transparency and amicus curiae
briefs").
With
respect to consultations in compliance proceedings, the shared intention
is clear, i.e. that (i) consultations should be possible but not required in compliance
proceedings, (ii) if consultations are requested, they shall be conducted in
accordance with Article 4 of the DSU and (iii) this implies that, where
consultations are requested, third party participation should be possible in
the same conditions as in original proceedings. It is unclear whether participants
are ready to re-open the stabilized text achieved on this issue in the context
of "sequencing", to better reflect these objectives.
In
respect of third party participation in Article 22.6 arbitral proceedings,
mixed views have been expressed on the extent to which such proceedings tend to
involve factual issues primarily of concern to the parties or also legal
determinations of potential interest to other Members. Here too, an approach
that provides both clarity and a degree of flexibility could be explored.
Transparency and amicus
curiae briefs
With
respect to transparency, further work should address the concerns of those
participants who are not persuaded that a systematic opening of proceedings is
appropriate.
Here
too, solutions could be envisaged against the context of an overall balance of
interests, including between the participation rights of Members and access for
non-Members. It has been noted that there is partial overlap between transparency
proposals and enhanced access for Members, in that open hearings or publicity
of submissions provide an opportunity also for Members other than parties and
third parties to gain greater access to the proceedings. At the same time, to
the extent that it is considered important that Members have a greater
opportunity for access than non-Members, a greater level of access to meetings
for all may need to be complemented by greater participation rights for
interested Members.
In
respect of open hearings, future work could explore solutions
accommodating some flexibility rather than a systematic opening of all
meetings.
With
respect to access to submissions also, a range of modalities might be
explored further, not limited to immediate and complete access to all documents
or complete confidentiality of all submissions. It is also useful to bear in
mind that Article 18 currently allows a Member to request a non-confidential
version of a party’s submissions, although no timeline is specified. Panel and
Appellate Body reports also contain summaries of the arguments presented by
parties and third parties. What is at stake is therefore mostly the moment and
form in which information becomes available, more than the principle of making
public information that would otherwise remain permanently confidential.
Not
all Members have been equally comfortable with the manner in which unsolicited
amicus curiae briefs have been
handled by adjudicators, and there remain serious concerns for some over the
acceptance of such briefs. At the same time, there may be more common ground in
the underlying assumptions of participants than is generally assumed:
· No participant has suggested that there should be a right for any
entity other than a Member who is party or third party in the proceedings to
file a submission, participate in the proceedings or have its views heard
before adjudicators in proceedings under the DSU; more generally it seems
understood that only WTO Members can have standing in WTO dispute settlement proceedings;
· All participants also seem to assume that, to the extent that any
other entity is in fact heard, such as experts consulted under Article 13 of
the DSU, this is to be decided by the adjudicator, in consultation with the
parties.
· All participants share the concern that any request by an entity
other than a party or third party to the dispute to present views to a WTO
adjudicator, should not result in undue disruption in the conduct of the
proceedings or unnecessary burdens on the parties to the dispute.
These
elements may provide strong building blocks to explore the possibilities for
bridging the gaps and to provide greater predictability on this issue, a
consideration that inspires both proposals.
Timeframes
To
date, discussions of timeframes have involved mostly a consideration of each
individual proposal on its own merits.
These discussions have shown that there is generally comfort with the
two key objectives underlying proposals on timeframes, i.e. streamlining the
process where possible, and at the same time ensuring that sufficient time is
available for all Members, including those developing country Members facing
significant resource constraints.
At
the same time, these two objectives may not always be easy to account for
within a single phase of the proceedings. The way forward on these issues could
therefore involve a broader consideration of overall balances across various
stages of the proceedings, to achieve an optimal combination of streamlining of
the process where possible and assurances of sufficient time for all Members to
defend their interests in the proceedings where needed.
Effective compliance
Proposals
on effective compliance share a common goal of improving remedies, to promote
prompt compliance. Some language has been tentatively agreed on notification of
measures taken pursuant to an authorization to retaliate.[15]
Beyond that, the broad question to be addressed is how remedies under the DSU
could be improved, so that all Members have access to as effective a remedy as
possible when necessary.
It
has been noted, and is not disputed as such, that overall compliance levels
have been high. It is also acknowledged that in practice, it is not often
necessary to resort to retaliation. At the same time, a number of Members have
expressed concern that compliance has not always been easily achieved, and that
some may face particular challenges in this respect, in part because available
remedies are not effective enough. For some Members who are not frequent users
of the system, compliance concerns may represent a major proportion of their
experience.
The
proposals reflect different ways of addressing this concern. The way forward
may require flexibility on the types of solutions that can contribute to
promoting effective compliance, taking into account the sensitivities of
participants. In this respect, it has been suggested that the systemic
implications of various approaches are not the same. It has also been suggested
that solutions that may potentially benefit all Members could generally be
easier to accept.
A
general question for consideration is the relative effectiveness of various
remedies, in promoting prompt compliance. In this respect, it has been
suggested that consideration be given to promoting opportunities for
compensation, as a possibly more effective means of achieving satisfaction for
affected sectors than retaliation. This question could be further explored,
taking into account the merits of flexibility for the parties to freely
determine how to make best use of such compensation. With respect to administrative measures, an
important issue for consideration appears to be whether such measures would
provide helpful incentives for compliance or would rather risk disengaging the
Member concerned, to the detriment of the initial objective.
Developing country interests
Proponents
of developing country interests have identified third party rights, timeframes
and effective compliance as areas of concern to them. Meaningful progress in
these areas could therefore contribute to addressing a number of concerns
expressed by proponents of developing country interests. This dimension should
be taken into account in future work on these issues.
Specific
aspects of these issues may also contribute to adequate access to dispute
settlement procedures, also identified as an area of concern. For example, an
opportunity to participate as a third party in various proceedings may enhance
access and also contribute to capacity building. Similarly, ensuring that
respondents are assured of sufficient time to prepare their arguments before
adjudicators may contribute to due process and therefore effective access to
the proceedings. Improved remedies may also strengthen effective access, if
they increase the chances of achieving a resolution of the matter for the
complainants.
As
regards proposals for more direct support in the form of a Dispute Settlement
Fund and litigation costs, the presentation of legal text has clarified some
important aspects of the expected functioning of both mechanisms. At the same
time, significant questions and concerns remain, including on budgetary
implications and the operation of the mechanisms. It has also been noted that
not all developing country Members, or even all developed country Members, are
in the same situation in respect of relative expertise or resources to deal
with WTO litigation. Also of concern has been the relationship between these
proposed mechanisms and the functions of the ACWL, whose contribution to
providing quality independent legal advice to beneficiary Members is widely
recognized.
Some
participants suggested that consideration be given to increased capacity
building and trade-related technical assistance or to looking into possible
ways of increasing the attractiveness of ACWL for Members with limited
capacities, as means of addressing the capacity constraints identified. It has also been suggested that generally
focusing on solutions that would not be tied directly to litigation of specific
cases would help to move forward. These suggestions could be explored further.
Flexibility and Member-control
Proposals
on flexibility and Member-control share a common goal of increasing the options
available to Members, and to parties in particular, to achieve a successful resolution
of their disputes. Here again, the proposals reflect different ways of
achieving this, and the way forward may require flexibility on the types of
solutions, taking into account the sensitivities of participants. It has been
noted in this respect that positions on different aspects of the proposals may
depend on the combination of solutions to be adopted.
On
two elements of the proposal, the suspension of panel proceedings[16]
upon the parties' agreement and expertise of panelists[17],
some language is tentatively agreed.
In
respect of partial deletion and partial adoption of reports,
strong concerns remain. Partial deletion
raised particular concern because portions of the adjudicators' reasoning and
conclusions would be removed from the final reports and not seen by the
Membership. Partial adoption, which involves the Membership acting by
consensus, raised comparatively less systemic concerns. Further work could
involve proponents continuing to explore with interested participants how the
objectives of these proposals might be achieved, while respecting the
sensitivities expressed.
On
other aspects (suspension of appellate proceedings, interim review on appeal
and guidelines for adjudicators), useful technical work might be pursued.
On suspension
of appellate proceedings, concerns raised included the absence of a
time-limit comparable to what is foreseen in respect of panel proceedings under
Article 12.12, to avoid prolonged situations of uncertainty on the status of
the pending panel report and in the planning of the Appellate body's work.
Further work could focus on seeking to address these concerns, and on the
status of unadopted panel reports in the event of a suspension of appellate
proceedings, an issue that does not similarly arise at the panel stage.
In
respect of interim review at the appellate stage, concerns remained,
including in respect of potential impact
on the Appellate Body's authority, the risk of withdrawal of an appeal in light
of the interim appellate report and timeframes. There were also concerns with
possibilities of leakage. Here too, further work could focus on seeking to
provide clearer assurances that these concerns can be met. Rectification of
factual errors was identified as an area in which interim review could enhance
rather than detract from the quality and authority of reports.
With
respect to the proposed guidelines for WTO adjudicators, avenues for
work ahead have been identified and could guide the way forward. In particular, a review of the language of the
draft guidelines on the basis of a more "principles-based approach",
formulating the guidance in a general way, rather than on the basis of examples
only, has been proposed. This could be
the first objective of further work on this issue. The following elements might
help in this context: identifying portions of the guidelines around which there
is greater convergence on substance, including areas in which established
Appellate Body rulings would be confirmed. Where the proposed guidance might
modify rather than confirm current dispute settlement practice, this could also
be clarified. In some areas, specific suggestions have already been made as to
how the text might be restructured or revised. These could be explored further.
Panel composition
There
is tentative agreement on language to clarify the expertise expected of
panelists, under Article 8.2.[18]
The remaining question is whether the efficiency of the panel selection process
under Article 8 can be improved through a mechanism to achieve panel composition
on the basis of a single list of names, be it by agreement of the parties or through
DG composition.
The
idea of the presentation of a single list by the Secretariat seems to be
generally well received. Further work could focus primarily on addressing the
key concern expressed that a linear ranking of potential panelists from this
single list may not fully reflect the required balance of expertise within the
panel, so that the chances of achieving an optimal composition on this basis
may be reduced. The objective could be to maximize the chances that the default
composition proposed based on the ranking would be balanced, so that the need
to resort to additional flexibilities (such as a revised list or DG
composition) is reduced.
With
respect to DG composition, further work could focus on confirming adequate
language to allow the Director-General some flexibility to depart from the list
where necessary, to address concerns that recourse exclusively to the initial
list may excessively limit the Director-General's ability to achieve a better
outcome than the parties had been able to generate on the basis of that list.
Further drafting improvements could also be considered, to reflect other
suggestions or comments made on the draft text. Operational aspects, such as
the timeline for the process, may also need to be clarified in due course.
_______________
ANNEX
2
INFORMAL
MEETINGS (May 2011 to December
2012):
Chairman's
Summaries of Work
The text below reflects the summaries of the
work conducted in the DSU negotiations between May 2011 and December 2012, as
presented by the Chairman at informal meetings of the DSB Special Session at
the conclusion of each negotiating week.
These summaries are presented by the Chairman under his own responsibility
and without prejudice to the views of any participant.
1. Weeks of 3-13 May 2011[19]
Strictly Confidential Information (SCI)
1.
This week,
delegations first took a fresh look at the proposed procedures on Strictly
Confidential Information (SCI). The draft text on SCI
in the 2008 July Text[20] is
based in large part on an earlier Canadian proposal, but is not limited to that
proposal. Because SCI has linkages to transparency issues and to
certain aspects of third party participation, the July Text highlights these
linkages.
2.
I have noted in
the past that the concept and objectives of protecting SCI
are relatively mature and generally accepted, but that a number of technical
issues remain, including:
·
the operational
details of the procedures proposed;
·
linkages and
consistency between SCI and other
relevant existing and proposed provisions in the DSU, in particular as regards
transparency and third party rights; and
·
the legal form of
regulating SCI.
3.
Last week, the
proponent expressed its desire to revisit its proposal, based on experience
since the proposal was originally made.
The proponent observed that to date, parties at the panel stage have
sought procedures for the protection of SCI
on an ad hoc basis. However, these procedures are themselves
incorporated into the working procedures that pertain to the particular
dispute, and are not made public. In
addition, the level of protection can vary from case to case.
4.
Bearing the
current realities in mind, the proponent set out what it considers important objectives. These are:
·
to ensure that
the DSU provides for additional SCI
procedures to be adopted when a party requests them;
·
to allow parties
flexibility to design procedures that suit the specific needs of specific cases
while recognizing that panels and the AB will have a say in the adoption of
procedures; and
·
to ensure that
adopted procedures are made available to all WTO Members.
5.
The proponent
also noted that, in its view, these objectives would have certain implications,
in particular, that:
·
the level of
protection afforded at the panel level should also be afforded at the appellate
stage; and
·
the information
that is designated as confidential must be able to be subject to a
"challenge".
6.
In this latter
respect, the proponent expressed the view that, currently, the Appellate Body
may determine on its own whether information should be designated as
confidential or not, irrespective of the parties' views.
7.
The proponent
considered various ways in which these objectives might be met. It was suggested that some kind of document
could be adopted by the DSB that illustrates procedures that have been used in
the past. It was also suggested that an
appendix could be incorporated into the DSU, which would contain suggested or
illustrative provisions. It was
submitted that this would provide a level of certainty and would enable Members
to inform relevant industry or stakeholders on the kinds of procedures that may
be available. In addition, proponents
submitted that a definition of SCI
could also be provided to give Members a common understanding.
8.
Participants in
the small group discussion expressed support for the objectives discussed by
proponent, stating a clear preference for allowing flexibility in the type of
procedures that might be adopted. In addition,
participants indicated a desire that confidentiality procedures adopted in a
dispute at the panel stage be retained at the appellate stage. Questions were also raised as to the
involvement of third parties in the determination of SCI
procedures.
9.
In the meeting of
the G40, further support was expressed for the objective of protecting SCI, and for keeping the procedures as simple as
possible. The proponent also clarified a
number of aspects. In situations in
which parties cannot agree on the SCI
procedures to be followed, the proponent envisioned that additional procedures
for a party to request protection of SCI,
which would then be adopted by the panel or the Appellate Body. This would depart from current practice,
which leaves discretion to the adjudicators.
The content of procedures would be adopted in consultation with
parties. In most cases, the procedures
would be simple. If there was a
disagreement on the particular procedure, this parties and the adjudicator
could hold discussions. In addition,
there would be an adopted definition of SCI,
under which parties have the power to designate information as strictly
confidential.
10.
With respect to
the expected structure of the procedures, the proponent suggested that
amendments would need to be made to Article 18 of the DSU, to clarify that
procedures will be adopted where so requested, and that procedures will be
adopted in consultation with parties based on needs of specific case. It would also be clarified that where
procedures are adopted by a panel, then the same protection should be afforded
at all stages of the process (including possible appeal). An Appendix would likely include a definition
of SCI, though model procedures
would not be included. Finally, the
proponent envisioned that a DSB decision could direct the Secretariat to make
such Working Procedures available on a website.
11.
The proponent
indicated that it expected to continue to work towards revised text between now
and our next meetings.
Panel composition
12.
The proponent
presented an updated version of its text[21],
reflecting some drafting suggestions from earlier discussions on this subject
in 2009, with the aim of improving the procedure for the selection of
panelists, in particular addressing transparency and predictability. The proposal directs the Secretariat to
present a greater number of names, in a single list, based on selection
criteria identified by the parties. With
this list, the parties must rank the proposed names, and may exercise limited
veto rights. The three names with the
highest combined ratings among those that have not been vetoed by either party
would be proposed as basis for the composition of the panel. The parties would then have the ability to
agree or disagree with the resulting composition. If they cannot agree on a composition on that
basis, then the possibility would remain, as under the current procedures, to
request the Director-General to compose the panel. The Director-General would have to compose it
from the same list, i.e. the names proposed by the Secretariat and ranked by
the parties.
13.
In an initial
discussion of the proposal, support was expressed for the underlying rationale
of the proposal; however, questions were asked in particular about the
operation of the ranking process and the resulting proposal for the composition
of the panel. In this context,
delegations discussed both the vetoing and ranking of names by the parties, and
what the Secretariat would do with these rankings in order to arrive at a
proposed composition. With respect to
veto rights, it was clarified that the list should, a priori,
contain only names that are in principle suitable, so that there would be only
a limited number of names that would not be acceptable to either party. Thus the veto opportunities should be limited.
14.
A number of
participants expressed interest in understanding how the ranking would operate
in practice. This was clarified on the
basis of a practical simulation exercise, under which delegations simulated a
two-party ranking process. Hypothetical
candidates were ranked in order of preference, with vetoes placed. The ranking was then translated into points
that were allocated to each candidate.
Vetoed candidates were not assigned points. The number of points achieved by each nominee
was then calculated, to identify the three nominees with the highest combined
number of points. These were proposed to
serve as panelists. It was also
clarified that flexibility remained to determine which panelist, among these
three, should chair the panel. For instance,
seniority and experience could play a role in the choice of chairperson. It was clarified that once the initial veto
rights had been used, no further opportunity for a "veto" arose as
such. However, if an individual ranked
very low by one of the parties ended up being proposed as one of the three with
the best combined preferences, the proponent submitted that the party
uncomfortable with that nomination could object to the proposed composition.
15.
A number of
questions were asked in respect of the mathematical calculation of the
composition of the panel based on the best combined rankings by the
parties. Concern was expressed in
particular at the fact that this ranking process does not take into account
aspects relating to the balance of expertise and profiles within the group (for example, the need to have at least one economist,
plus one WTO lawyer, and maybe also one panelist with an academic background,
as well as a balance of nationalities and level of seniority). It was
questioned whether, in light of this, a mathematical formula provides the best
approach to identifying the optimal combination of individuals reflecting a
combination of the selection criteria and the ranking. It was suggested that, if this mechanism was
too rigid and would generally require subsequent adjustment, perhaps there
could be better ways to reflect all the preferences of parties, for example, by
allowing the Secretariat to propose an optimal combination among the non-vetoed
individuals, taking into account various criteria.
16.
Further
clarification was sought also as to whether the names included in the
Secretariat's initial list would have to meet "at least one
criterion" from each party, in order to increase the chances that it would
be acceptable to both. One delegation
also expressed concern at the fact that the proposed procedure appeared to be
mandatory by default.
17.
In a meeting of
the G40, delegations revisited the proposal, discussing the preamble and
opening paragraphs of the proposed text.
At the outset, the proponent recalled that its proposal is in the form
of a DSB decision, and not modification of the text of the DSU. The proponent explained that it sought to
create a self-standing set of rules or procedures that would be binding on
Members, but could flexibly be withdrawn if it proved to be unsatisfactory with
the Membership. The proponent explained
that this decision seeks to build upon the principles set out in Article 8 of
the DSU. Delegations also recognized the
possibility exists for Members to request a review of the procedures set out in
the decision in light of experiences gained.
18.
The proponent
noted that the inclusion of a preamble was consistent with the format of
existing DSB decisions, but expressed flexibility in removing any introductory language
if other participants considered it unnecessary. Delegations were not strongly opposed to
keeping a preamble, but suggested the possibility of including additional
language from the first two paragraphs into the preamble. Delegations also discussed whether it would
be more appropriate to refer to language in the Decision as "rules"
or "procedures". Interest was expressed in using
"procedures". The proponent also clarified that the procedures set
forth in the proposal could apply in the context of panelist selection for an
Article 21.5 proceeding, if the need arose.
In addition to discussion on language in the opening provisions, some
delegations maintained reservations with respect to the ability to resort to
alternative procedures, considering that such an option requires agreement
between the parties.
Flexibility and Member-control
19.
Delegations
continued their discussion on flexibility and Member control, from April.[22] On the suspension of panel proceedings[23],
questions had been raised last month in the meeting of the G40, about the draft
text that had been considered in the smaller group discussions. This week, the G40 group reached agreement on
the following wording for the suspension of panel proceedings under Article
12.12 of the DSU:
"The Panel may suspend its work at any time at the request of the
complaining party and where the panel has suspended its work, it shall resume
its work at the request of the complaining party. The panel shall suspend its work where the
parties to the dispute so agree, and shall resume its work at the request of
either party to the dispute. In the
event of a suspension, the time-frames set out in paragraphs 8 and 9 of this
Article, Article 20 and paragraph 4 of Article 21 shall be extended by the
amount of time that the work was suspended. If the work of the panel has been
suspended for more than 12 consecutive months, the authority for establishment
of the panel shall lapse."
20.
The intent of the
most recent changes reflected in this text is to ensure parallel treatment of
the duration of suspension and conditions of resumption, both in the event of a
suspension at the request of the complainant (first sentence) and in the event
of a suspension at the joint request of the parties (second sentence,
introduced by the proposed text).
21.
Delegations also
continued, in the G40, discussion of the proposed suspension of Appellate
Body proceedings.[24] Both the objective and the proposed
modalities of such suspension were discussed.
Some delegations indicated that they were still considering whether a
suspension of proceedings at the Appellate stage was appropriate. In this respect, some participants
highlighted that the situation at the appellate stage differed somewhat from
that at the panel stage, in that rulings already existed in the panel report,
which might be confirmed or not through the Appellate Body proceedings. Concern was expressed at the possibility of
dilatory tactics.
22.
Several
participants, while they understood - and, for some, supported - the underlying
rationale of the proposal, had concerns about the fact that it does not
envisage any finite duration to the suspension, unlike what is foreseen at the
panel stage under Article 12.12. In this
respect, it was asked what the implications might be of a prolonged situation
of uncertainty, whereby the panel report would remain unadopted without
resolution of the matter. Concern was
also expressed that it may be more difficult for the Appellate Body to
accommodate such uncertainty in the planning of its work.
23.
The proponents
explained that the purpose of the proposal was to allow the parties an
opportunity to negotiate a settlement of the dispute. They observed that the parties, including the
complainant, would be able to define the terms of the suspension, and would
retain the ability to resume the proceedings at any time if they no longer
thought that it could serve its purpose of facilitating agreement on a solution
to the dispute. In their view, it would
not be necessary to provide for a specific duration for the suspension, and to
force the parties to resume the proceedings, as long as they considered it
useful to pursue their discussions.
24.
In the small
group discussions, we also addressed the proposal for an interim review at
the Appellate Body Stage.[25] You will recall that, at our meeting last
month and previously, the proponents suggested that interim review could help
avoid errors of fact or law in the Appellate Body, and could also help provide
clarifications on Appellate Body findings.
Proponents expressed the view that an interim review would provide a
much more favourable manner than the issuance of corrigendum to address
potential mistakes or issues in Appellate Body reports.
25.
In general,
delegations continued to express support for having high-quality Appellate Body
reports. Some delegations indicated that
the interim review works well at the panel stage and could prove useful in the
appellate stage.
26.
However, some
delegations expressed concern that the inclusion of interim review at the
appellate stage would undermine the integrity of appeals and the dispute
settlement process. It was suggested that the potential benefit of correcting
small errors would be outweighed by certain costs, including the extension of
timeframes and the possibility for confidentiality leaks or other abuse. The question was raised as to how many
corrigenda have in fact been required in the appellate context.
27.
Delegations
expressed the view that appellant parties could effectively preview the outcome
on appeal at the interim review stage and opt to withdraw their appeal, were
they dissatisfied with the conclusions on appeal. In their view, this would disrupt balance
achieved in the system by requiring Members to weigh the costs and benefits of
appealing. In this regard, proponents
expressed the view that the Appellate Body could prevent such a possibility
through modification of its working procedures, obviating the need to limit the
possibility of withdrawal in the text of the DSU itself.
28.
Delegations
submitted that the primary focus and content of appellate reports concerned
legal issues. The fear was expressed
that parties would simply present additional argumentation to influence the
outcome. Delegations also expressed the
view that the legitimacy of AB reports could be brought into question. If an appeal is filed and results not seen,
this could have a negative impact on the Appellate Body, by undermining its
authority and impinging on its ability to discharge its mandate under the DSU. Delegations also referred to undue pressures
could be placed on the Appellate Body.
29.
Proponents noted,
however, that legal issues are also reviewed by panels and discussed at the
interim review stage by parties. It was
also submitted that, were such review of legal arguments allowed, the Appellate
Body would retain authority not to change its mind. It was further suggested that reflecting the
interim process in the final Appellate Body report would help to preserve
integrity. However, it was also noted
that parties retain the possibility of appealing their case at the panel stage,
and there is the incentive to pursue less intensely at that stage arguments on
legal findings.
30.
One proponent
suggested that additional language could be incorporated into the proposal to
define what would be the permissible scope of interim review at the Appellate
stage, to avoid parties re-litigating their case. Proponents, however,
questioned what would be the impact of more prescriptive language, suggesting
that parties then might expend time arguing whether a case in fact is being
re-litigated or not, further putting pressure on timeframes. It was also noted that there would then not
be parallelism between the language in the DSU discussing interim review at the
panel stage and at the appellate stage.
31.
In addition,
delegations considered the impact of this proposal on developing
countries. Some delegations referred to
the addition of another step, and additional costs on developing
countries. Proponents referred to the
possibility that further clarity in the findings could actually be of benefit
to all Members, including developing countries, by helping to avoid issues
arising in later stages in the process.
32.
Delegations next
turned to partial deletion and partial adoption of reports.[26] As has been the case in the past,
participants appeared to view partial adoption as raising less systemic
concerns than partial deletion, in that it would preserve the integrity of
panel reports by requiring an agreement of the entire Membership. In contrast, delegations noted that partial
deletion would result from agreement strictly by the parties prior to
adoption.
33.
Delegations
expressed concern that, where an asymmetric relationship exists between
parties, pressure could be brought to bear on a party to delete a finding,
potentially against its wishes.
Delegations also expressed concern that a non-legal rationale could
provide a basis for deletion, or that parties could resort to bartering or
horse-trading of unfavourable findings.
Apart from providing a positive solution to the dispute, delegations
expressed the view that panel and Appellate Body reports play an important role
in enhancing predictability and security by clarifying WTO rules for all
Members. The view was expressed that allowing
partial deletion would "blur the line" between the parties and the
adjudicators.
34.
Delegations also
enquired whether these proposals were alternative or a package that works
together. Proponents indicated the
proposals are intended to complement each other. For instance, proponents noted that parties
may agree to delete certain aspects of a report at an interim review stage and
not others, but may later reach agreement on partial adoption. This latter step could be influenced by
discussion with non-parties.
35.
In addition,
several technical questions were posed, such as how the agreement of parties to
partially delete or adopt would be reflected in the decision or the report, and
what would be done to address potential breaks in the flow of the report, were
deletions to be made. It was also asked
whether these aspects of the proposal, in particular partial deletion, would be
linked to other aspects, namely, interim review of Appellate Body
proceedings. Proponents expressed the
view that partial deletion would need to be linked with an interim review stage
to work effectively.
36.
Delegations did
not have sufficient time to consider the remaining aspects of flexibility and
Member-control, namely the proposed guidance to adjudicative bodies. We will revert to this next month.
Transparency and amicus curiae briefs
37.
Finally,
participants initiated this week a discussion on transparency and amicus curiae briefs.
Transparency and amicus curiae
briefs have been discussed extensively in the past. As has been highlighted previously, these are
distinct issues, to the extent that transparency relates to providing a degree
of access to information concerning the proceedings, while the question of amicus curiae briefs relates to the potential for active
participation of non-parties, including non-Members, in the proceedings.
38.
You will recall
that convergence had been achieved in previous discussions on "timely
access to panel reports".
Participants agreed that the final reports of panels could be made
available to the Membership in their original language at the time of their
issuance to the parties, followed by circulation of reports in the three
working languages of the WTO. Only upon
circulation in the three languages would the DSU deadlines for adoption or appeal
be triggered. In light of this agreement,
delegations did not re-open this part of the discussion. Therefore, participants discussed the
remaining issues, beginning with the publicity of submissions.
Publicity
of submissions
39.
Submissions to
panels and the Appellate Body are currently treated as confidential, pursuant
to Article 18.2 of the DSU. At the same
time, Article 18 does not prevent a Member from disclosing statements of its
own positions to the public. A number of Members in fact make their own
submissions publicly available, either immediately upon their submission, or
later in the course of the proceedings.
40.
The proposal is
to amend Article 18.2 to provide for the publicity of submissions to panels,
the Appellate Body and arbitrators under the DSU.[27]
The proposal also makes changes to the Working procedures for panels in
Appendix 3.[28] Finally, a registry is proposed that the
Secretariat would maintain, wherein submissions would be made available to the
public. This is reflected in a draft Decision by the DSB.[29]
The title of that draft decision is misstated in that document. It mistakenly reads "protection of
strictly confidential information".
41.
Some useful
clarifications had emerged from past discussions. In particular, delegations clarified that the
protection of strictly confidential information should be ensured, even if
submissions were to be made public as a matter of principle. Also, it was clarified that the Member making
the submission would not be required to take any particular steps to ensure the
publicity of its submission. Rather,
this could be done through the central registry mechanism to be maintained by
the Secretariat. Both of these
clarifications were noted as possibly providing a certain level of comfort as
to the terms on which submissions might be made public, and the limited burden
that this would entail for the Members concerned.
42.
It was also noted
by some Members that the DSU already foresees in Article 18.2 the presentation,
upon request of a Member, of a non-confidential version of the information contained
in submissions to a panel or the Appellate Body. This means that the principle of access to a
non-confidential version of submissions is already present in the DSU, even if
there are no specific details in the text as to when and how such versions
might be requested and obtained. It has
further been noted that, among those Members who currently already make their
own submissions public, the practice varies as to the exact timing and
modalities of such access.
43.
In meetings last
week, participants returned to discussing a number of issues surrounding the
proposals, including the timing at which submissions might be made available to
the public. Participants expressed
varying degrees of comfort with the very principle of this proposal.
44.
It was indicated
that the proposal was intended to cover documents that go to the panel,
including written versions of oral statements, but that the proposal was not
intended to apply to documents of an administrative nature, confidential
materials, or any materials at the interim review stage. The timing of releasing submissions to the
public was also discussed. Delegations
currently releasing submissions to the public indicated that they either
release them immediately or at the conclusion of the dispute. One participant indicated that it released it
submissions as soon as the relevant portion of the dispute is over, but only
upon request.
45.
A number of
delegations expressed support for the proposal, identifying a number of
benefits that arise from this practice.
Certain delegations noted the balance at present between confidentiality
of information and exposure to the public, however, they also pointed to the
need for the system to evolve. Importance was given to letting the public know
how the result was reached in a dispute. It was felt that access to submissions
could help maintain credibility and show the public that the system is
effective. In addition, delegations revealed that access to submissions makes
it easier to work with the relevant industry and stakeholders by giving access
to information, and reduces the burden of addressing enquiries from the media
and public. It was also noted that
access to submissions could prove useful to Members that have an interest in
certain disputes, but do not have the resources to participate in these
disputes as third parties.
46.
Proponents submit
that a great deal of information in submissions is already made available to
the public through the submission of executive summaries, and due to the nature
of the descriptive part and findings sections of panel reports and of Appellate
Body Reports.
47.
Other delegations
continued to express reservations with the proposal, though acknowledging the
merits of transparency in the context of dispute settlement. In terms of the particular language of the
proposal, some delegations took issue with the lack of flexibility, or the
requirement to make all submissions publicly available. It was noted that it is not always clear what
is confidential information, and that in some cases, there is information that,
while technically not confidential, must be withheld. In this regard, one delegation referred to
examples in from other international tribunals (on the law of the sea) where,
as a general rule, submissions are made public, but a party may request the
adjudicating panel to make exception from the rule.
48.
Other delegations
maintained their view that the dispute settlement process is between two
Members, and is governmental in nature.
In addition to problems with possibilities for the timing of release of
information, or resource issues with translation for release, some delegations
noted a difference in perspective on what is transparency and what is public
information. It was noted that transparency
has not been in place for some Members, and the timing was not right to shift
approaches. In particular, it was noted
that transparency would effectively lock governments into positions, and they
are not comfortable with this. In
addition, due to domestic systems, transparency is not always administratively
possible.
49.
In the face of
these comments, proponents asked whether it would be possible or more
convenient or palatable if the documents in question were made available by the
WTO itself, so that that became part of WTO documents that became available.
50.
It seemed that,
differently from the past, delegations showed acceptance of the right of those
who choose to make public their submissions, and have positive views regarding
this practice. In the past, it seems
some delegations had considered that Members did not have this right. The
question was raised as to what would make sense as the first step – does
society request access to information out of interest, or does interest by
society arise from having knowledge of that which is at issue? Perhaps with
more transparency, more interest would be expressed. Delegations were encouraged to continue their
work on this issue.
Open
hearings
51.
The proposals for
open panel and Appellate Body hearings are under Article 18.3.[30] This question is also reflected in a proposed
amendment to the Working Procedures for panels in Appendix 3, with the deletion
of paragraph 2.[31] The draft text foresees that panel meetings
and Appellate Body hearings, as well as meetings of arbitrators, with the
parties and with experts, would be open to the public.
52.
On this issue
also, some useful clarifications had been made in the course of past
discussions. It was confirmed that the
protection of strictly confidential information should be ensured, here too. It was also suggested that the practical
modalities for opening would not necessarily involve physical presence of
observers in the room. In fact, most
open hearings to date have not involved physical presence of observers in the room,
but rather a video link in a separate room.
53.
The overview of
this issue in the Chair's text[32]
and discussions to date suggest that there may be a range of modalities that
should be explored in more detail on this issue, not necessarily limited to
systematic complete opening or entirely closed meetings. Recent practice under the current rules,
where the agreement of the parties has been taken into account in deciding to
open hearings in a variety of formats in specific cases, may also be
informative in this respect.
54.
Proponents this
week referred to their own experiences in recent practice as evidence of the
value and importance of open hearings, at both the panel and appellate stages,
and also in arbitration proceedings. As
discussed above, proponents indicated that open hearings help maintain
credibility with the public, build confidence in the system and facilitate
working with stakeholders, the media and public. Proponents also expressed the view that open
hearings were possible and useful even in highly complex or sensitive cases.
55.
One delegation
expressed the view that open hearings actually encourage deeper involvement and
engagement in the panel process by panelists and parties alike. Other delegations maintained their view that
dispute settlement is an inter-governmental process, and that the DSU does not
authorize open hearings, in particular at the appellate stage. It was also expressed that public hearings
have not attracted great attention.
56.
A number of
delegations expressed a preference for keeping flexibility in the system for
Members to decide whether to open hearings on a case-by-case basis. In this respect, it was suggested that
governments should retain the ability to determine in each case whether there
was an interest in opening the hearing, without prejudging their interest in a
given case.
Amicus curiae briefs
57.
Finally,
participants considered the treatment of so-called "amicus
curiae" briefs, in other words, unsolicited submissions to the
adjudicative bodies. Two specific
proposals in this respect are reflected in the July 2008 text.[33] Both of them propose to expressly disallow
the submission of unsolicited briefs, at the panel and the Appellate Body
stage. These proposals are under
Articles 13 and 17.4 (e) respectively.
58.
The proponents of
transparency had suggested, building on an earlier proposal, that the
submission of amicus curiae briefs be
regulated. Proponents of such regulation
were encouraged to present specific text if they want procedures to that effect
to be agreed. In the consultations this
week, it was proposed that this be discussed on the basis of the procedures
adopted by the Appellate Body in EC – Asbestos. Other participants observed that this text
was currently not before the group and sought clarification of whether the
proponent intended to present it in the form of a proposal. The proponent was invited to present this
text to the group if it wished it to be considered in the context of our
ongoing work.
59.
Several
participants reiterated their support for a regulation of amicus
curiae briefs along these lines, while others reiterated their
support for the proposals that would outlaw the submission of amicus briefs, as being incompatible with the
inter-governmental nature of WTO dispute settlement procedures. It was clear that this issue continues to be
perceived differently by different participants, in that some see it as an
aspect of transparency, while others see a difference in nature between
transparency in the form of "passive" access to the proceedings
(through open hearings or access to submissions) and "active"
participation of non-WTO Members in proceedings.
60.
It was suggested
that a regulation of amicus briefs
would provide predictability in their consideration by adjudicators and limit
their potential adverse impact, by limiting their acceptability, length and
timing. It was observed in response that
the proposal to outlaw consideration by adjudicators of such briefs equally
provided predictability and clear rules for their treatment. It was further suggested that greater clarity
could be provided if the proposed text in this respect was placed in Article 12
rather than Article 13, and without the initial part of the sentence linking it
to the Panel's right to seek information.
The proponent seemed to view this proposal positively.
61.
Some participants
observed that they saw the need to strike a balance between the call for
openness and the intergovernmental nature of the process, but were as of yet
unsure where exactly this balance should be struck. The relevance of the views of the parties and
of the potential relevance of the briefs was noted in this context.
62.
The different
groups were encouraged to continue to work together towards a bridging of their
respective views, and to take advantage of the opportunity to bring greater clarity
to this issue.
Stocktaking
63.
In addition to
discussion on the above topics, delegations took stock of progress in our work
in the areas of effective compliance, post retaliation and third party
participation.
64.
Proponents of the
various proposals under the banner of effective compliance provided new
documents for the delegations to consider for upcoming discussions, including
questions for which responses and input was sought.
65.
Proponents of
recent proposals on third party participation indicated that they had met with
a number of delegations and made adjustments to their proposal. They also indicated they would submit their
revised proposal as an informal document and intend to hold further meetings
with delegations.
66.
Finally,
proponents of the two separate proposals on post-retaliation indicated they had
consulted internally as well as worked with each other, and were attempting to
address some of the concerns expressed by delegations. Proponents stated their intention to update
delegations after addressing these issues.
2. Week
of 20 June 2011[34]
67.
This week,
discussions continued on flexibility and Member control, panel composition,
Strictly Confidential Information (SCI), transparency and amicus curiae
submissions, and mutually agreed solutions.
Flexibility & Member control
68.
This week we
continued consultations on the joint proposals on flexibility and Member
control. Overall, these proposals
address suspension of panel and appellate proceedings, interim review at the
appellate stage, partial deletion and partial adoption of reports, panelists'
expertise, and finally, interpretative guidance parameters. In the meeting of the G40 this week, we
continued our discussion of suspension of appellate proceedings, and opened
discussions on interim review at the appellate stage. In small group consultations, we also
continued discussions on partial adoption and deletion.
Suspension of appellate
proceedings
69.
On the suspension
of appellate proceedings, participants continued to discuss both the objective
and proposed modalities behind this proposal.
The proponents reiterated that the primary purpose of the proposal was
to allow the parties an opportunity to negotiate a settlement of the dispute.
70.
Various
participants recalled their main concerns about the absence of any limit to the
duration of a suspension, the fact that a suspension at the appellate stage
would place the status of an unadopted panel report in limbo, and the potential
negative impact on the ability of the Appellate Body to plan its work around
suspensions of an indefinite duration.
One delegation felt that parties had sufficient time to resolve the
matter during and after consultations and during the panel process, and it
would not make sense to provide additional opportunity at the appellate
stage. Due to differences in the nature
of proceedings, it was felt that allowing for suspension at the appellate stage
would undermine the effectiveness and credibility of the system.
71.
Various views
were expressed concerning the length of suspension that should be
permitted. One participant advocated for
a length that would be proportionate to the overall length of appellate
proceedings. Other delegations felt that
a concrete length to a suspension might not make sense because it might be
unclear how long a suspension would be needed to reach a settlement, in certain
cases. In addition, the Appellate Body
might need flexibility to re-incorporate suspended appeals into its workload,
were such appeals to resume. Proponents
expressed confidence that the Appellate Body would be able to manage its
workload around suspended proceedings, noting that the Appellate Body has
recently shown flexibility in handling variable workloads.
72.
The proposal was
discussed in the context of the possibility of withdrawal in appellate
proceedings. In particular, without a
hard limitation on the length of a suspension, the view was expressed that
parties may be dissuaded from achieving a mutually agreed solution, because it
would remove the pressure to reach an agreement within the constraints of an
appeal. Proponents emphasized their
focus was on the possibility for settlement and recalled that mutually agreed
solutions are the preferred manner in which to resolve disputes. Proponents consider that the possibility of
suspending proceedings gives another opportunity to negotiate, with the
possibility to eventually withdraw were they successful.
73.
The question was
raised as to why a panel report would be declared void and of no legal effect,
in the case a suspension were agreed to and a settlement were reached. It was asked whether a report could not
ultimately be adopted, regardless of a settlement, and whether that report
could have relevance to WTO jurisprudence.
74.
Proponents
expressed that this approach is necessary to have parallelism in the appellate
stage with the panel phase. That is,
were a settlement reached during panel proceedings, there would not be a
report. Proponents consider this language
would be necessary because, in the case of a suspension on appeal, a panel
report would already have been circulated.
In addition, proponents noted that the particular status of an unadopted
panel report is primarily the concern of the parties to a dispute, rather than
to the Membership broadly.
75.
I took note of
the discussions and proposed that delegations continue their work to address
the points raised this week.
Interim review at the
appellate stage
76.
We next discussed
interim review at the appellate stage.
This proposal is addressed in Article 17.5(a) and (b) on page 10 of
the 2008 Chairman's Text. As in past
meetings, proponents suggested that interim review at the appellate stage would
be beneficial in a number of respects.
These include helping correct typographical errors, but also addressing
errors in fact or law, or to allow parties to review findings reached by the
Appellate Body that had not been presented previously, such as in instances
where the Appellate Body completes the analysis after reversing a panel. Proponents submit that interim review is a
more favourable avenue to address these types of error, than requiring issuance
of corrigendum.
77.
Delegations in
the G40 raised a number of concerns with this proposal. Broadly, delegations felt that the inclusion
of interim review at the appellate stage could undermine the integrity of
appeals and allow for undue pressures to be directed at the Appellate
Body. Delegations expressed concern that
interim review would give parties the opportunity to preview the outcome, which
could allow a party to withdraw its appeal to avoid an unfavourable
outcome. It was felt that the legitimacy
of appellate reports could be brought into question, were an appeal withdrawn
unseen.
78.
Delegations
further questioned whether the desire for interim review would be simply to
have another opportunity for parties to present their case through additional
argumentation. Delegations also raised
the issue of a heightened possibility of appellate body reports being leaked
prior to issuance. Finally, delegations
took issue with effects on time savings, and certain delegations felt that the
additional financial and other costs that would result from interim review as
an extra step in the process, would place a higher burden on developing
countries.
79.
To address some
of these concerns, delegations suggested a time-limit could be imposed, or a
limit to the scope of review. For a
number of delegations, these drawbacks far outweighed potential benefits. For
some, the current practice of issuing corrigenda is sufficient.
80.
Proponents noted
that both factual and legal issues are reviewed by panels and discussed at the
interim review stage by parties, and that interim review in this context has
generally been useful. Proponents felt
that the Appellate Body could modify its working procedures, avoiding the possibility
of withdrawal of an appeal at an interim stage, to avoid concerns in this
respect. While noting the issue with
time savings, proponents stressed the value of taking the necessary steps to
have a high quality report.
81.
I suggested we
return to this topic next time as delegations were unable to conclude
discussions.
Partial deletion and partial
adoption of reports
82.
As I mentioned,
we continued discussions on partial deletion and partial adoption of reports
this week in small group consultations.
Partial deletion of reports by panels is addressed in Article 12.7
on page 8 of the July Text. Partial
deletion of Appellate Body reports is addressed in Article 17.13 on page
11. In addition, page 25 reproduces a draft DSB decision to address the
practical aspects of notifying requests for partial adoption to the DSB. Proponents have indicated in the past that
the proposals are intended to complement each other.
83.
Delegations once
again expressed a greater degree of support for partial adoption than for partial
deletion, due to the fact that partial adoption would require agreement and be
within the purview of the entire Membership.
84.
Delegations
enquired as to what would be the status of unadopted findings under these
proposals, and what effect, if any, unadopted findings would have on
implementation or possible Article 21.5 proceedings. Proponents submitted that unadopted findings
would play a role much the same as when the Appellate Body reverses a finding
by the panel and is subsequently unable to complete the analysis.
85.
Delegations also
enquired what is envisaged as subject to partial deletion or adoption under the
proposal. In particular, delegations
asked whether, it would be possible for parties to agree to delete certain
rationale that forms part of an overall finding while nevertheless retaining
the overall finding. If not, in the
alternative, then delegations asked whether it would only be possible for
parties to agree to delete a finding in its entirety, including the underlying
rationale. Proponents indicated their
view that both scenarios would be possible under the proposal as it is
currently drafted.
86.
In response,
delegations expressed concern that in a number of situations, it would not
likely be possible to separate out a discrete rationale for deletion, without
calling into question the related finding.
The view was taken that allowing parties to agree to delete certain
rationales that form part of an overall finding while nevertheless retaining
the overall finding would amount to stepping into the shoes of the
adjudicators, and would blur the line between parties and adjudicator, be it a
panel or the Appellate Body. Moreover,
delegations pointed out that a decision to partially adopt or delete could be
politically motivated, rather than based in law.
87.
Bearing these
concerns in mind, a number of delegations indicated that they would be
agreeable to a proposal that would allow for partial adoption or deletion, were
parties or members required to agree that the entirety of a finding, including
all aspects of the underlying rationale, be deleted. However, delegations appeared to oppose
allowing for partial deletion or adoption of certain rationale while allowing
an overall finding to be retained. In
this regard, it was argued that Article 12.7 of the DSU refers to
"rationale" and "findings" as a package, not as separate
and distinct elements.
88.
Delegations also
continued to express concern that, where an asymmetric relationship exists
between parties, pressure could inappropriately be brought to bear on a party
to delete a finding. Delegations also
expressed concern that parties might resort to bartering or horse-trading of
unfavourable findings under this proposal.
89.
Finally,
delegations enquired whether sufficient time exists in the current working
procedures to allow parties and Members to adequately consider the implications
that may result were an aspect of a final report proposed for partial deletion
or adoption. Proponents contended that
this should not be a concern. Because
consensus would be needed in either the case of partial adoption or deletion,
in their view, sufficient safeguards are built in that would protect against
any unwanted results.
90.
I took note of
the overall discussion, including both conceptual and technical aspects, and encouraged
delegations to continue their work towards achieving a positive outcome.
Panel composition
91. This week delegations continued their discussion in the G40 on the
European Union's updated version of its text panel composition. The proposal is in the form of a DSB decision.
92. Under the proposal, the WTO
Secretariat is asked to present a single list of candidate names for panelists,
based on selection criteria identified by the parties. The parties are then asked to rank the
candidates in terms of preference.
Parties may also exercise limited veto rights. The three names with the highest combined
ratings among those that have not been vetoed by either party would be proposed
as basis for the composition of the panel.
The parties have the ability to agree or disagree with the resulting
composition. If they cannot agree on a
composition, then, as is the case under the current procedures, parties may
request the Director-General to compose the panel. The Director-General would compose a panel
from the same list provided by the Secretariat.
93. Delegations expressed interest in
addressing the proposal at a conceptual level before examining the text. Many delegations expressed support for the
idea of having the Secretariat provide all of the possible candidates' names at
the outset of the process. However,
delegations enquired whether it might prove difficult for the Secretariat to
provide up to 20 names up front. It was
noted that the balance in the initial selection by the Secretariat would be
important. Further, bearing in mind the
possibility for parties to reject candidates for "compelling
reasons", some delegations wondered whether it would be appropriate to
place a hard limit on the number of rejections.
94. The European Union indicated that
its proposal is not targeted at the role of the Secretariat in identifying and
screening candidates, but rather the way in which names are presented to
parties. Nevertheless, the European
Union felt that the Secretariat would be capable of identifying the appropriate
names. The European Union clarified
however that parties would not be permitted to submit their own names under the
proposal, an approach it felt is in accordance with Article 8 of the DSU. The European Union felt that its proposal to
allow a limited number of rejections was consistent with and effective at
giving meaning to the term compelling reasons.
95. Overall, delegations were concerned
that the use of ranking and selection of panelists based on a linear ranking of
the combined highest preferences would not be able to take into account the
relevant criteria, including expertise, experience, nationality, and other
elements. One delegation expressed doubt
that this process would improve on what currently exists. In their view, an iterative process provides
a better way to learn about what parties are seeking, and to see what
adjustments might be needed. Several
delegations questioned whether this approach could ever be feasible without
human intervention. In this vein, it was
suggested that the Secretariat could consult with parties on criteria, after an
initial ranking, and then come up with a tentative proposal. It was also suggested
that the Secretariat could generate separate lists, based on different
criteria, and then parties could rank candidate in each list. Only after this, could a selection be made.
96. Delegations also expressed concern
with the role ascribed to the Director-General to compose the panel under the
proposal. If selection through ranking
was supposed to provide the most optimal solution, it was asked whether a
selection by the Director-General would not necessarily be less optimal based
on the fact that it would deviate from the selection based on the highest
scoring candidates. The concern was that
the Director-General would have to decide in some manner that was biased in
favor of a given party.
97. The European Union emphasized that
it would be unlikely that the Director-General would act against interest of
parties, because he or she would not be limited to the results of the ranking,
except for not taking into account candidates that were initially vetoed. The European Union emphasized overall that
the proposal provides flexibility.
First, the European Union recalled that, within paragraph 3 of its
proposal, parties may agree to a selection process of their choosing, instead
of the proposed ranking system. In
addition, the option to seek composition from the Director-General provides yet
another avenue.
98.
I suggested we
return to this topic next time as delegations were unable to conclude
discussions.
SCI
99.
On Strictly
Confidential Information (SCI), you will recall that Canada previously
announced their intention to revisit the text of their proposal in light of
recent experience and comments received from other participants. This week, Canada reported that it had
continued to have constructive discussions with other participants, in
particular frequent users of SCI, and expected to present a revised text for
our next meetings next month.
Transparency and amicus curiae
100.
In the G40, we
returned to a discussion of transparency and amicus
curiae briefs. As you will
recall, we had already had extensive discussions of most aspects of
transparency at our last set of meetings.
However we had not completed a discussion of amicus
curiae briefs, so we focused on this issue.
101.
You will recall
that we have two proposals before us to clarify that panels and the Appellate
Body would not be entitled to receive unsolicited amicus
curiae briefs, and the suggestion had also been made to adopt procedures
to regulate the submission of such briefs.
You may also recall that I had invited the proponents of such regulation
to submit specific draft legal text to that effect. Yesterday, the United States presented to the
group a non-paper addressing this issue.
102.
The non-paper
proposes a decision by the DSB, containing procedures for the use of WTO
adjudicators to handle the submission of amicus curiae
briefs. The United States explained that
these procedures are inspired by those adopted by the Appellate Body in EC – Asbestos, and by earlier discussions in these
negotiations. The procedures foresee a
two-step process, whereby any person other than a party or third party
interested in making a submission to a WTO adjudicator would have to apply for
leave to file a submission, in other words seek the adjudicator's authorization
to submit a brief, explaining its interest and what it seeks to bring to the
proceedings. The adjudicator, after
giving an opportunity to the parties to comment, would decide whether to accept
or deny the request, in part or in whole.
It would therefore decide whether it wished to receive a submission and
what the submission may address. If
leave is granted, that is, if the submission is authorized, it would have to be
presented in a certain timeframe and would be subject to a maximum number of
pages. The procedure would be applicable in all proceedings, subject to any
modifications by the adjudicator in a given case after consultation with the
parties.
103.
The discussion
focused primarily on the question of whether it was desirable to regulate
unsolicited submissions to adjudicator in such a manner. A number of participants expressed support
for such procedures, as a means of improving the management of unsolicited
briefs by bringing greater discipline and predictability to their presentation
and treatment. Some participants,
however, considered that the submission of unsolicited briefs by non-Members is
not properly part of WTO dispute settlement procedures, and expressed systemic
concerns with this notion.
104.
In the view of
these participants, WTO disputes are between WTO Members and all interests
should be channelled through the governments concerned. In this context, the submission of amicus
briefs is not, in their view, and should not be part of the dispute settlement
procedures. From that perspective, the
elaboration of specific procedures to handle such briefs may be seen as an
undue invitation or endorsement given to the filing of such unsolicited
briefs. It was observed in this respect
that the fact that such briefs exist in reality was not a sufficient
justification for their endorsement.
105.
Other
participants observed that the current reality is that such briefs are
submitted but also that, as per the
Appellate Body's rulings to date under the existing DSU provisions, they may be
accepted by adjudicators. Yet there is
no limitation or regulation on the manner or moment at which they may be
presented, and no clarity as to how they might be handled in a given case by
the adjudicator.
106.
From that
perspective, it was observed that the introduction of procedures to regulate
the manner in which such briefs may be submitted would introduce new
limitations on their presentation, by imposing time- and page-limits, and a
two-step process whereby the adjudicator would have an opportunity to control
what briefs are submitted to it and on what subjects. It was suggested that this would assist the
parties and the adjudicator, rather than those wishing to submit briefs, by
providing greater predictability in the process, allowing the adjudicator to
decide whether it wished to receive a brief or not, and ensuring respect for
the due process rights of the parties.
One participant observed that from the perspective of a developing
country with limited resources, such regulation would have three benefits
limiting the issues that can be raised in such briefs, limiting the length of
submissions, and controlling the timing of the process.
107.
Comparisons were
made with domestic procedures, in which a distinction is made between those who
have "standing" to appear before the Court, and other
participants. Reference was also made to
other international jurisdictions, where procedures have been devised to handle
such submissions.
108.
In light of this
discussion, I observed that participants approached this issue from very
different standpoints and I sought to explore whether there was any manner in
which the two positions could be bridged.
Some participants suggested that the proposed procedures went in the direction
of bridging the two positions, by ensuring that any amicus briefs would be
submitted only upon authorization by the adjudicator. In that sense, submissions that are filed
pursuant to a leave granted under the proposed procedures would be
"solicited", and no "unsolicited" briefs would be
accepted.
109.
I invited
participants to consider the possible inclusion of additional language in the
proposed procedures, to clarify:
(1)
that only the parties and third parties have a "right" to
make submissions to the adjudicators (in other words, other persons have no
standing a priori in the proceedings, and will
need to follow the procedures and receive an authorization from the adjudicator
in order to possibly gain the right to file a document); and
(2)
that the adjudicators would not accept any submissions from such other
persons, other than those filed in accordance with the procedures (in other
words, no "unsolicited", i.e. unapproved, brief may be submitted, and
only briefs that have been authorized by the adjudicator through the procedures
can be filed).
Mutually Agreed Solutions
110.
In the small
group discussions on mutually agreed solutions, convergence was found around
the following language for Article 3.6 of the DSU:
"Where the parties to a dispute reach a mutually agreed solution
with respect to a matter raised under the dispute settlement provisions of the
covered agreements, each party shall notify the solution to the DSB and
relevant Councils and Committees. Each party shall submit the notification in
writing within 14 days after reaching the solution and shall set out in detail
the terms of the solution. Any Member
may raise any point relating to the solution in the DSB and the relevant
Councils and Committees."
111.
This language is
intended to improve the notification obligation already contained in this
provision, by clarifying what should be notified and the timeframe for
notification.
112.
In the
discussions leading to convergence on this language, it was clarified that the
expression "each party" is intended to ensure that each party has an
obligation to notify a mutually agreed solution, but that this does not
preclude the parties having reached such solution from complying with this
requirement through a joint notification.
Indeed, it was suggested that this could be the preferable solution in
practice, but the text would also not preclude separate notifications. There was also some discussion of the timing
of the notification, including with respect to the question of what moment
exactly might be considered as the date when the solution has been
"reached", in light of the potential diversity of situations
involved. It was observed in this
respect that the parties themselves would be in the best position to assess
when they have reached a mutually agreed solution to their dispute. The timeframe of 14 days was considered to
allow the parties to prepare the notification after having reached the solution
while not unduly delaying the transmission of the information to the membership
once a solution has been reached.
113.
Subsequently, in the G40, a number of delegations expressed hesitation
with the reference to "each party", asking whether the current
drafting clearly conveys the possibility to notify a mutually agreed solution
jointly. Although the view was expressed
that the text permitted the possibility of notifying a mutually agreed solution
either individually or jointly, delegations sought to provide further
clarity. Delegations initially converged
on the idea of adding a footnote to specify a preference to notify such
solutions jointly. Ultimately, however, delegations sought to state this
preference in the main text, by adding the following sentence: "A
notification made jointly by the parties to the dispute is preferred." as
the penultimate sentence in the text approved by the small group. At least one delegation expressed an interest
in retaining the current text in Article 3.6 of the DSU.
114.
Some delegations
additionally enquired as to why the proposed
text did not refer expressly to "consultation" provisions in
addition to "dispute settlement" provisions, as is in the case
elsewhere in the DSU. It was suggested
that the DSU is currently inconsistent, referring to "consultation and
dispute settlement provisions", at times, but other times, only referring
to "dispute settlement provisions".
Delegations agreed to return to this issue at a later time, in an effort
to harmonize references throughout the DSU.
115.
Finally, one
delegation suggested that the proposed text should not refer to "a matter", but instead, should refer to "the matter", as the term is used in other
contexts. Delegations similarly agreed
to return to discussion on this matter next time.
116.
I encouraged
delegations to hold further discussions in advance of our next meeting, in the
interest of working out our differences.
Stocktaking
117. In addition to our discussion on the
above topics, we took stock of progress in our work in the areas of effective
compliance, post retaliation and third party participation.
118.
Proponents on the
various proposals under the banner of effective compliance
presented documentation reflecting recent discussions held on the usefulness of
retaliation measures to achieving compliance and rebalancing of
concessions. Proponents invited
additional delegations to participate in the discussion. Text was additionally submitted updating the
proposal on notification of retaliatory measures. Proponents indicated that they would be ready
to discuss these matters in the ensuing G40 meetings.
119.
Proponents of
recent proposals on third party participation
indicated that they have met with several delegations and are in the process of
revising their non-paper to submit as a job document in the near future.
120.
Finally,
proponents of the two separate proposals on post-retaliation
indicated that they have continued discussions and believe that conversations
are maturing.
3. Week
of 25 July 2011[35]
Strictly confidential information (SCI)
121.
This week, Canada
presented a revised version of its proposal on the protection of strictly
confidential information (SCI)[36],
following recent work with a group of interested delegations. Canada explained that the revised proposal
was intended to reflect three objectives:
– ensuring
that panels and the Appellate Body will adopt procedures for the protection of
SCI if requested;
– ensuring
the ability to tailor the procedures to the needs of the dispute in
question;
– providing
the information-holder comfort that information that constitutes SCI as defined
in the proposal will be protected throughout the proceedings.
122.
In pursuance of
these objectives, the proposal envisages amendments to the text of DSU
Article 18, as well as an appendix and a proposed decision by the
DSB. In Article 18, a new paragraph
would make it clear that, upon request of a party, a panel would be required to
adopt procedures for the protection of SCI, after consulting with the
parties. The level of protection
afforded by these procedures would be maintained throughout the various stages
of the proceedings (including the appellate stage) for the remainder of the
dispute. The initial responsibility of
identifying information as SCI would rest on the party seeking the
protection. A challenge procedure is
foreseen, to allow this designation to be verified by the adjudicator, in the
event of a disagreement about the SCI designation. The proposal foresees that
the procedures would apply to panel proceedings as well as arbitrations under
Articles 22.6 and 25.
123.
Participants
expressed support for the objectives pursed by the proposal and welcomed the
revised text as a step forward and a good basis for further discussion.
124.
Canada clarified
that the procedures would apply to all panel proceedings, including compliance
panels. The question was raised as to
whether arbitral proceedings for the determination of the implementation period
(under Article 21.3(c)) and appellate proceedings should also be
covered. It was also suggested that in
both cases, it was unlikely that SCI would need to be presented. It was also clarified that the proposal did
not prejudge the moment at which the presentation of information designated as
SCI could take place. However,
information already submitted to the panel could not be designated as SCI at a
later stage in the proceedings. Rather,
the information should be designated as SCI at the time of its initial
submission.
125.
Clarification was
also sought as to the manner in which the procedures intended to address
information gathered in the context of a procedure under Annex V of the SCM
Agreement, in light of the fact that footnote 67 of that agreement already
addresses the confidentiality of such information. Canada clarified that the intention was not
to address the treatment of this information in the course of the
information-gathering procedure under Annex V, but rather the subsequent
treatment of this information by adjudicators.
126.
It was also
clarified that the consultation foreseen with the parties in the context of the
adoption of the procedures relates to the detail of the procedures, rather than
the principle of their adoption. In
other words, the panel would not be at liberty not to adopt procedures if
requested to do so by one of the parties to the dispute, but it would have the
discretion to determine, in consultation with the parties, what type of
procedures would provide an adequate level of protection in the circumstances
of the case.
127.
It was clarified
that third parties would not be prevented from seeking the adoption by a panel
of procedures for the protection of SCI, but that the panel would then have the
discretion to adopt or not adopt such procedures, taking into account the
interests at issue. It was also observed
that the evidentiary burden on third parties was different from that borne by
the parties to the dispute, and that in cases where SCI were relevant, the
parties themselves would be likely to have sought the adoption of SCI
procedures, which third parties would be able also to take advantage of if
needed. More generally, Canada indicated
that it would review the overall consistency of references to third parties
throughout the text.
128.
With respect to
the duration of the protection, is was asked when the dispute should be
considered to have ended, and was questioned whether it was appropriate to
limit the protection to the duration of the dispute, since the need to protect
the confidentiality of the information may persist beyond the end of the
dispute.
129.
The relationship
between the provision of a "non-confidential summary of the
information" contained in written submissions under Article 18.2 of
the DSU and the treatment of SCI was discussed.
It was observed that there was a difference between a summary of the
information contained in a submission (as foreseen in Article 18.2) and a
redacted version of a document containing SCI.
In the first case, the intent was to summarize certain information,
while in the second, the object was to remove from the document any references
to confidential information. The
difference between these two situations was acknowledged, but it was also
questioned whether it was necessary to make such a distinction in the context
of Article 18.2, since any "non-confidential summary" provided
pursuant to this provision would, by definition, not contain any sort of
confidential information, SCI or otherwise.
130.
It was observed
in this context that the provision of non-confidential summaries under
Article 18.2 is useful, in practice, in order to allow the party having
submitted any confidential information to formulate in a manner acceptable to
it a summary that can be made available publicly, thus avoiding the risk of
mishandling of such confidential information.
Potential linkages were acknowledged between this part of the proposed
text and aspects of the proposals on transparency. It was also acknowledged that the proposal
did not intend to prejudge such aspects.
131.
A number of
additional questions were raised, which we did not have the time to address and
will need to return to at our next meetings.
These relate to the operation of the challenge procedure, the manner in
which continuity in the level of protection would be ensured throughout the
duration of the proceedings, the need to distinguish between the holder of the
information and the party seeking protection for it (which may not always be
the same), drafting consistency and the distribution of text addressing
protection of SCI between Article 18 and the Appendix.
Panel composition[37]
132.
We continued the
paragraph-by-paragraph discussion in the G40 where we left off in May, taking
into account the more conceptual issues addressed in June.
133.
We focused on the bracketed language in paragraphs 3 and 4 of the revised
proposal informally circulated by the European Union in May. In relation to paragraph 3, there was a
discussions of the use of the words "ability" or
"right". In paragraph 4, some
participants suggested deleting the bracketed language addressing the updating
of CVs of candidate panelists, and the bracketed language dealing with how the
Secretariat identifies or gets to know candidates before proposing them to the parties. The European Union expressed flexibility with
respect to the exact terms to be used in these paragraphs.
134.
The discussion on
the draft language of paragraphs 3 and 4 also raised some conceptual
issues. The European Union confirmed
that one of the objectives of its proposal was to reduce vetoes by parties,
and to reduce the use of objections to situations where the reasons for
objection were truly compelling.
135.
Some delegations
advocated for the possibility of the parties proposing names. In response, the European Union
explained that the proposal is not supposed to amend Article 8.6 of the
DSU, which provides that the names should be proposed by the Secretariat. At the same time, the European Union considered
that in its list of proposed nominations under the proposal, the Secretariat
could probably fully take into account any preference for specific persons
expressed by the parties.
136.
As regards selection
criteria, there were questions about how the Secretariat would handle
conflicting criteria. Further, one
delegation expressed the concern that the parenthesised language in paragraph 4
of the proposal ("(such as qualifications or experience)") might open
the door for parties expressing inappropriate selection criteria unrelated to
the dispute at issue. The
European Union responded that the proposal uses the word "wish"
for parties' expressing selection criteria.
Therefore, while the Secretariat would need to do its best to take all
selection criteria into account, it would not have an obligation to act upon
criteria that turned out to be infeasible.
We also discussed whether each individual on the Secretariat's proposed
list of panelists should fulfil all of the selection criteria indicated by the
parties, or whether individual candidates could fulfil only some of these
criteria, with the totality of names on the Secretariat's proposed list
fulfilling all of the criteria.
137.
The
European Union also explained that parties could agree to derogate from
the proposed procedures, in whole or in part, to the extent that this does not
conflict with relevant DSU provisions.
Furthermore, the Secretariat would not need to indicate in its list
which candidate panelist fulfilled which of the selection criteria. Nor would the Secretariat need to check the
availability of candidates when drawing up its list of names, but only at a
later stage. The European Union also
explained that it saw no need to address in the proposal whether the parties
would continue sharing their selection criteria with each other.
138.
Finally, in
response to questions, the Secretariat explained that as of June 2011, 94
out of 157 panels have been composed – in whole or in part – by the
Director-General. The Secretariat
also explained that it was difficult to say how easy or difficult it would be
for the Secretariat to provide 12 to 20 names in a given case, as this
would depend on how long and unusual the list of required characteristics might
be. Also, when many parties (and third
parties) are involved, less potential panelists would be available.
139.
I encouraged
delegations to work together in the same constructive spirit until our next
week of meetings.
Flexibility and Member-control[38]
Interim
review at the appellate stage
140.
In the G40, we
returned to a discussion of the proposal to introduce interim review at the
appellate stage. In light of the views expressed last
month, I invited participants to focus on the potential benefits vs. the
potential costs of the proposed procedures, so that we can have a clear basis
to weigh the various aspects against each other.
141. So, first, I sought confirmation of
what the potential benefits of an interim review process at the appellate stage
might be. Based on previous discussions,
I identified the following: (i) provide an opportunity to rectify any factual
errors in the report, (ii) provide an opportunity to comment on, and possibly
obtain rectification of, legal determinations that would be problematic, and
(iii) as a result, improve the quality of the final report and hence the
outcome of the dispute and its value in clarifying certain legal issues. The proponents further identified potential
benefits in terms of clarifying the basis for adverse findings and hence
promoting a better understanding of implementation requirements, and ensuring
sufficient transparency in the report as to the appellate process (for example
with respect to the timeline for completion of the appellate process).
142. There was some discussion of the
differences and similarities between panel and Appellate Body processes that
could affect the relative usefulness of interim review at both stages. It was observed that, to the extent that the
focus was intended to be on the correction of factual errors, this was less
relevant at the appellate stage, given the limited scope of appellate review of
factual matters. It was also observed that in practice, interim review at
the panel stage tended to be limited to factual issues. In response, it was
observed that issues relating to factual determinations could also arise at the
appellate stage, including in situations where the Appellate Body would
complete the analysis of issues not addressed by the panel. In such situations, factual as well as legal
determinations might be made. It was
also observed that the opportunity to correct errors was arguably more
important at the appellate stage, given the absence of any further opportunity
to review the legal or factual determinations prior to adoption of the
reports.
143.
As far as
potential costs are concerned, some participants reiterated their concerns with
respect to the integrity of the reports and the independence of the Appellate
Body. Concerns in this respect related
to pressure being exercised on the Appellate Body by parties questioning the
validity of its reasoning, as well as risks of the interim versions of reports
being leaked. In response, it was
suggested that similar observations might be made in relation to panel
proceedings, and yet their integrity and independence was not in question.
144.
Questions were
also raised about the timeframe implications of the proposal. It was clarified that the proposal envisaged
an additional 30 days in the duration of appellate proceedings for the
completion of an interim review. It was
observed that, in proportion to the total length of the proceedings, this
appeared quite significant, and the potential benefits should also be weighed
against this cost.
145.
In considering
how potential negative impacts of the procedure might be addressed, it was
suggested that providing for additional interaction between the parties and the
Appellate Body at earlier stages of the proceeding, for example through a
second substantive meeting with the parties, may resolve some of the concerns
relating to the novelty of certain determinations at the appellate stage, while
avoiding the perceived downsides of an interim review.
146.
Some participants
suggested that there may be a greater level of comfort with a review limited to
factual issues. It was also observed
that the current practice of issuing corrigenda to rectify factual errors left
uncertain the legal status of such corrigenda when these are issued after the
adoption of the report. They thus did
not provide an optimal solution.
However, it was also suggested that a review limited to factual issues
may not justify the additional time required.
Guidance
to adjudicative bodies
147.
In the small
group, we started a discussion of the proposal for guidance to be provided to
WTO adjudicators. As indicated
previously, the purpose of this proposal is to clarify, through DSB decisions,
the manner in which WTO adjudicators should address three issues, i.e. the use
of public international law, the notion of measures under review, and
interpretative approaches.
148.
The United States
reported that it had had useful consultations with other Members on this issue,
which had confirmed that the issues continue to be live and that it would be
useful for Members to discuss how to move the system forward on them. It also indicated that it was flexible with
respect to format and particular content of the proposed guidance.
149. In light of the questions raised in past discussions, I first sought
the general views of participants on the provision of guidance to
adjudicators. Some observed that they
had doubts of a general nature as to the appropriateness of the legislative body providing guidance to
adjudicators and wondered if this might shift the focus of the discussion
before the adjudicatory body but not actually resolve the issues. There were also questions with respect
to the substance of some of the actual
guidance proposed. However, participants remained open to a discussion of these
issues, also to better understand the underlying concerns being addressed.
150. One delegation observed that it may be useful for the Membership to
provide guidance on some of these issues, but that discussion might be
facilitated if such guidance were expressed in a more principled and concise
manner, based on the identification of the key principles intended to be
conveyed though the guidance. Without
prejudice to their views concerning the specific guidance reflected in the
various areas of the proposal, other participants agreed that this could
provide a helpful way to approach the discussion.
151.
With these
general considerations in mind, we turned to a discussion of the draft
parameters on "measures under review".
"Measures
under review"
152.
We considered the
paragraphs under the heading "Order of analysis". It was observed that this section in fact
covered various issues not necessarily related to the "order of
analysis", including advisory opinions (or obiter dicta),
the completion of analysis and expired measures. The United States agreed that the headings
under this section could be clarified.
153.
With respect to
the initial paragraphs of this section, the United States explained that their
purpose was to clarify, with reference to the role of adjudicators as defined
in the DSU, that it would not be appropriate for them to offer advisory
opinions beyond the determinations that are necessary to the resolution of
the dispute. Such opinions were
unhelpful both for the resolution of the dispute and for the system as a
whole. In this respect, the objective of
ensuring that adjudicators exercised adequate judicial restraint served to
protect the distinction between the roles of the adjudicative and legislative
functions of the organization.
154.
It was suggested
that, in the perspective of drawing out the principles at issue, it may be
helpful to clarify this issue with reference primarily to the relevant
provisions of the DSU defining the role of adjudicators, rather than through
detailed explanatory text or examples.
There was some discussion of the provisions of the DSU that may be
considered relevant, including, in addition to Article 3.4,
Articles 3.2, 11 and 7. There
was some discussion of the exact role of adjudicators in light of the
definition of their terms of reference as well as their role in assisting the
DSB in discharging its functions.
155.
It was also
suggested that the reference to "advisory opinions" may be misleading,
to the extent that what appeared to be at issue was rather the question of obiter dicta statements by panels and the Appellate Body,
i.e. statements that were not part of the ratio decidendi
for the decision. Some participants
observed that they did not consider the existence of some obiter dicta
statements as necessarily detrimental, since they could be distinguished from
the ratio decidendi, and would not have the
same legal value. It was also observed
however that, despite their absence of legally binding or precedential
authority, such statements are in practice referred to by litigants as
expressions of the state of the law.
156.
Different types
of situations were discussed with a view to clarifying the nature and extent of the concern being
addressed. The proponent identified
situations in which a ruling would be made in relation to a claim not presented
to the panel, or views would be offered with respect to a hypothetical measure
not before the panel. A difference was
acknowledged between legitimate statements of the adjudicator made as part of
its reasoning, including as part of the interpretative process, and statements
addressing issues not before the adjudicator.
157.
In this respect,
other participants agreed that rulings on claims or measures not presented to
the adjudicator would fall outside the terms of reference of a panel, but it
was questioned whether statements relating to hypothetical scenarios would
always be inappropriate if they served to clarify the reasoning of the
adjudicator with respect to an issue properly before it. A distinction was also suggested between a
situation in which a panel would rule on a claim not presented to it, and a
situation in which it would choose to continue its analysis of a claim properly
submitted to it beyond an initial determination that one of the conditions for
demonstrating the claim had not been met. It was suggested that in the latter
scenario, it may be appropriate for the adjudicator to pursue the analysis in
the interest of arriving at a proper resolution of the matter before it. It was also suggested, however, that it was
important for the adjudicator to exercise a degree of restraint in determining
the findings to be made in order to avoid going beyond what is necessary and
unduly delaying the resolution of the dispute.
158.
We also
considered the part of the proposal relating to expired measures and the
date of existence of a measure. The
United States explained that the purpose of this part of the guidance was to
clarify the date as of which the existence of the measure at issue should be
assessed by adjudicators. Potentially, a
range of dates might be referred to (such as the date of the request for
consultations, the date of the panel request, or the date of the panel
rulings). In order to provide clarity
and avoid creating a moving target, the proposal is for the date of the
consultation request to be used as basis
for the assessment. The proponent also
clarified that situations in which the action or behaviour at issue existed as
of the date of the request for consultations and continued beyond that date
would be covered.
159.
It was asked how
the proposal intended to treat situations in which a measure may still be
producing effects, while no longer giving rise to action by the Member, for example
in the case of subsidies. The United
States acknowledged the potential complexity of some situations in terms of
identifying exactly the date of expiry of certain measures, but suggested that
this proposal did not seek to resolve such questions but rather sought to
clarify as of when the existence of the measure should be assessed. It was suggested that the drafting did not
make clear that this was the primary object of the text, as it seemed to
address when a measure should be considered to have expired.
160.
It was also asked
whether and how the proposed guidance would apply to compliance panels,
considering that a request for consultations may not be required and that the
(in)existence of a measure might be the very object of the disagreement.
Transparency and amicus
curiae briefs[39]
161.
We continued our
discussion of amicus curiae briefs, focusing on
the detail of the procedure proposed under the non-paper circulated by the
United States in June.[40] The proposal envisages that the adjudicator
would set out a deadline for filing an application to submit an amicus brief,
taking into consideration inter alia the
need not to cause disruption in the proceedings. This deadline would be posted on the WTO
website, and applicants interested in filing an amicus brief would have to
provide information about themselves, including their sources of financing, and
the nature of the contribution that they envisaged making to the case. The adjudicator would then decide whether to
accept or reject any such requests, the
parties having had an opportunity to comment.
162.
Clarification was
sought as to what role the information provided by the applicant would play in
the adjudicator's decision to accept or not accept the filing of a brief. The United States clarified that the procedures
addressed the process for the management of amicus briefs,
rather than the basis on which adjudicators would decide, in a given case, to
accept or reject a brief. It could be
expected that the adjudicator would base its determination on its perception of
the usefulness of the proposed brief.
163.
Clarifications
were also sought in relation to the manner in which the relevance of the
contribution that could be made to the process by the brief could be assessed,
in light of the fact that the arguments of the parties would not have been
fully exchanged and would be confidential.
In response it was suggested that the adjudicator would have access to
the submissions already exchanged and could assess the relevance on that basis.
164.
A distinction was
suggested between the proposed posting on the website of a deadline for
applications to be filed, and the notion of regulation of amicus briefs per se. In
particular, it was suggested that the publicity given to the deadline appeared
to present an open invitation for briefs to be submitted, thus providing an
active endorsement of this practice, rather than only a regulation of it. In this respect, several participants
reiterated their concern with the notion of "regulating" such briefs
in a systematic manner. It was suggested
that consideration be given to developing procedures that could be adopted on a
case-by-case basis in the event of an agreement of the parties, rather than a
generally applicable procedure.
165.
I encouraged
interested delegations to continue to work together and to seek ways of
bridging their differences.
Mutually agreed solutions[41]
166.
It will be
recalled that last month, convergence was emerging around language for
Article 3.6 of the DSU, to improve the terms of the obligation to notify
mutually agreed solutions. This week, we
focused on resolving the last remaining substantive issue left open in the
discussion of last month. This concerned
whether the notification could be made by the parties individually as well as
jointly, and whether a preference should be expressed for joint
notification. Convergence was found
around the following language:
"The parties shall submit jointly or, if a party so prefers,
separately, the notification in writing within 14 days after reaching the
solution and shall set out in detail the terms of the solution. Any Member may raise any point relating to
the solution in the DSB and the relevant Councils and Committees."
167.
This language
would be for the second sentence of Article 3.6, the rest of the text
remaining as discussed in June. However,
one delegation indicated that it had concerns with a part of the text on which
convergence had previously been achieved, i.e. the reference to notifying
"in detail" the terms of the solution. That delegation expressed concern at the
level of detail being required to be notified.
The proponents observed that this language did not prescribe any
particular level of detail and left it for the Members concerned to determine
what level of detail would be sufficient to meet the requirement of the
provision. I recalled in this respect
that convergence had emerged around this formulation after extensive
discussion, and that this formulation reflected efforts by the proponents and
other participants to come to a common understanding and strike the right
balance between the need for an effective notification and the ability of the
Members concerned to determine the exact contents of the notification. I invited the delegation having raised this
concern to review this matter further, taking into account also the convergence
found around the rest of the text on this issue.
168.
With respect to
the other two issues raised in June concerning the first sentence, that is, the
reference to "consultations" in addition to "dispute
settlement" provisions and the proposed reference to "the matter", rather than "a
matter", it was agreed that these would be considered in the context of
overall harmonization rather than as a substantive issue in this
discussion. One delegation observed that
the latter may also have substantive implications.
4. Week
of 26 September 2011[42]
169.
This week, we
returned to discussion of remand. We
also continued our discussions on flexibility and Member control, strictly
confidential information, mutually agreed solutions and some aspects of
effective compliance.
Remand
170.
Remand is
addressed at Article 17.12, subparagraphs (a) to (d), and Article 17bis in the draft legal text.[43] We returned to this issue this week for the
first time since the end of 2009.
171.
In starting the
consultations this week, I noted that from our earlier discussions, it appeared
that there was significant interest in introducing a remand mechanism. At the same time, it seemed clear from these
earlier discussions that this was considered a technically complex proposal,
and that careful drafting would be required to ensure that the mechanism works
smoothly and does not unduly hinder the progress of the dispute resolution
process on other issues. My sense from
earlier discussion was that for some delegations, an endorsement of the
introduction of remand still depended on finding the right mechanism and the
right expression of this mechanism, to ensure
that the expected benefits are secured and that potential adverse impacts are
successfully addressed.
172.
I also recalled
that our most recent work had focused on a number of issues that the proponents
had identified as the key areas requiring future work. These were grouped around two categories:
-
A first group of
issues was considered to be essentially "technical", in the sense
that there was broad convergence as to the substance but some discussion was
still needed on the proper formulation.
Three issues were identified in this category:
a. the definition of issues for remand,
or scope of the referral - there was convergence on the intention here,
which is that remand should be available in situations in which the Appellate
Body has found itself unable to "complete the analysis" of a claim
because it does not have at its disposal the sufficient factual elements to do
so.
b. the question of new evidence,
that is, what evidence the remand panel would be able to consider, in the
remand process. There was agreement, in
this context, that the intention was not to allow a reopening of the whole
evidentiary process but simply to complete an analysis that had not been
carried out earlier. In that context,
any new evidence would be that sought by the remand panel for the purposes of
carrying out that analysis.
c. finally, the question of logistics
was identified also as a primarily technical issue.
-
In a second
category, two "conceptual" issues had been identified, which required
further discussion to develop convergence on the substance.
a. the first was the question of who
initiates remand. Past discussions
suggested that there was agreement on the general notion that it should be
possible for the party that has a legitimate interest in having the remanded
issue resolved to seek remand, but the uncertainty revolved around the question
of how this should work in the scenario where the unresolved issue was a
defense raised by the respondent. In
that case, it remained unclear what the implications were in terms of who would
have an interest in the remand, depending on the manner in which the Appellate
Body formulates its findings and recommendations.
b. the second unresolved
"conceptual" issue was what should happen to those findings that have
been completed and that are not directly affected by the remand. In that context, there was an interest in
seeing such rulings moving forward to adoption and implementation without
delay, but there was also concern as to whether it was always possible to
clearly dissociate the completed and uncompleted findings, for the purposes of
implementation.
173.
Participants
agreed with this initial description of the issues for consideration. The proponents submitted that the
introduction of remand in the DSU would represent a fundamental improvement to
make the system fairer and enhance its efficiency. They considered that the July 2008 text,
which largely reflects the text put forward by the proponents, still provided a
very good basis for discussion, and expressed hope that it would be possible to
address the outstanding issues. Some
participants identified further questions for consideration, including the
possible implications of remand on the operation of Articles 19, 21 and 22 of
the DSU, as well as the manner in which remand would function in the context of
an appeal based on Article 11 of the DSU.
174.
We then
considered the two "conceptual" issues.
175.
With respect to who
should initiate remand, I noted that, based on past discussions, it is
understood that the remand referral, if it is to take place, would be initiated
by parties, rather than the Appellate Body itself. The remaining question to be resolved was
then which of the parties should have the initiative. It was clear that where the issue that
remains incomplete is a claim, the
complainant would have an interest in initiating remand. There was more difficulty was in identifying
which party should be able to initiate remand, where the outstanding issue was
a defense.
This is why two options are reflected in the text, i.e. either the
complainant always initiates remand, or the party that submitted the claim or
defense at issue.
176.
My perception
from earlier discussions was that the different views on this issue in part
reflected different assumptions being made as to what the Appellate Body would
do, if it found an initial violation (for example, a violation of Article XI of
GATT 1994), but was unable to complete the analysis on a defense that would
potentially justify the initial violation (for example an Article XX
defense). Different scenarios might be
identified:
-
possibility 1: if it is assumed that the Appellate Body would make a finding of
inconsistency with Article XI but would not make a recommendation to bring the
measures into conformity with the Agreement because the analysis of the defense
is still pending (and therefore, overall consistency or inconsistency with the
Agreement remains unclear), then the complainant would have an interest
in pursuing remand, if completion of the Article XX analysis is the only way to
obtain a recommendation on the claim;
-
possibility 2: if it is assumed that the Appellate Body would make a
recommendation to bring the measures into conformity with the GATT 1994 on the
basis of the finding of violation of Article XI, despite the fact that the
defense remains unaddressed, then the respondent would have an interest
in remand, if that is the only way to ensure a full consideration of its
defense and possibly reverse the recommendation.
-
Possibility 3: if it is unclear what the Appellate Body would do, then
potentially either party might have an interest in remand, depending on which
scenario materializes.
177.
In the
consultations this week, the proponents reiterated that they favoured allowing
either party to initiate remand, to allow situations involving unresolved
defenses to be addressed by having the defendant initiate the remand. Support was expressed for this view, on the
basis that if remand was introduced, the party advancing the claim or defense
should have the ability to initiate it, because it has a legitimate interest in
doing so and is also in the best position to decide whether to expend the
resources. This would preserve the
allocation of the respective burdens on the parties, for efficiency and
fairness' sake.
178.
Some participants
reiterated their view that, as a starting point, the complainant should be
initiator.
179.
At the same time,
it was recognized that this may depend on the premise upon which the discussion
is based, as to how the Appellate Body would approach the relationship between
claims and defenses. In this respect,
some discussion arose as to the likelihood of the first or second scenario
identified by the Chairman arising. Some
delegations considered that the second scenario was most likely, i.e. that the
Appellate Body would make a recommendation for the Member concerned to bring
its measures into conformity, given the existence of a violation finding, while
others expressed doubt as to whether the adjudicator would, in such a
situation, consider that there was a sufficient basis for such a
recommendation, given the relationship between the various provisions within
the Agreement at issue (GATT 1994).
180.
Beyond these
specific scenarios, several participants explained that their general
underlying concern was that there should be no possibility of a party
(specifically, a defendant) abusing the system by seeking remand simply to
delay the procedure, in a situation where the complainant itself did not see
merit in pursuing the remand. It was
further suggested that there appeared to be no strong reason to deny the
respondent the possibility of imitating remand, but that it may be necessary to
consider whether access can be limited so as to prevent undue delays.
181.
In response, it
was suggested that if the concern related to potential abusive recourse to
remand, it may be most useful to focus on identifying and addressing the
specific situations in which this could arise.
One participant suggested that there could be ways to reduce the
possibility of misuse, for example by defining the situations in which the
defendant would be considered to have a legitimate interest in pursuing remand,
as suggested in an earlier proposal. It
was also suggested that, in order to address such concerns, the focus should be
on ensuring that the situations in which the Appellate Body identifies a need
for remand are carefully identified rather than on the question of which party
should initiate it. In this respect, it
was observed that the possibility of invoking remand, and thus the potential
for a party abusing it, was in fact very circumscribed, since it would always
be a prerequisite to any recourse to remand by a party, that the Appellate Body
would have previously identified a situation in which it was unable to complete
the analysis.
182.
It was also asked
whether defining access to remand for the defendant with reference to the
"defenses" that it has invoked implied that an argument in defense
had to be expressly identified as an affirmative defense in order to form the
basis of a request for remand by the defendant, and whether this was something
that the Appellate Body would have to address expressly.
183.
In the course of
the discussion, it was observed that the need for remand could arise in a
variety of situations, including where the panel has exercised judicial economy
on certain claims, but also in situations where the Appellate Body's legal
interpretations bring into play aspects that have not been discussed or
addressed before the panel. References
were made to the Canada – Dairy and US – Hot-Rolled Steel cases as examples of instances in
which the Appellate Body has been unable to complete the analysis.
184.
In conclusion, I
observed that a number of participants appeared to support the possibility for
both parties having the right to initiate remand in specific
circumstances. I also noted that all
participants appeared to be committed to avoiding abuses in exercising the right
to remand. Against this background, I
encouraged participants to continue to discuss this question to find language
that would address the concerns expressed.
185.
We then turned to
the second conceptual issue, the adoption of completed findings (i.e.
those findings that do not require remand).
The Chairman's text envisages that there would be adoption of the
Appellate Body report. Past discussions
had suggested that there was support for adopting and implementing without
delay completed findings and recommendations, but that this could in practice
become complicated, where there are in fact connections between the different
findings, and where a partial implementation may be difficult in practice to
carry out, because they concern the same measure.
186.
In our
discussions this week, the proponents indicated that, as reflected in the
Chairman's text, it was not their intention to delay the adoption of the
Appellate Body report. This approach
would directly contribute to discouraging the types of dilatory tactics
discussed previously.
187.
Several
participants indicated that they remained concerned at the implications of an
immediate adoption of the report and the associated consequences. These concerns included procedural questions
on the relationship between the initial dispute and rulings and the remanded
issues and the potential complexities of a double-adoption procedure, such as
whether there would be two separate RPTs, two separate subsequent compliance or
retaliation arbitration procedures, and whether multiple remand was possible
and what this implied. The concerns
expressed also related to the implications for the Member concerned in terms of
implementation, including the possible need to go twice to legislative bodies
to seek approval of successive implementation measures for the same dispute and
more generally the risk of added inefficiencies and burdens as a result of the
"double-adoption" procedure.
188.
It was also asked
what the implications of the "double-adoption" procedures would be in
the event that the Appellate Body made a recommendation in relation to a
violation in respect of which a defense is still pending (second scenario
identified earlier) and whether the Member concerned would be required to
implement such recommendation despite the parallel existence of a remand
procedure that may ultimately invalidate it.
189.
Some participants
considered the concerns that were raised to be speculative and suggested that
the overall benefits would outweigh potential uncertainties and
complications. It was observed in
response that experience to date suggested the existence of linkages between
different issues in a dispute, and that while it may be possible to
successfully address the concerns relating to "double-adoption", they
should not be underestimated and the systemic procedural implications needed to
be addressed.
190.
It was observed
that the proposed text seeks to address this issue in Article 17.12(c), by
referring to the Appellate Body making "appropriate findings" and
"securing prompt and effective resolution" of the dispute. Hence, the Appellate Body might not make a
recommendation for implementation, in a situation where the issue requiring
remand is critical to the resolution of the dispute. The question then arising may be whether this
should be for the Appellate Body or for Members to determine.
191.
In conclusion,
proponents acknowledged the concerns that were raised, including the linkages
to some of the questions discussed earlier.
They were encouraged by the willingness of participants to work towards
their resolution, in light of the important benefits that the introduction of
remand would bring to the resolution of disputes.
192.
I took note of
the views expressed, including the reiteration of proponents' support for
double-adoption as an important element of avoiding abuse or delay, while
recognizing that number of aspects have been identified that need further
discussion. I took note also of the
readiness expressed to continue discussion and examine possible solutions. I encouraged participants to continue to work
on this and report at the next set of meetings on this and any other further
work to be conducted in the meantime on remand.
193.
In the G40, I
reported on this discussion and invited interested delegations to approach the
proponents if they had an interest in contributing to this work. We will return to remand in our next
meetings, and I hope that delegations will be able to report progress on these
two issues by then.
Effective compliance
194.
I met with a
group of delegations to discuss the state of progress of the various proposals
relating to effective compliance.
Proposals under this heading include:
-
the proposal on
retaliation by a group of Members on behalf of a prevailing developing country
complainant;[44]
-
the proposal on
facilitated cross-retaliation for developing countries;[45]
-
proposals on the
calculation of the level of nullification or impairment for developing country
complainants;[46]
-
a proposal to
introduce a reference period for calculating the level of nullification or
impairment;[47]
-
the proposed
notification of measures taken pursuant to an authorization to suspend
concessions or other obligations;[48]
-
the negotiation
of compensation, including the relationship between compensation and
retaliation;[49]
and
-
a proposal on
disputes that have been under DSB surveillance for more than 5 years after the
expiration date of the last reasonable period granted.[50]
195.
I noted that in
January, we had discussed group retaliation, cross retaliation, and the
calculation of the level of nullification or impairment for developing country
complainants. While a degree of sympathy was expressed for the rationale
underlying these proposals, and some useful suggestions were made, delegations
were not able to agree on precise elements of a solution.[51]
196.
In March and
April of this year, proponents of these issues indicated that they planned to
continue to work together to develop common views that could be reflected in a
joint textual contribution, with the possibility of releasing modalities papers
in the future.[52]
197. In April, Korea introduced a proposal on instances where a Member might achieve full
compliance prior to the authorization of the suspension of concessions or the
actual suspension of concessions. Under
Korea's proposal to amend Article 22.7, nullification
or impairment would be counted for the purposes of the level of retaliation
from the end of the RPT onwards. If compliance were achieved and
accepted by the complaining party prior to the suspension of concessions, then
concessions would not be suspended. The proposal
sought to maintain the importance of the reasonable period of time for
implementation, as a time for Members to have a chance to implement the DSB's
recommendations and rulings.[53]
198.
In May,
proponents expressed interest in holding a conceptual discussion to understand
the position of specific Members on compliance issues. In this context, proponents submitted a
questionnaire and indicated their intention to discuss the issues with other
delegations.[54] In addition, Mexico submitted a new proposed
text on notification of measures taken pursuant to an authorization to suspend
concessions or other obligations.[55] In
this version, Mexico sought to clarify the notion of the designation of the
type of measure that would be subject to a notification requirement.
199.
In June,
proponents indicated that they had held a number of discussions with
delegations to assess whether retaliation has proven useful to the system. Proponents indicated that they did not find
many cases where retaliation was partially helping compliance or rebalancing
concessions. Also at this time, Mexico
submitted a revised proposed text on notification of measures, that had been
discussed in May, for further discussions.
200.
In light of these
earlier discussions, this week I asked where proponents are in terms of their
work together and how they would like to proceed on discussions.
201.
Proponents
indicated that they have been working together, holding consultations with
other delegations, and trying to understand specific concerns with the
proposals. Delegations also indicated
plans to expand discussions to more delegations among the G40.
202.
We next turned to
discuss Mexico's proposal on notification to the DSB of measures taken pursuant
to an authorization to suspend concession or other obligations. Participants expressed support for the most
recent text presented in May, suggesting only limited modifications to it. In addition, delegations took note that it
may be necessary to make minor modifications depending on changes made
elsewhere to the text of the DSU. One
delegation indicated that it would need to evaluate whether the proposal is
compatible with its domestic legal system, but would respond in the coming
weeks.
203.
We returned to
this text in the G40 later in the week.
In that meeting, convergence was found around the following text, to be
inserted at Article 22.7 of the DSU, in fine:
"The authorized Member shall notify the DSB of any measure taken
pursuant to the authorization granted by the DSB and any amendment or
termination of the measure. The Member
shall submit the notification, including any relevant information, in writing
no later than 28 days after the date on which the measure, its amendment or
termination takes effect."
204.
In the small
group, I also invited delegations to discuss the questionnaire circulated by
proponents to delegations in May. This
questionnaire sought to determine the positions of participants in respect of
key elements concerning the effectiveness of suspension of concessions,
compensation, and mutually agreed solutions in inducing compliance.
205.
A number of
participants in attendance indicated that compliance issues were important for
them. However, while expressing sympathy
for developing country concerns, these participants continued to express
reservations with the current proposals, including on a conceptual level.
206.
While compliance
has not always been effective, it was noted that Members may be willing to
comply for other reasons, including notably, belief in the rule of law. In cases where compliance is not achieved it
may be for external reasons rather than a particular fault with the current
system.
207.
A number of
delegations felt a more fruitful discussion could be held if proposals were
viewed more horizontally, and were not limited to exclusively benefit developing
countries. It was noted that small
economy developed country Members consider that they face similar asymmetries,
and may also wish to benefit from concepts embodied in these proposals. Were proposals to be generalized rather than
presented as special and differential treatment, delegations felt they would
nevertheless provide great benefit to developing country Members, and likely be
used predominantly by those Members. Some delegations felt the current system
worked satisfactorily.
208.
I took note of
the divergent views and encouraged delegations to look for the best way
forward. In particular, I raised the
question of whether special and differential treatment must be a prerequisite
for every solution related to compliance.
I also encouraged delegations to enter into technical discussions so
that they might find the basis for an agreement.
Flexibility and Member control
209.
I held
consultations on these issues both in a small group setting and among the G40,
to continue previous discussions.
Partial
deletion and partial adoption of panel reports
210.
In the G40,
delegations turned their attention to the proposals on partial deletion and
partial adoption of panel reports, which had been discussed previously in a
small group. Partial deletion of reports
by panels is addressed in Article 12.7 of the July 2008 text, and partial
deletion of Appellate Body reports is addressed in Article 17.13. Partial adoption is addressed at Articles
16.4 and 17.14. A draft DSB decision
would address the practical aspects of requests for partial adoption.[56]
211.
In previous small
group discussions, as reported in my earlier summary[57],
delegations appeared to express a greater degree of comfort with the notion of
partial adoption of reports than partial deletion of reports, due to the fact
that partial adoption would not affect the contents of the reports themselves
and would be undertaken by the entire Membership.
212.
In the G40,
participants echoed a similar level of concern with partial deletion, in
particular with the fact that parties alone could decide to delete aspects of a
panel or Appellate Body report.
Proponents submitted that this would be necessary as a panel report is
not yet circulated at the time when partial deletion would occur. Participants in turn asked why partial
deletion must occur at an interim stage and not after circulation. Delegations felt that deletion in absence of
broader approval in the DSB would threaten the integrity and the security and
predictability of the system.
213.
Participants also
sought clarifications on the legal value to be attributed to findings that
would not be adopted and to findings that would have been deleted following
agreement by the parties to a dispute, and whether the legal value attributable
in each instance would be different. In
the view of various delegations, it is unclear whether a deleted portion or
non-adopted portion of report could provide guidance for future cases.
214.
Overall,
participants identified a number of what they described as systemic concerns
with the proposals. Some participants
feared that the coherence of reports would be disrupted through partial
deletion or non-adoption. Some worried
about the systemic implications of partially deleting or not adopting portions
of reports on the discretion of panels or the Appellate Body.
215.
Delegations also
felt that allowing for either partial adoption or partial deletion could shift
the bargaining equation in favour of larger participants. Concern was also expressed that third party
participation could be unduly affected through the ability to discard portions
of the report containing their input.
Proponents noted that mechanisms already in place under the current
system, such as the ability to settle a dispute before a report is adopted, or
the ability to reach a mutually agreed solution, effectively create the same
circumstances as would partial deletion or adoption. It was also asked whether smaller Members may
actually gain additional leverage from having the possibility for partial
deletion or adoption.
216.
In response to
concerns with the discretion and function of panels and the Appellate Body,
proponents asked what the goal of the dispute settlement system is - to resolve
the dispute for Members concerned in the dispute at hand, or to provide
guidance for other Members in other disputes.
Proponents submitted that the Membership broadly may benefit from the
opportunity to limit the aspects of a report up for adoption, on a systemic
level. Other delegations felt, however,
felt that the power to limit adoption, in particular through partial deletion
as agreed to by the parties, could cut the other way, removing findings that
the larger Membership would find beneficial or consider valuable to the
system. In essence, these participants
expressed discomfort with the notion of parties deciding what is necessary the
resolution of a dispute and important for the system. It was noted that both parties, while having
divergent views on a particular interpretation of a provision, may nevertheless
disagree with the conclusion reached by the panel or Appellate Body and seek to
delete such an outcome. Delegations felt
that this created a great risk for the system.
217.
Participants
discussed concerns with various scenarios that may result in incoherence, in
particular cases where a panel may set out one or more findings that are then
modified or reversed on appeal, and thereafter, parties agree to the partial
deletion of the Appellate Body's findings, or a DSB decision is reached not to
adopt certain of the Appellate Body's findings.
Participants felt that the predictability of outcomes and credibility of
the system would be called into question, in particular in questions of
implementation.
218.
Finally,
delegations expressed concern with how these proposals would operate in light
of timing considerations for the adoption of panel and Appellate Body
reports. In this last respect,
proponents offered that delegations should not be additionally burdened under
the proposal. It was also noted that
concurrent proposals that would allow for circulation of a report prior to
translation may actually provide more time for Members to consider the
implications in scenarios where partial adoption was of interest.
219.
I took note of
the discussion, emphasizing that proponents and other participants appear
divided on distinguishing the value of findings to the parties in a particular
dispute or to the system as a whole. I
asked delegations to continue to work towards a possible middle ground.
Parameters
on measures under review: the distinction between mandatory and discretionary
measures
220.
In small group
discussions, we also considered the proposed draft parameters on guidance to
adjudicators, in particular, the distinction between mandatory and
discretionary measures.[58]
221.
The proponent
opened the discussion by recalling the origin of the distinction. Under this distinction, if a measure is not
mandatory, it would not be appropriate to assume that a Member would act in a
WTO-inconsistent manner, and therefore, it would not be appropriate to find the
measure itself WTO-inconsistent.
Accordingly, the proponent submits, a Member could only challenge such a
measure once it was applied in some fashion.
The proponent considers that it would be useful to capture this
distinction which has been interpreted in practice under the current text of
the DSU.
222.
Participants
questioned both the form and essence of the proposal. In terms of the proposed language, delegates
noted that no precise definition of "mandatory" or
"discretionary" measures was provided. One delegation also noted that while the
first sentence seems to incorporate an expression of good faith, the second
sentence could be viewed as including an irrebuttable presumption against
certain claims involving discretionary measures. This language was considered to be too
strong.
223.
Delegations also
asked what the result of the proposal would be on a panel or Appellate Body
ruling that determined that the application of a measure was
WTO-inconsistent. Delegations noted that
Members often make "as such" challenges so that a complaining party
would not be required to challenge each and every application of a
measure. Rather, they would challenge
the measure itself, the consequence being that a finding could invalidate the
measure. Delegations also asked about
the relevance of the proposal to measures that, while discretionary on their
face, would nevertheless lead to a breach of the WTO agreement were they ever
to be applied.
224.
Participants also
took note of the possible disruptive effect on trade and economic operators of
discretionary measures that allow for WTO-inconsistent action. It was felt that any uncertainty in the
possibility of applying the measure could result in nullification or impairment
of benefits.
225.
The proponent
sought to distinguish the determination of whether a measure is mandatory or
discretionary, from the question of whether a challenge is made to a measure
"as such" or "as applied".
It also noted that it would not always be possible to eliminate
discretion from all measures, and panels should not need to undertake overly
hypothetical analyses in assessing the possible outcomes. In their view, nor would it be appropriate to
strike down discretionary measures, even if they could result in inconsistency
whenever applied, because it would not be sensible to maintain different laws
for WTO Members and non-Members.
Finally, the proponent indicated that the proposal is not intended to
address implementation where a measure is repeatedly applied in a WTO-inconsistent
fashion.
226.
Through the overall
discussion of various examples, some delegations felt the value of the proposal
was itself called into question by the difficulty in understanding the
distinction between mandatory and discretionary measures, and therefore the
difficulty in understanding how the proposal would be applied. Delegations also questioned whether the
proposal fails to reflect more recent developments from WTO jurisprudence.
Parameters
on interpretive approaches in WTO dispute settlement
227.
We then discussed
the proposed parameters on interpretive approaches in WTO dispute
settlement. This aspect of the proposal
covers four sections entitled: (i) WTO
adjudicative bodies are constrained from adding to or diminishing the covered
agreements; (ii) the covered agreements reflect differing negotiating
objectives and positions; (iii) the covered agreements embody constructive
ambiguity; and (iv) gap-filling.[59]
228.
The proponent
explained that Article 3.2 DSU serves as starting point. The proposal seeks to avoid adding to DSU
obligations. The purpose of the proposal
is to recognize situations of ambiguity, whether constructive or unintentional,
appearing in the covered agreement and provide guidance on how to deal with
this.
229.
In the past,
delegations had questioned whether the proposal seems to assume that no other
interpretative rule than Articles 31 and 32 of the Vienna
Convention on the Law of Treaties (hereafter Vienna
Convention) may apply to resolve the ambiguity, and whether these
provisions represent the complete universe of interpretative rules. The view was expressed that interpretation
is an "iterative" and organic process.
230.
The proponent
offered that it is well-accepted that text can be ambiguous and that this is
sometimes intentional. Due to the
requirement under the DSU not to add to or diminish obligations, it offered
that there is a need to respect this ambiguity, namely not to foreclose the
possibility of any particular interpretation of a given provision that might
arise. This was viewed as relevant to
avoid creating any obligations or defences that might reduce the rights and
obligations of Members.
231.
Some participants
felt they could accept certain aspects of this proposal in principle, if the
form of the proposal were modified to follow a more principles-based approach,
to avoid a new language itself becoming a matter for interpretation.
232.
Other
participants asked whether, in cases of ambiguity, the proposal would require
an adjudicator to decline to make findings, thereby somehow subtracting from
intended obligations. Some felt that
Articles 3.2 and 19.2 of the DSU already provide the necessary guidance for
addressing interpretative issues, and that any additions to the DSU could lead
to changing rights and obligations. In
addition, it was asked whether this proposal took proper account of the intent
of negotiators to incorporate constructive ambiguity into the agreement, and
whether it would not also be relevant to analyse that intent when interpreting
the meaning of a provision. Some
participants expressed the view that the interpretative rules of the Vienna Convention reflected this need through the
requirement to assess the object and purpose of an agreement when considering
the meaning of a particular provision.
By ignoring the intent behind an ambiguity, delegations felt that the
rights of a member could effectively be diminished.
233.
The proponent
submitted that it is not necessary to assess the intent to
include such ambiguity, but only the existence of such ambiguity. In its view, text could still be found
ambiguous even after applying the rules of interpretation of the Vienna Convention.
The proponent submits that its proposal aims to guide adjudicators on
how to proceed in cases where ambiguity exists.
In essence, this would amount to declining to determine a violation, or
declining to uphold the applicability of a particular defence, if the sole
basis of doing so was determined by such ambiguity. It noted that a violation or defence could
potentially be upheld on other grounds.
234.
Delegations asked
whether it would be useful to look at specific instances where two parties or
all Members would agree there is an ambiguity in the text, and think about how
this proposal might apply to that situation.
235.
I took note of
the comments and discussion, and suggested that delegations continue to work
among themselves and that we return to this discussion at our next session.
Strictly confidential information (SCI)
236.
In July, broad
support was expressed for the overall approach reflected in the new text
presented by Canada, which we had started to consider.[60] We had concluded the meeting leaving some
questions unanswered and having not fully explored the detail of the proposed
mechanism. So this is what we focused on
this week.
237.
We first
considered the functioning of the "challenge procedure" in
Appendix V, which the proponent explained is an important part of the effort to
strike balance between having the opportunity to seek protection for
confidential information, while keeping the use of the mechanism to the minimum
necessary. It would therefore not be
sufficient for a party to simply designate information as SCI. There needs to be an opportunity for a party
to verify that the information meets certain requirements identified in the
definition, to be granted protection as SCI.
The draft language was intended to ensure that a rebuttable presumption
was created that the information required protection, subject to the
possibility of successful challenge.
238.
There was some
discussion of the proposed definition of SCI, including questions about
the relationship between the first components in (i) and the second component
in (ii) of the definition, including whether efforts to preserve the
confidentiality of the information had to have been successful in preventing
the information from becoming "generally known". It was clarified in this respect that the
basis of the protection should be that the legitimate holder of the information
has made efforts to protect its confidentiality, even if circumstances beyond
their control may have prevented confidentiality from being fully
maintained. The proponent expressed
readiness to review this language for clarity, and to review also the
references to the "entity" or "person" holding the
information, to ensure consistency. In
respect of the definition, it was also asked what the notion of "essential
interests" of the holder of the information meant. The proponent observed in response that the
interests at issue should have a certain level of significance to the holder of
the information, and that it was open to drafting suggestions as to how to best
express this.
239.
It was also
suggested that the reference to "efforts made to protect" the secrecy
of the information in paragraph 5 be deleted, to avoid the impression that this
was an additional requirement beyond those set out in the definition. It was further asked whether the reference in
Appendix V to "good faith" and "due restraint" implied that
this would be something that the panel had to take into account in addition to
the definition of SCI, in order to determine whether to grant the
protection. The proponent clarified that
the intent was to signal that the protection should not be invoked in a
frivolous manner, rather than to give specific legal weight to these concepts.
240.
There was
detailed discussion of whether the panel's determination under the challenge
procedure could be subject to appeal.
In this context, there was some uncertainty as to what would happen in
the event that the Appellate Body overruled the panel. It was suggested that in cases where the
panel had accepted the designation as SCI, the
proposed text of Article 18.5 implied that nonetheless the information should
continue to be protected throughout the proceedings as per the panel's
determination, and the Appellate Body's ruling would serve primarily to clarify
the interpretation of the rules for future cases. In that event, however, the Appellate Body's
determination may appear to be in the nature of an advisory opinion, which led
some participants to ask whether it would then be preferable to exclude
determinations under the challenge procedure from appeal. It was observed that this may require
amendments to other provisions in the DSU that set out the scope of appeals.
241.
In the event that
the panel had declined to afford the protection
requested, the party concerned would have the option to either maintain the
information but forfeit its protection, or withdraw the information from the
proceedings. It was asked whether this
could prejudice the interests of that party and unduly affect its ability to
present its case, and what the consequences would be in such a situation if the
Appellate Body later determined that the information should have been granted
protection as SCI. It was asked whether,
in that situation, a violation of Article 11 of the DSU may be invoked. It was also asked whether a party might seek
to misuse the procedure in order to avoid providing information that is not
favourable to it.
242.
With respect to
the duration of protection, the proponent acknowledged that the proposed
formulation, which was to grant protection until the end of the dispute, may
give rise to concerns, both in terms of how this is to be defined and in terms
of its sufficiency. The proponent
suggested that the protection be afforded instead "until the party seeking
it withdraws it". There was support
for this suggestion.
243.
It was also
clarified that the practical modalities and extent of the protection to be
afforded would be left for the panel to determine on a case-by-case basis in
consultation with the parties. This
includes how access to the information would be controlled, whether a party may
re-file or modify its submissions to the panel if it has been denied access to
SCI protection under the challenge procedure, or the timeframe within which the
challenge procedure can be invoked before the panel.
244.
Questions were
also asked concerning access to the challenge procedure by third parties, and
whether it was appropriate to include in the text of the DSU references to elements
of other agreements (the Annex V process in the SCM Agreement).
245.
In closing, I
noted that there still appeared to be a high level of support for the proposal,
notwithstanding the need to review some aspects of the draft text. I took note of the proponent's readiness to
review the text of their proposal in light of the comments heard, and to
reflect further on some of the points raised in the discussion. I suggested that we take up this item again
in our next meetings.
Mutually Agreed Solutions
246.
As described in
my last summary, tentative convergence had been reached in July on a text to
improve the notification of mutually agreed solutions under Article 3.6, but
one delegation had expressed reservations on part of the text. I had invited them to reflect on their
position in light of the tentative convergence achieved on a text.[61] So this week we returned to this issue.
247.
The delegation
concerned indicated that it still had reservations concerning the level of
detail required of the notification in the proposed text and feared that it may
hinder parties in reaching a mutually agreed solutions in some cases. It was agreed that further consultations
among interested delegations would be required to review this language.
248.
In addition,
another delegation expressed concern with the formulation of the obligation as
a joint obligation rather than as an individual obligation on each party. With respect to this point, there was
convergence on the objective (i.e. that the notification obligation falls on
each party, and may be satisfied through a joint or individual
notification). The only remaining
question was how best to reflect this in the text. So this draft language may
also require further improvement.
Stocktaking
249.
In addition, the
proponents of developing country interests, including special and differential
treatment, indicated that they were working towards a revision of their
proposals, to be presented in November.
So we will revert to that issue at that time. I expressed support to these delegations in
their effort to work together and also encouraged them to consult with other
delegations, including those that had previously expressed concerns with some
aspects of their proposals.
5. Week
of 14 November 2011[62]
250.
This week, we
continued our discussions on remand, flexibility and Member control, strictly
confidential information and panel composition.
We also took stock of some aspects of effective compliance.
Effective compliance and developing country
interests
251.
On Monday, I held
a short stock-taking consultation to hear updates of on-going work among
delegations on effective compliance and on developing country interests,
including special and differential treatment.
252.
On effective
compliance, a group of delegations informed participants that they would be
organizing a symposium at which they would invite legal practitioners to
comment and share their views on a number of issues primarily reflecting
proposals under consideration in the negotiations. They explained that this would be an
independent exercise, though complementary to the negotiations. This session took place on Thursday
afternoon.
253.
Also, it was
confirmed that the text reflected in my previous summary on the notification of
retaliatory measures[63]
was now acceptable also to the delegation that had previously indicated the
need to confirm this. This confirms the
convergence reached on the wording of that text.
254.
On developing
country interests, the proponents informed participants that they had been
meeting with a large number of delegations and were still working on a revision
of their text. They hoped to resolve
bottlenecks and drafting issues, so as to present revised text.
Flexibility and Member-control
255.
Discussions
continued this week on flexibility and Member-control, both in the small group
and the G40. In the small group setting,
we returned to the discussion on guidance to adjudicative bodies, in particular
the topic of gap-filling, the final issue that is addressed within the topic of
interpretative approaches in WTO dispute settlement.[64]
256.
The proponents
reiterated their view that it is not the role of the dispute settlement
mechanism to fill gaps that might be determined to exist within the covered
agreements as a way to balance the rights and obligations of Members.
257.
Participants
sought clarification on the format of this proposal ‑ as a DSB Decision ‑ and
the merit of including a limited number of examples of what might constitute
gap filling. Broadly, delegations asked
how guidance documents would operate and what effect they would likely have on
adjudicators, whether panels or the Appellate Body. In this context, it was asked whether it
would not be similarly or more effective if Members were rather to voice their
disagreement with a panel or Appellate Body report before the DSB. Participants referred to the past decision of
the Appellate Body to consider unsolicited amicus briefs
and the ensuing reaction of Members as an example of this. Participants felt this approach was effective
at addressing the particular matter. It
was also noted how it enabled Members to comment on a specific problem rather
than offering abstract guidance.
Moreover, in such instances, it was noted that Members could agree not
to adopt a particular report.
258.
The question was
raised whether a guidance document would enable adjudicators to differentiate,
for instance, between what objectively could be understood to be a gap in an
agreement, versus occasions where parties maintain different views on an aspect
of agreement, but an actual "gap" does not exist. Rather than
guidance, delegations expressed the view that customary rules properly served
the purpose of addressing what is covered by the WTO agreements and how to
apply them. In this vein, it was asked
whether it would be helpful to provide further examples to understand how the
problem might differ from what is addressed through the customary rules of
interpretation. One delegation asked on
how many occasions adjudicators have undertaken gap-filling, to merit providing
guidance.
259.
It was suggested that
it might be useful to restate principles already identified in Article 3.2 of
the DSU and the focus under the dispute settlement mechanism on resolving
disputes between Members, without the need to include additional language that
might have been helpful during initial discussions on the proposal. Some participants also suggested that
previous statements by the Appellate Body in this respect might provide
indications of how to formulate the proposal.
However, other participants questioned whether the particular objective
of this proposal was not already adequately addressed under Articles 3.2 and
19.2 of the DSU.
260.
The proponents
confirmed that the examples provided are not an exhaustive list, and agreed to
look into suggestions to formulate the proposal in a more principles-based
way. It was noted that the proposal grew
in an effort to reflect views garnered from discussions held with other
delegations. In general, proponents felt
that a general view exists that it is not appropriate for panels or the
Appellate Body to engage in gap-filling.
Proponents referred to delegations' own use of this term as well as
statements by others on the existence of the phenomenon, including in efforts
by the Appellate Body to "complete the analysis" and its decision to
open hearings to the public. The
proponents maintained that neither Article 3.2 nor 19.2 of the DSU in their own
right fully addressed the perceived problem of gap-filling. Proponents also expressed the view that
providing criticism to a particular panel or the Appellate Body after the
issuance of the report would not offer the same benefits as providing guidance
ahead of time for adjudicating bodies to consider.
261.
I took note of
the discussions and suggested that delegations continue the discussion next time,
with a focus on all the elements of the proposal and the linkage between
them. I also took note of the potential
effectiveness of Members' comments before the DSB on the Appellate Body
decision to accept unsolicited amicus
briefs. Though recognizing the language
of Article 3.2 of the DSU, I also asked delegations to consider whether this
provision has in fact prevented the Appellate Body from undertaking to fill
gaps in the text in the past.
262.
Delegations also
considered parameters on guidance to adjudicators in a meeting of the G40 this
week. This week we opened the discussion
on parameters on measures under review, in particular the aspect on "order
of analysis".[65] In the thematic part of the July report, I
had noted that the section entitled "order of analysis" appeared to
deal with "advisory opinions".
In recent small group meetings, delegations again discussed advisory
opinions or obiter dicta, completion of analysis and
expired measures in relation to the topic of "order of analysis".
263.
The proponents
explained that it would not be appropriate for adjudicators to offer advisory
opinions or obiter dicta beyond the determinations
that are necessary to the resolution of the dispute, and beyond a panel's terms
of reference. Rather, adjudicators should
exercise adequate judicial restraint to protect the distinction between the
roles of the adjudicative and legislative functions. The proponents suggested
there have been a number of instances where panels have been found to go beyond
their mandate and therefore, further clarity would be helpful.
264.
Participants
suggested that it would be helpful if the proposal referred primarily to the
relevant provisions of the DSU defining the role of adjudicators ‑ namely
Articles 3.4, Articles 3.2, 11 and 7 ‑ rather than employing detailed
explanatory text and examples. It was
asked whether any guidance was actually needed beyond these provisions in order
to establish a general rule, and what would be the legal status of such guidance
in the form of a DSB decision.
265.
Participants
expressed doubt as to whether it would always be inappropriate to include
statements of obiter dicta or to rule on
statements relating to hypothetical scenarios, if their inclusion could serve
to clarify the reasoning of the adjudicator with respect to an issue properly
before it. It was further suggested that
it may be appropriate for the adjudicator to include such analysis in the
interest of achieving a proper resolution of the matter before it.
266.
Participants also
asked how severe a problem existed in this respect. In instances where a panel were to exceed its
mandate, it was noted that appeal would exist as an option. If the Appellate Body were to exceed its
mandate, delegations offered that there still may be ways to deal with this
problem, for instance through statements against aspects of the reports at a
DSB meeting. If a large number of
members were to comment, guidance in this form may be taken on in future
disputes.
267.
The proponents
indicated that it would reconsider the format of the proposal. However, they felt that the principle
embodied in the proposal remains important to avoid a panel or the Appellate
Body making a finding that might prejudice a Member or other Members who are
not parties to the dispute. Non-parties
would not be able to express its views on the matter but may be affected by the
propositions. In addition, the
proponents identified value in providing guidance by the Membership as a whole
in advance, not strictly by a single Member or limited number of Members in the
form of a DSB statement at the conclusion of a dispute.
268.
In discussions
this week, the issue of expired measures was also addressed. The proponents referred to instances where a
measure expires at any point after consultations were held, arguing there would
be value to allowing for findings on this, so that measures would not simply
evade review, with the potential to appear at a later point.
269.
In conclusions, I
asked the proponent to seek to identify ways to revise its proposal bearing in
mind the comments made, in an effort to reach convergence.
Remand
270.
Following up on
discussions of remand in September, New Zealand presented a non-paper
reflecting the proponents' further consideration of the issues and concerns
raised.
271.
Specifically, the
proponents expressed interest in examining on the basis of practical examples
the incentives for remand and how this might impact upon use of a remand
mechanism and the adoption/implementation of findings and recommendations.
272.
With respect to
the feasibility or desirability of split implementation, the proponents
reiterated their view that remand should not hold up adoption of findings on
resolved issues, or permit remand to be misused as means for overall
delay. They also acknowledged that this
raises a number of practical questions around the process of adoption of
reports and implementation. The
proponents expressed interest in consulting further with interested Members and
preparing some analysis of the kinds of situations where remand could be
sought, and where split recommendations might be possible. They also intended to prepare an outline of
how a remand procedure as currently drafted would fit within existing
timeframes.
273.
The proponents
further acknowledged that for some Members, the question of whether split
implementation is possible or desirable hinges on the linkages between
individual findings and recommendations, and that further work is required to
understand the situations in which this might occur and how the Appellate Body
might frame its findings to account for this.
274.
The proponents
noted that concerns have also been raised about the possibility of multiple
remands. They asked how realistic the
prospect of a never-ending cycle of remand is, and whether Members see merit in
making more explicit in the text that once an issue has been remanded once and
the AB has been unable to find on it a second time for lack of factual
information, it simply does not make a finding.
275.
On the question
of who can remand, the proponents suggested that earlier discussion saw general
recognition (with some reservations) that there may be merit in enabling either
party to request remand where they may have a legitimate interest, and that the
Chair's "three scenarios" are all possible. Their impression was that if sufficient
comfort can be achieved on timing and implementation issues, this question
should be more easily resolved.
Concerning the suggestion to try and delimit the Appellate Body's use of
remand to avoid the possibility of this being used as an excuse not to come to
a decision, the proponents believed that it might be useful to shift focus from
the question of who initiates to the manner in which the Appellate Body frames
the factual vacuum (paragraph 12 (b)).
276.
Proponents also
clarified that, while they continued to consider that their existing proposed
text provided a solid basis for addressing the concerns raised, they were open
to further discussion as described in the non-paper, and were prepared to show
flexibility in light of such discussion.
277.
Participants
welcomed the effort of proponents in presenting this non-paper, and their
acknowledgement of the concerns raised in relation to the functioning of remand
under their proposal. Support was also
expressed for the proposal to base further discussions on an examination of
practical scenarios.
278.
It was also
suggested that further consideration be given to the question of whether
additional amendments to other provisions of the DSU might be required in order
to fully reflect the "split implementation" or "double
adoption" procedure.
279.
With respect to
the split implementation procedure, some participants reiterated their concern
that it may not be realistic to expect the implementing agencies in the Member
concerned to be in a position to "catch up" with the implementation
procedures arising from the initial report.
In response, the proponents suggested that in most cases, the time
required for the completion of the remand procedure would not exceed the
duration of the initial RPT, thus making this possible. The proponents also reiterated that the
purpose of the double implementation procedure was to avoid abuses and
considered that the benefits of early implementation would outweigh any
risks. To the extent that a burden
arose, this should be borne by the implementing Member. In response, it was suggested that to the
extent that the concern being addressed by split implementation was the risk of
abuse, this could be addressed in other manners. It was further asked whether, if the remand
process is expected to be quite rapid in most cases, it was worth creating the
uncertainties associated with split implementation.
280.
Korea, recalling
its long-standing interest in these issues, presented a textual contribution
proposing amendments to the proposed remand procedure.
281.
Korea suggested
that both parties should have the ability to initiate remand, because they both
have an interest in securing a positive solution to a dispute, but observed
that there appeared to be some convergence around the need to introduce
limitations to prevent abuses. Korea
thus proposed that the complainant be entitled to seek remand of an issue only
if the scope of the Appellate Body's recommendations could be enlarged as a
result of remand, and a responding party only if the scope of the recommendations
could be reduced as a result of the remand.
282.
With respect to
the adoption of the rulings and recommendations, Korea believed that adoption
of a single Appellate Body report at the conclusion of the remand procedure
would prevent unnecessary extension of the overall timeframe of a dispute. Under this approach, the remand procedure
would be completed before the Appellate Body circulates any report, and the
panel's role in the remand procedure would be limited to making the factual
findings required for the completion of the analysis. The existence of a single report would allow
the ensuing implementation and remedies phases to follow smoothly without the
implications of multiple adoption.
283.
Several
participants observed that there were benefits to the proposed single adoption
procedure, and it was suggested that it may provide a solution to the questions
attached to the split adoption and implementation procedure. Clarifications were sought as to why the panel
would be limited to making the factual findings required and not also the
related legal findings, since panels are not only triers of fact and also
address legal issues. It was asked
whether this would not effectively turn the Appellate Body into a panel. In response, the proponent suggested that
since the Appellate Body would have identified the question in the course of
its analysis, it should be the one to complete this analysis. At the same time, the proponent expressed
willingness to discuss this further in light of practical examples.
284.
The proponent
also clarified that the timeframe for the remand procedure was proposed to be
left for the Appellate Body to determine on a case-by-case basis. It agreed to reflect on the question of
whether the panel would have access to the Appellate Body report in order to
assist it in carrying out the factual analysis.
285.
Questions were
also asked about the notion of the scope of recommendations being
"enlarged" or "reduced" as a basis for determining who may
initiate remand, including how this would be assessed and whether this would be
determined by the parties concerned or by the Appellate Body. In response, the proponent explained that the
purpose of this distinction was to prevent abuses. It remained open to
discussion, but suggested that this matter could be in the first instance for
the parties to determine, and that any differences could possibly be addressed
by the Appellate Body.
286.
In conclusion, it
was suggested that a systematic approach based on practical scenarios, as
suggested in the non-paper by New Zealand, would be useful, to organize further
discussion and consider the merits of both approaches. My sense from the discussion was that
participants in the discussion also found this to be a sound approach. So I proposed that the small group continue
it work on this issue in the New Year, based on a consideration of practical
situations and an examination of how each approach would function in
practice.
Panel composition
287.
This week we also
returned to our discussion on panel composition, from three previous
discussions held earlier this year. In
our early meetings, we had discussed the proposal at a general conceptual
level. Subsequently, we began a
paragraph by paragraph discussion of the proposed text. At our last meeting, we focused on the
bracketed language in paragraphs 3 and 4 of the revised proposal informally
circulated by the proponent. The
proponent had expressed flexibility with respect to the exact terms to be used
in these paragraphs.[66]
288.
This week, we
turned to paragraph 5 of the draft text.
Under the proposal, a complete list of candidates would be provided at
the outset of the composition process.
Paragraph 5 provides for limited veto possibility and the ranking of the
remaining potential panelists by the parties.
The proponent recalled its objective with this aspect of the proposal,
namely to reduce the time it takes to conclude panel composition and to lessen
the number of incidences where composition by the Director-General is required. It was estimated that in approximately 60 per
cent of disputes, the Director-General is ultimately called upon to compose a
panel.
289.
The proponent
considers that the main reason that panels take so long to be composed, and in
many cases require the Director General to compose them, is that parties are
provided with a limited list of panelist candidates in separate slates, or
rounds, of the composition proceedings.
Parties are asked to state preferences, as well as veto candidates on
these lists during these rounds until agreement is reached. The proponents assert that tactics are often
employed to counter preferences of the opposing party, not knowing the precise
candidates that will later be proposed.
290.
The proponent
described paragraph 5 as having two sections, with the first portion addressing
the allocation of vetoes based on the total number of candidates that are
presented. Beyond a finite number of
vetoes, the proponent emphasized that parties may only otherwise object to a
candidate under the Rules of Conduct for reason of a conflict of interest of a
particular candidate. Such an objection
would need to be substantiated with evidence.
The proponents stressed the goal of controlling the ability of parties
to reject candidates.
291.
Delegations asked
why the proposal allows for the Secretariat to consider and ultimately provide
decisions on objections under the Rules of Conduct at the time of composition,
and whether this was not more properly addressed under the DSB's
authority. In addition, delegations
asked why only the question of a conflict of interest would be addressed, and
no other issues arising under the Rules of Conduct, such as the question of the
independence of a candidate. It was also
asked whether parties would be permitted to agree to panelists having the
nationality of third parties, or otherwise object to such candidates at this
stage, or not. The question was raised
as to whether this affected the current requirements found under Article 8 of
the DSU.
292.
The proponent
explained that, in addressing questions of conflict of interest at this stage,
it was not intended as a formal adjudication or to assume the authority of the
DSB, but rather, to seek to avoid possible objections by parties at later
stages in panel proceedings, to avoid future problems between parties. The proponent offered that it would be
possible to determine upfront whether a conflict of interest existed, but that
questions of the independence of a panelist could only necessarily be addressed
after the proceedings commenced. The
proponent offered that objections to candidates of third party nationality
would be considered as objection of another nature within the meaning of
paragraph 5 of the proposal. Overall,
the proponent expressed flexibility in addressing these two issues, including
the possibility of modifications to paragraph 4 to address ex ante
the issue of third party nationality. It
was offered that the proposal was not intended to limit or alter the rights
contained in Article 8 of the DSU.
293.
A number of
participants, however, remained critical of what they described as the
inability of the ranking and veto mechanisms to properly take into account
parties' interests in obtaining panelists that meet various criteria, or in
selecting candidates that possess different types of expertise. Specifically, concern was expressed that the
ranking process might result in the selection of candidates that do not meet
the desired criteria, and that there would not be sufficient vetoes to prevent
this outcome. It was asked whether it
would not be simpler and more straightforward to limit the proposal to
requiring the Secretariat to provide a complete list of candidates upfront, and
then proceed under the current practice without employing a ranking mechanism.
294.
The proponent
expressed doubt as to whether parties would be able to achieve an outcome were
they simply presented with a full list upfront, without a ranking mechanism and
vetoes in place. It was recalled that
under the current practice, parties reject numerous candidates for what are
alleged to be "compelling reasons".
The proponent recalled that, beyond the straightforward use of vetoes,
parties could also state preferences by choosing to give either a high or low
ranking to a particular candidate or candidates. Further, in the event that parties were not
satisfied with the result, they could request that the Director General compose
the panel, under paragraph 9 of the proposal.
When this is done, the proponent offered that the Director General would
likely take into consideration the interests of the parties when selecting
candidates from the same initial list, where possible. Thus, it was suggested that paragraph 9
provides an additional opportunity for flexibility for the parties.
295.
Delegations also
asked what elements would be taken into consideration in deciding the total
number of candidates to be presented on the list. The proponent indicated that parties could
state their preference for a total number of candidates to the Secretariat, in
addition to stating their desired criteria for selecting candidates. It was noted, however, that the Secretariat's
ability to present candidates might be constrained depending on the complexity
of selection criteria requested by parties.
In practice, the proponent pointed out that the Secretariat would most
likely be unable to present a list of more than 20 candidates; accordingly, it
was felt that a maximum number of three vetoes was appropriate.
296.
Overall,
participants asked whether the proposal would make parties better off than by
continuing with the current practice, particularly in light of the number of
objections that parties currently make.
One delegation offered that the object of panel composition is to
identify individuals that are accepted by both parties. Placing more constraints on the ability of
parties to express their views and preferences would seem to run contrary to
this objective. A preference was expressed for allowing parties to react to
particular candidates simultaneously.
The proponent asked whether being required to select candidates without
knowing the complete list of names at the outset does not in fact constrain
selection.
297.
Finally, one
delegation asked the proponents to consider the possibility for parties to
present candidates to include in the final list of proposed candidates.
298.
Having heard
delegations' views, I noted that there does not seem to be disagreement that
parties frequently object to candidates under the current practice. However, I noted that the Secretariat must
often present lists of candidates based on extensive criteria, which may
present difficulties in presenting a full list of candidates up front. I also took note of disagreement with what
was described as the "mechanical" or "mechanistic" nature
of the proposal. I asked the proponent
to consider closely the comments made in proceeding forward.
Strictly Confidential Information
299.
Canada had
introduced a revised draft text in July, proposing a simplified approach based
on an amendment to certain provisions of the DSU and the introduction of a new
Appendix containing further detail including a definition of SCI.[67] This week, Canada presented a further revised
text, aiming to address some of the questions and concerns raised in our recent
discussions.
300.
In introducing
its revised text, Canada explained that the changes fell into three categories:
-
with respect to
third parties, it was clarified that, while it was expected that the need for
third parties to present SCI be infrequent, they would be able to seek the
designation of information as SCI, but not have access to the challenge
mechanism. This was intended to reflect
an appropriate balance between the rights of third parties and those of the
parties to the dispute.
-
with respect to
the duration of the protection, the text was modified to reflect a suggestion
made at the last meeting, so that the protection would remain until the party
having submitted the information would withdraw its designation as SCI.
-
the definition of
SCI had been cleaned up, to avoid inconsistencies and to refer to
"individuals" or "entities" rather than natural and legal
persons. The definition continued to
reflect cumulative criteria for protection, including a reference to efforts
having been made to keep the information secret, in order to avoid situations
in which no such effort has been made falling within the scope of the
definition simply because it happens not to be in the public domain. The notion of "essential interest"
was also retained, in order to ensure a higher threshold than simply
"any" interest, although the interpretation of this notion would be
left open. The proponent also explained that it was satisfied that the
definition should remain in the Appendix rather than in the working
procedures.
301.
Canada also
explained that certain aspects had not been changed, in particular the
treatment of appeals. It suggested that
that there would not be a need for a separate administrative challenge in
respect of the designation of information as SCI, beyond normal appeal
possibilities. Canada recalled in this
respect that this question would only arise where the panel had been required
to rule on the designation under the challenge procedure. This would be rare, and if the issue arose
it would also be rare that it would be worthy of an appeal, except if it had a
fundamental impact on the party's ability to defend itself. The likelihood of appeals under Article 11 of
the DSU would depend on the importance of the information at issue to the
panel's determinations. Also, if
evidence were submitted at the Appellate stage, Article 18.4 allowed for its
protection as BCI.
302.
Finally, Canada
confirmed that under the proposal, the core elements would be in Article 18 and
the Appendix, while the detail concerning the manner in which protection would
be afforded in a given case would remain in working procedures to be adopted by
adjudicators, as had been the case for panels to date. As reflected in working procedures adopted by
panels to date, this could include details on:
-
who can access
the information;
-
labelling of
submissions to make clear that he material is subject to protection;
-
storage and
access measures;
-
timelines for
challenges and resubmission;
-
timelines for
review of the information;
-
protection
measures during hearings.
303.
We first
considered the proposed changes concerning Article 18.4, including the
treatment of third party access to the procedures. In this respect, several delegations welcomed
the additional reference to third parties in this part of the text, and the
balance that the text sought to achieve in this respect. It was clarified that third parties would not
be prevented from seeking the adoption of SCI procedures, but that they would
not have the benefit to the right foreseen for parties in this respect under
the first sentence of the proposed Article 18.4.
304.
There was some
discussion of whether the reference to the information-gathering procedure
under Annex V of the SCM Agreement was appropriate, in light of the timing of
this process prior to the start of the panel's work and of the fact that the
DSU did not make a cross-reference to a specific provision of another covered
agreement elsewhere. It was further
asked how the protection afforded under the proposed SCI procedures was
intended to relate to that provided for under Annex V and whether it was intended
to override it. In this respect, it was
observed that the information-gathering process would precede the panel's work,
but also that the information gathered under Annex V of the SCM Agreement may
require additional protection during the panel proceedings, through BCI
procedures. There appeared to be a need
to reflect further on these issues.
305.
It was observed
that it was unclear what was implied by the reference, in the final sentence of
the proposed Article 18.4, to the application of the procedures "mutatis mutandis" to appellate proceedings. Several participants observed that if this
implied an endorsement of the notion that new evidence could be presented
before the Appellate Body, it would not be appropriate. There had been discussions of this issue
before the Appellate Body in past cases.
One participant cautioned however that there may be instances in which
information might be presented before the Appellate Body in a role other than
evidentiary.
306.
The proponent
indicated that the purpose of this reference was to ensure that protection was
available at all stages of the proceedings, and expressed willingness to
consider redrafts that would clarify this, such as relocating the reference in
the first sentence of the paragraph.
One participant suggested that if this was the intent, it may be best
addressed through a general sentence indicating that the procedures shall apply
to proceedings before panels, the appellate Body and arbitrators under Articles
22.6 and 25. It was also suggested that
if the intent was to indicate that it was unnecessary to seek protection anew
at the Appellate stage once it had been granted at the panel stage, which had
been acknowledged as an important objective of the proposal, it may be simpler
to clearly state that where information has been presented and protected at the
panel stage, it need not be re-argued before the Appellate Body that it should
be protected.
307.
With respect to
Article 18.5, questions were asked concerning the proposed re-wording of the
duration of the protection, and what process was foreseen for the
"withdrawal" of the designation after proceedings have ended. In response, it was suggested that where
information is subsequently made public by its right-holder, then it would in
effect have fallen in the public domain and could be referred to on that
basis. An alternative approach was also
proposed, whereby it would be stated that the information could only be used
for the purposes of the proceedings.
This would circumscribe the permitted use of the information in a manner
that would avoid any discussion of a time limit to the designation. The proponent welcomed the suggestion, though
noting that this approach changed somewhat the focus of the text, away from its
original intention which was to address the duration of the protection. It was observed in this respect that the text
in this paragraph seemed to aim at two distinct issues, namely the duration of
the protection and its continuity throughout the various stages of dispute
settlement proceedings.
308.
It was also
observed that the text of Article 18.5 did not reflect the fact that the
designation of the information as SCI may be successfully challenged, in which
case protection would no longer be afforded.
309.
The proponent
expressed willingness to consider further the comments heard on the drafting of
paragraphs 4 and 5 of Article 18, and to seek to propose revised language to
address them for our next meetings.
310.
Clarification was
sought also on the relationship between the text contained in Article 18, the
Appendix and the ad-hoc working procedures. It was clarified in this respect that the
text of the Appendix, including the definition of SCI, would be of general
application, while the working procedures would detail on a case-by-case basis
the exact level and modalities of the protection to be afforded. It was suggested that the requirement for the
various actors in proceedings to protect the confidentiality of the information
could usefully be set out in the text of the Appendix, since Article 18.2
only addressed the obligation of Members to protect confidential information
and the obligation to protect the information was not otherwise set out.
Stock-taking
311.
Finally, the
Friends of third parties introduced a non-paper[68],
with the request that it be circulated informally for discussion at a
forthcoming meeting.
6. Week
of 30 January 2012[69]
312.
This week, I held
consultations on Member-control and flexibility, strictly confidential
information (SCI), panel composition and third-party rights. We also took stock of ongoing work on remand,
developing country interests, including S and D, and effective compliance.
Flexibility and Member-control
313.
On flexibility
and Member-control, we concluded the discussions in the small group and
continued the discussions in the bigger group.
314.
In the small
group, I first recalled what I understood to be the main outcomes of our
previous discussion on the draft parameters on "Interpretive approaches
to be used in dispute settlement", and a possible way forward.
315.
First, the discussions had confirmed the
interest of participants in a more "principles-based" approach to
these issues and my understanding is that the United States expressed
willingness to move forward in that direction.
So I suggested that this should be the next phase of the work, on this
issue and on all the "guidance" parameters more generally.
316.
Secondly, with
respect to "gap-filling" specifically, the discussion seemed to have
clarified some important aspects. First,
as I understand it, there was general acknowledgement of the important role
played by Article 3.2 of the DSU in addressing the risk that the United States
seeks to avert. The relevance of Article
19.2 of the DSU was also mentioned. A
question arises in this respect as to what more than what
is already contained in these provisions the proposal seeks to address. It did not seem entirely clear from the
discussion whether the notion of "gap-filling" had some content additional to the requirement of not going beyond the rights
and obligations in the existing agreements, or whether Articles 3.2 and
19.2 of the DSU already imply that there should be no
"gap-filling". It was
clarified however that the proponent did not intend to modify the applicable
rules of interpretation, including the role of context and object and purpose
in the interpretive process under the Vienna Convention.
317.
I suggested that
these considerations could inform how the issue might be addressed. In particular, I suggested that to the extent
that the objective of the proposal is to reaffirm the
importance that Members attach to certain basic principles already contained in
the DSU, rather than to bring in new concepts, then it could be fruitful to
explore the suggestions made in the discussion to express the guidance with
reference to relevant existing provisions of the DSU (including perhaps a
reference to a relevant citation of a past Appellate Body report).
318.
I understand that
for some delegations, it is still not clear to what extent additional guidance
to adjudicators is needed on this issue.
But focusing on the core message, we would be able to have a much
clearer sense of what might be possible.
So I encouraged the proponent and other interested delegations to think
further about the way forward and start working on revised text in that
direction.
Draft
parameters on the use of public international law
319.
We then had a
constructive discussion of the draft parameters on the use of public
international law in dispute settlement.
320.
The United States
recalled that the object of this part of the proposal was to clarify the
relationship between WTO dispute settlement and public international law, which
is not clearly set out in the DSU, and to provide guidance to adjudicators on
what would or would not be an appropriate role for public international law in
WTO dispute settlement proceedings.
321.
A number of
participants observed that many of the statements contained in this text were
not controversial in themselves. At the
same time, it was suggested that they could be expressed with more precision
and clarity. In this respect, the merits
of a more principled-based approach were again highlighted and several
participants expressed willingness to work with the proponent towards improving
the text on that basis.
322.
Some participants
emphasized that in order to be of benefit, any guidance given to adjudicators
should provide clarity on the expected approach. It was suggested in this respect that the
text as drafted did not have the required level of clarity. It was also suggested that it would be
helpful for the text to be presented in a manner that would make clear that the
guidance did not call into questions the allocation of responsibilities between
the DSB and the adjudicative bodies.
323.
It was asked what
exactly the added value of the proposed guidance was intended to be, and how it
would in practice assist adjudicators, if it contained mostly non-controversial
statements rather than clarifications of aspects that are unclear. A clarification was also sought as to whether
the proposed guidance was intended to essentially confirm or modify
determinations made to date by adjudicators.
324.
One participant
expressed concern that the purpose of the proposed guidance should not be to
tell adjudicators, including the Appellate Body, that they had erred in past
determinations. In response, it was
clarified that the purpose was not to call into question past determinations,
in respect of which any future guidance would in any event be of no effect, but
to assist adjudicators in future determinations by making clear to them what
the common intention of the Membership is in respect of certain issues not
expressly addressed by the DSU. This
could avoid unnecessary litigation of such issues. The relevant question, it was suggested, was
whether there was a common view among Members as to how the issues should be
addressed, rather than how they had been addressed in the past.
325.
With respect to
the detail of the proposed text, it was asked what purpose was served by the
initial assertion that WTO law is itself public international law. This statement, the proponent explained, was
intended to make clear at the outset that WTO law is part of, and not outside
the realm of, public international law.
It was further asked what this reference was intended to imply and whether
it was assumed that the nature of public international law differed depending
on the type of instrument at issue. It
was observed in response that four sources of public international law are
identified in the Statute of the international Court of Justice (ICJ):
treaties, customary law, general principles of law and the writings of
jurists. Although the exact nature of
some of the sources other than treaties as more or less "soft" law
may be discussed, it was suggested that in the case of WTO law, it was clear
that it fell within the first category, i.e. treaty law.
326.
One participant
observed that, as the text is currently drafted, there appeared to be a
contradiction between this initial assertion and the subsequent guidance, that
appeared to assume that recourse to public international law was not seen
favourably by the Members. Concern was
also expressed that references to statements dating back to 1966 may not be
appropriate as evidence of the current contents of customary law given the
evolutionary nature of such law. It was
further suggested that any guidance with respect to the principles of treaty
interpretation under Articles 31 and 32 of the Vienna Convention on the Law of
Treaties ("Vienna Convention") should not be such that it may give rise
to debate. In this respect, caution was
urged in respect of pronouncements that may lead to questioning common
understandings of the relevant principles beyond the WTO context.
327.
One participant
observed that it was not clear that any consistent rule had been applied by
adjudicators in addressing the extent to which Members can rely on (and
adjudicators may accept) arguments based on public international law in WTO
dispute settlement proceedings. The same
participant suggested that the structure of the text could be improved to
provide clear guidance to the effect that rules of public international law
could be relevant to the extent that they assist in interpreting the WTO
Agreements, as "relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations
between the parties" as referred to in Article 31.3(c) of the Vienna
Convention. The elements of such an
approach, it suggested, were already in the text, but not clearly structured.
328.
It was suggested
that the text could start with the uncontroversial assertion that WTO dispute
settlement serves to resolve matters relating to rights and obligations under
the WTO Agreements. The key question
then is, as expressed in the current text of the proposal, what the role of public
international law can be, in interpreting these rights and obligations. In this respect, the reference in the DSU to
customary rules of interpretation is relevant and, through this reference,
Articles 31 to 33 of the Vienna Convention are also relevant. In turn, Article 31.3(c) of the Vienna
Convention refers to "other rules of international law applicable between
the parties" being taken into account.
329.
Then, it was
suggested, a further question is what these "relevant rules" may
be. It was suggested that it is not
controversial that they could potentially include customary law or general
principles of law. Yet a further
question is what these may consist of.
For example, it may be accepted that reliance on the work of the
International Law Commission (ILC) is appropriate, to the extent that it
reflects customary law. In this
respect, it was suggested that the Appellate Body sometimes falls short of
explaining the basis for reliance on such elements. It could therefore be clarified that, if such
elements are relied upon, the question of what they constitute and why must be
explored. Another question was whether
the "relevant rules" to be taken into account could include rules
other than customary law or general principles of law. This would also be a question to be answered.
330.
The United States
welcomed participants' acknowledgement that many of the statements contained in
the proposed guidance were not in themselves controversial and the suggestions
made. It expressed readiness to work
with other delegations towards improving the presentation of the concepts in
light of the observations heard and in light also of discussions to come in the
bigger group (G40).
Expertise
of panelists
331.
There was also
some discussion of the final aspect of the proposal on Member-control and
flexibility, concerning the expertise of panelists.
332.
In the spring of
2009, we had discussed this issue together with panel composition. In these discussions, it had been observed
that this proposal seeks to ensure that panel members have the right kind of
expertise for the case at hand, and that this consideration was already in
practice an integral part of panel composition.
333.
With this in
mind, my sense at the time had been that there was no conceptual difficulty
with the underlying objective of the proposal.
The question that remained was essentially how best to reflect this in
Article 8.2 of the DSU.
334.
In these earlier
discussions, the United States had proposed the following revised
language:
"Panelists should be selected with a view to ensuring their
independence, [and that the panel as a whole contains] expertise to examine the
kind of matter at issue in the dispute, a sufficiently diverse background and a
wide spectrum of relevant experience."
335.
The discussion
this week confirmed that this revised language helped to clarify that the
requirements in terms of expertise, diversity of background and wide spectrum
of experience related to the composition of the panel as a whole rather than
each individual panelist. In light of this,
it was proposed that the square bracketed language be retained (and the square
brackets removed).
336.
The relationship
between this and the separate proposal on panel composition, also discussed
this week, was noted.[70] It was suggested that although the proposals
were related, they did not seem to have exactly the same objective: this
proposal sought to describe the qualities expected of the panel, while the
other proposal under discussion sought to establish a mechanism for achieving
the desired composition. Each proposal
could therefore be discussed on its own merits.
At the same time, consistency between the two should be ensured.
337.
It was asked
whether the parties would have the flexibility to depart, by mutual agreement,
from the requirements set forth in this provision (as the use of the term
"should" suggested) and how this would impact on any procedure for
panel selection by the Director-General.
It was suggested in response that the situation would probably remain
essentially as it currently stands, i.e. it could be expected that, in composing
the panel, the Director-General would seek to accommodate the preferences
expressed by parties.
"Measures
under review"
338.
In the G40, we
continued a discussion of the draft parameters concerning "measures under
review" in WTO dispute settlement.
In this context, we addressed the section entitled "Definition of a
measure".[71]
339.
The proponent
explained that, instead of trying to define the term "measure", it
found it more useful to provide an illustrative, negative list of what is not a measure.[72]
This list comprises three elements but, given the flexibility of the guidance,
others could be added in light of developments in WTO dispute settlement. A way
of thinking about this list is that normally a measure should be withdrawn if
it is found WTO-inconsistent. The
proponents explained that the three items on the list are difficult or
impossible to withdraw in practice; hence, they provide good illustrations of
what might not constitute measures for purposes of WTO dispute settlement.
340.
Several
delegations questioned the need for such guidance or its usefulness. One delegation pointed out that no
dispute so far had determined that the items on the list constituted
measures. Some delegations asked whether
it was possible to define in advance what is not a measure without creating
loopholes for Members or preventing a necessary case-by-case analysis by WTO
adjudicators. Further, some delegations questioned the need for an illustrative
list instead of merely stating that anything that does not produce a legal effect
is not a measure.
341.
In response, the
proponent explained that its objective is to provide non-exhaustive guidance on
issues that have not been settled in WTO dispute settlement so far. Although there have been no findings stating
that the three items on the proposed list do not constitute measures, several
Members have raised these matters in previous WTO disputes. The proponent added that the definition
certainly does not serve to prevent WTO adjudicators from continuing to assess
the issue of measures on a case-by-case basis.
A continued case-by-case assessment and the qualifications to the
negative list would help to avoid any loopholes or any abuse of the guidance.
342.
As regards the
need for an illustrative list, the proponent explained that too general a
definition of what is not a measure would probably trigger requests for
examples. The proponent added that it
has not heard any delegation argue that the specific items on the list should
be considered as measures per se.
343.
In response, one
delegation noted that it would be important not to prevent or complicate
Members' right to challenge a set of different elements as a measure, even if
none of these elements in themselves might qualify as a measure. Another delegation wondered how, for example,
a statement of a high-ranking party official or Member of Parliament providing
political guidance for banning the importation of a specific product might be
challenged under the proposal.
344.
The proponent
responded that the proposal does not intend to prevent Members from challenging
a set of elements as a measure. As for
the example of a statement by a high-ranking party official and Member of
Parliament, it might serve primarily as evidence of the existence of a discriminatory
import policy, which would manifest itself in specific WTO-inconsistent
measures by a Member's customs authorities.
It is this policy or these measures that the complainant would
challenge, rather than the statement.
345.
In response to
concerns by several delegations, the proponent recognized that in assessing
what a measure is, WTO adjudicators need to take into account the legal
cultures of each Member. What
constitutes a measure is primarily a question under WTO rules; however, the
proposal does not intend to prevent WTO adjudicators from carrying out this
assessment by also taking into account the relevant Member's municipal
law. This is a factual issue, which
requires a factual assessment. The
proponent also clarified that nothing prevents the items on the list from being
used as evidence in WTO dispute settlement.
In fact, footnote (jj) recognizes that the items could also be used as a
basis for interpretation. The items
could even be identified in a request for panel establishment.
346.
One delegation
asked whether the proposed guidance would change the manner in which parties
and WTO adjudicators would assess what might constitute a measure, including
whether a complainant would need to assess the effects of an alleged measure
before drafting its panel request, and whether adjudicators would need to
address this as a preliminary issue. In
response, the proponent stated that this is already very much the case today.
347.
Further, in
response to questions about Article 6.2 of the DSU and expired measures, the
proponent stated that these issues are somewhat different from guidance on what
is a measure reviewable under WTO dispute settlement.
348.
At the end of the
discussion, I asked the proponent if it could consider inserting the word
"legal" into the definition of the second item of the proposed negative
list ("statements without legal effect, for example …") as
proposed by a participant. The proponent
expressed its readiness to consider this idea.
One delegation, however, believed that the term "legal" could
result in making the definition of the second item too restrictive.
349.
In conclusion, I
noted that despite the useful clarifications, important differences remain
among delegations with regard to the proposed guidance on measures. We would therefore revert to these issues at
our next meetings, when we will also address the final element of this proposed
guidance, the issue of "mandatory v. discretionary measures".
Strictly confidential information (SCI)
350.
We continued this
week the discussion of Canada's revised paper, focusing this time mostly on the
proposed definition of "SCI" in Appendix V.
351.
Canada explained
that in its revision of this part of the text, it had retained the three
cumulative and mutually supportive elements in paragraph 1 of Appendix V (that
the information is not in the public domain, that reasonable efforts have been
made to keep it secret, and that its disclosure would cause or threaten to
cause serious harm to an essential interest of the holder of the
information). There should be, Canada
explained, a "success test" to be met by the information for which
protection is sought.
352.
It was asked how
"reasonable efforts" or "serious harm to an essential
interest" could be demonstrated. It
was suggested in response that it was difficult to say in advance how each of
the terms would be interpreted. For
example, what constituted "reasonable efforts" to keep the
information secret might depend on the circumstances, including the type of
information at issue and the potential consequences of its becoming public. The
intent was to provide a threshold that would be more than minimal, while
accommodating a wide range of potential situations. At the same time, the threshold should not be
so high as to discourage recourse to the procedures, since their very purpose
was to provide an assurance that adequate protection was available for
sensitive information that its holders might not otherwise be willing to allow
into the proceedings.
353.
It was
acknowledged that the situation of "leaked" information, where the
information might no longer be secret despite reasonable efforts having been
made to keep it so, was delicate. If
such information had effectively fallen into the public domain, and the harm
associated with the disclosure had already occurred, it would probably no
longer qualify for protection under the definition.
354.
It was also
clarified that the expression "SCI" was intended to cover both
Business Confidential Information ("BCI") and other types of strictly
confidential information, and that the terms "individual and entity"
were intended to cover any entity (including government or business) or
individual (natural person) that may be the holder of information deserving
protection. It was observed that
comparable terms ("individual, body or authorities") appear in
Article 13.1 in a similar context. This raised the question whether the same
terms should not be used in this context also, and how the scope of the term
"entity" in the proposal differed from this existing language. It was observed in response that the
intention was to cover as wide as possible a range of right-holders of SCI,
including non-governmental entities.
355.
It was also asked
to what extent parties would be free to reach agreement to designate
information as SCI, so that it would benefit from SCI protection, even if it did
not meet the requirements of the definition.
It was suggested that, while it would not be possible, under the
proposal, for parties to decide on an alternative, less demanding, definition
of what constitutes SCI or not, it would be possible for a party to designate
information as SCI, that did not meet the requirements of the definition, and
that this designation would not be challenged by the other party. In such a situation, no determination would
be made as to whether the information met or did not meet the criteria for
protection and, in the absence of a challenge, the panel would not have the
discretion to deny the protection. It was discussed in this context whether
this created a risk of the parties abusing this possibility by agreeing, for
example, to designate the entirety of their submissions as SCI and thus making
it impossible for the panel to motivate its rulings in a meaningful way. It was suggested in response that, in
practice, there would most likely be only very limited incentive for disputing
parties to agree on such an approach.
The possibility of challenge, combined with the requirements of good
faith and due restraint (in paragraph 2 of Appendix 5), should provide
sufficient checks and balances to ensure that this situation would not arise.
356.
It was also
observed that other provisions in the DSU provided a basis for distinguishing
between information, which may qualify for protection as SCI, and arguments of
the parties, which do not. In
particular, it was observed that the panel has an obligation to provide in its
report the basic rationale for its findings, which may not be possible without
reference to the arguments of the parties.
357.
It was asked what
exact role was served by the requirements to act in good faith and exercise due
restraint in seeking SCI protection and whether a designation could be
challenged on the basis that it was not made in good faith or that the
designating party did not exercise due restraint, even if the information met
the requirements to qualify as SCI. If
not, and if a successful challenge could only rest on a determination as to
whether the information qualified as SCI under the definition, then it was
asked whether these additional elements were necessary, in light also of the
fact that the expectation of good faith applied with respect to recourse to
dispute settlement generally.
358.
A clarification
was sought as to the different levels of confidentiality that would exist
within the proceedings under this proposal.
It was clarified that there were effectively three possible levels of
confidentiality of information: first, information that would be publicly
available, as addressed in the transparency proposals, secondly, information
that is confidential, including, under the current rules, the submissions of
parties, and, thirdly, SCI, which would be subject to additional
protection. It was also observed that
there would be no need, as a general matter, to try to define in abstracto the exact contours between
"confidential" and "strictly confidential" information,
since the question of determining whether a specific piece of information
constituted SCI would only arise in the event that a party designated it as
such.
359.
In closing,
Canada informed the group that it hoped to work towards further improvements of
its text, including on Article 18.4 and 18.5, which had been discussed in
November. Other Members committed to
contributing to this work.
Panel composition
360. In the G40, we continued our discussion of panel composition, from
paragraph 6 of the text.
361.
The proponent
explained that paragraph 6 now reflects the idea that the Secretariat should
check the availability of candidates not at the beginning of the composition
process but rather at a later stage.
Some delegations suggested that, although the Secretariat should ideally
check the availability of all panelists upfront, with 12-20 candidates this
might be simply too burdensome. One
delegation considered that availability should be checked only after three
persons have been selected – to avoid any embarrassment. For the proponent and another delegation,
this was an issue of efficiency and timesaving:
if candidates' availability is checked too late in the process, some
steps might need to be repeated.
362.
Several
delegations asked how the agreement of parties to the three names resulting
from the ranking process (in paragraph 6) would work in practice. The proponent explained that the question of
ranking is distinct from the issue of chairmanship. At the time of expressing their selection
criteria under paragraph 4 of the proposal, the parties should also express
their preferences for the chairperson's qualities. Once the Secretariat has presented the
outcome of the ranking, it should obtain the parties' agreement to the set of
three names as well as which one of the panelists would chair the panel. According to the proponent, in any event, if
the parties do not agree, they could request the Director-General to compose
the panel under paragraph 9, or request a new slate of names under paragraph 7.
363.
One delegation
sought clarification as to what happens if two candidates have equal combined
preference and the same degree of divergence in ranking. According to the proponent, this would only
be an issue if it concerned, for instance, two candidates with the third
highest combined preference. In such a
case, the second sentence of footnote "u" applies: the Secretariat should select one of these
two candidates by drawing by lot. If,
however, the two candidates in question both have the highest combined preference,
there would be no need for a drawing by lot.
Both candidates would form part of the three names presented to the
parties by the Secretariat.
364.
It was also asked
whether Article 8.7 of the DSU would prevent panel composition by the
Director-General where the parties disagree only on which of the three
candidates presented by the Secretariat should serve as panel chair. According to the proponent, this situation
may occur already today: if the parties
agree to three names proposed by the Secretariat but not to which one should
chair the panel, the panel is not composed and either party may request panel
composition by the Director-General.
365.
One delegation
wondered whether there might be a price to be paid for the automaticity of the
panel composition process under the proposal.
For instance, if the parties agree on the three individual names
resulting from the ranking process but not on the resulting group as a panel,
how could one move from paragraph 6 to paragraphs 7 or 9? Was there a risk of composition – and thus
dispute settlement – being blocked?
According to the proponent, there is no such risk as any party may
request panel composition by the Director-General under paragraph 9.
366.
One delegation
asked why paragraph 6 does not explain how the Secretariat contacts the parties
for their agreement to the outcome of the ranking process. According to the proponent, there is no need
to do so; paragraph 6 clearly states that the Secretariat needs to conduct the
ranking process and then "verify" that the parties agree to the
outcome of that process. Even the
current DSU does not regulate each and every aspect of the Secretariat's
involvement in panel composition. Beyond
the basic elements, it is useful to have some flexibility.
367.
Several
delegation expressed doubts as to the need for ranking. According to one delegation, if there are
12-20 names proposed by the Secretariat upfront, the parties could simply agree
on three of those candidates. In
response, the proponent explained that this would be ideal but, when that does
not happen, having an automatic process would add value – even if the parties
would retain the freedom not to agree to the outcome of that process. According to the proponent, there would
certainly be major improvements over the current panel composition process,
where tactical vetoes "burn" good candidates and where the parties
can never be sure that they have the best possible candidates in front of
them. The proposal would allow parties
to know all names upfront, and this would improve transparency.
368.
Another
delegation questioned the need for ranking if the parties might anyway request
composition by the Director-General, who might not necessarily rely on the
ranking. According to the proponent,
however, it would be useful to go through the ranking even if the parties see
the names upfront and end up requesting composition by the Director-General.
369.
One delegation
agreed that parties' expressing preferences instead of placing vetoes is a
clear improvement under the proposal.
However, another delegation believed that by limiting the number of
vetoes, the proposal would prevent parties from vetoing candidates even for
genuinely compelling reasons. According
to the proponent, the proposal does not prevent parties from ranking such
candidates very low, and parties could also reiterate their reasons against the
candidate(s) during any composition process by the Director-General.
370.
One delegation
expressed the concern that paragraph 9 of the proposal circumscribes the
Director-General's role without formally amending Article 8.7 of the DSU. The same delegation wondered how meaningful
the involvement of chairpersons of the relevant Councils and Committees would
be if the list of candidates is limited to 20 names. Also, could the Director-General compose a
panel of persons who ranked low, and would that be well-received by the
parties?
371.
In response, the
proponent explained that the Director-General would need to look at the overall
outcome of the ranking process, and consult with the parties. The top three candidates under the ranking
process would certainly not be considered as vetoed. The Director-General would compose the panel
of the candidates whom he considers "most appropriate" in line with
Article 8.7 of the DSU.
372.
At the end of the
session, the proponent explained the changes introduced to the revised version
of paragraphs 7-9 of the proposal.
373.
According to the
proponent, paragraph 7 introduces flexibility but remains bracketed, as it
would prefer not to include this in the final text. The first phrase inserted into paragraph 7
reflects the possibility of having a new slate if the first slate did not
contain a sufficient number of available candidates. The second insertion into paragraph 7
clarifies that the Secretariat has no discretion to decide whether or not it
prepares a new slate of names – this depends exclusively on the parties'
agreement.
374.
As for paragraph
8, the proponent explained that the first insertion reflects that this is the
point in the process when the Secretariat could still meaningfully take into
account a request for having candidates from developing countries. The other changes to paragraph 8 serve to
streamline its language.
375.
Finally, the
proponent explained that the revised version of paragraph 9 includes two bracketed
phrases on the fourth line to allow more flexibility for the
Director-General. A third bracketed
phrase in the same paragraph reflects that the availability of candidates might
need to be verified at this stage.
376. We could not address all outstanding paragraphs. Accordingly, we will continue discussing this
proposal at our next meetings.
Third party rights
377.
In a small group
and in the G40, we started a discussion of the revised paper on third party
rights presented by a group of participants (circulated as JOB/DS/6).
378.
In these
discussions, convergence emerged around the approach proposed under the first
item in the document, i.e. third party rights in consultations. Under this approach, Members having expressed
substantial trade interest in consultations initiated under Article XXII of
GATT 1994 would be automatically joined in such consultations, unless the
Member to which the request is addressed notifies the applicant Member and the
DSB within 7 days of receiving the request that it considers the claim not to
be well-founded. In addition, the
proposed text would, through a new footnote, make clear that Members to which
such requests are addressed should give sympathetic consideration to
representations made by applicant Members with respect to the reasons for their
request. It was considered that this
solution provided an adequate balance between the interests of disputing
parties and interested Members, without prejudging the types of considerations
that might form the basis for a "substantial trade interest" in being
joined in consultations.
379.
A number of
drafting suggestions were made to improve the manner in which the text would be
expressed. The following potential
improvements were considered in the small group meeting:
11. (b) Such Member shall be joined in the consultations unless the
Member to which the request for consultations was addressed considers that the claim of substantial trade interest is not
well-founded5 and [so] notifies the
applicant Member and the DSB in writing within 7 days after the date of receipt
of the request to be joined in consultations [of its view as to whether the
claim of substantial trade interest is not well-founded].
5 In considering
whetehr the request is [not] well-founded, The Member to which the
request for consultations was addressed undertakes to accord sympathetic
consideration to any representation made by any applicant Member
concerning its reasons for desiring to be joined in consultations.
380.
Further possible
drafting improvements were considered in the G40. In particular, it was discussed whether the
footnote might be relocated, for example between paragraphs (a) and (b), to
reflect more accurately the sequence of events from the request to be joined,
to its consideration by the responding Member and the notification of the
decision.
381.
There was also a
discussion of whether a notification would be useful not only in cases where
the request is denied (in which case a timely notification would always be
required) but also when the request has not been denied. In that situation, it was observed that
acceptance being automatic, there may be no need for positive action to be
taken in the form of a notification. At
the same time, transparency about both acceptances and refusals may be
beneficial. One participant highlighted
that while for the applicant Member, it was essential to be informed promptly
of the outcome of its request in order to prepare its participation in the
consultations, the same urgency may not be required for information to the DSB.
382.
The proponents
undertook to continue to improve the draft text, taking into account the
comments and drafting suggestions made, with a view to presenting a revised
text on the basis of this emerging consensus by our next meetings.
Developing country interests and Effective
compliance
383.
The proponents of
developing country interests and effective compliance informed the group that
they have been continuing to work with various delegations and to reflect on
possible ways of promoting effective compliance. They recalled in this respect the symposium
that they had organized at the end of last year on proposals to improve
effective compliance and emphasized the importance they attach to this
objective in the negotiations. They
indicated that they would welcome also suggestions from other delegations as to
how to develop effective tools for that purpose. They would continue to work on these issues
with the objective of presenting revised text in time for the next meetings. I encouraged other interested delegations
also to approach the proponents with any concerns or suggestions they may have.
Remand
384.
The proponents of
remand sought more time to prepare some additional material on timelines and
practical examples to guide future discussion.
We will therefore return to remand at our next meetings. I also encouraged delegations who have an
interest in this issue to approach the proponents, to assist in ensuring a more
fruitful discussion at our next meetings.
7. Week
of 5 March 2012[73]
385.
This week, I held
consultations on Member-control and flexibility, panel composition, third-party
rights, and strictly confidential information (SCI).
Flexibility and Member-control
386.
On flexibility
and Member-control, we continued the discussions in the G40 setting.
Measures
under review
387.
I first recalled
what I understood to be the main outcomes of our previous discussion on the
"definition of a measure". Discussions had helped to clarify a
number of aspects, but important differences remained. Questions had been
raised about both the "negative list" approach and the actual list,
including whether it was excessively restrictive and could foreclose legitimate
claims. I invited the proponents to
review this part of proposal in light of these comments and based on a more
"principles-based" approach.
388.
We then turned to
the issue of "mandatory vs. discretionary measures". The United States explained that this
distinction first arose under the GATT 1947 in relation to measures enacted and
not yet in force. GATT panels had found that where a measure mandated an
inconsistent action, it could be challenged as such before its entry into force
because it already mandates inconsistent action. It noted that the distinction
had been mentioned in WTO dispute settlement, without a clear indication that
it would be maintained. The United States considered that if Members found such
distinction to be useful, it would be worth clarifying to guide adjudicators.
389.
The United States
explained that the mandatory vs. discretionary distinction implies that a
measure providing discretion to act either consistently or inconsistently with
WTO obligations cannot be challenged as such. If a measure allows
WTO-inconsistent actions as well as WTO consistent behaviour, it would not be
appropriate for the dispute settlement system to presume that Members would act
inconsistently with their obligations. Instead, it would have to wait and see
if the discretion is exercised in a WTO-inconsistent manner.
390.
I recalled that
in recent small group discussions, it was observed that Members often make
"as such" challenges so that a complaining party would not be
required to challenge each and every application of a measure. The United States, in response, had drawn a
distinction between the determination of whether a measure is mandatory or
discretionary and the question of whether a challenge is made to a measure
"as such" or "as applied".
391.
In the G40
discussions this week, a participant questioned the appropriateness of
"hard rule" language (such as "are not permitted") in light
of the fact that the document is intended only as guidance. In response, the proponent clarified that the
text was intended to provide clear guidance to adjudicators in the form of a
DSB decision and not as an amendment to DSU or as an authoritative
interpretation. The language used would
not make it binding.
392.
In light of the
proponent's explanation of the origins of the distinction, it was asked whether
the intention was to cover both questions of temporality and questions of
discretion. The United States contended that the temporal and the discretion
issues could be viewed as two sides of the same coin and the text was intended
to capture both aspects.
393.
Clarification was
sought on the current jurisprudence with respect to the issue of mandatory v.
discretionary, as well as on the motivation for this guidance. A participant
explained that the Appellate Body had considered this distinction to be a
useful analytical tool without however endorsing. It questioned whether this suggested that the
Appellate Body had considered that the distinction would lead to undesirable
results if generally endorsed. It was
observed that in US – Corrosion Steel, the
distinction was only mentioned as an analytical tool and that the Appellate
Body cautioned against using it in a manner that would allow Members to escape
dispute settlement review.
394.
Several
participants expressed concern that Members may abuse this distinction to avoid
"as such" challenges by designing measures that would give some
discretion to authorities to comply or not, although in fact authorities
would never comply. Concern was
expressed that the text may provide an incentive to Members to create
regulations that give authority to an executive body without much guidance as
to how such authority should be exercised. Should this authority be used in a manner that
leads to a WTO inconsistency, the complainant would not be in a position to
attack the law and would always have to chase the particular application. Even
in situations where it can be demonstrated that the law is consistently applied
in a WTO inconsistent manner, this law could not be challenged. For some
participants, endorsing this distinction could be difficult to reconcile with
the principle of prompt and effective settlement of disputes.
395.
The proponent agreed
that there should be no risk of abuse but did not see such potential here. It
commented that, as things stand, many measures can be applied in numerous ways
and cannot be challenged as such. For instance, measures that grant the
authority to set tariffs in a variety of ways allow for inconsistent
applications because tariffs can be applied above bound levels. This measure
however could not be challenged as such.
The United States further suggested that the fact that the Appellate
Body has in certain cases examined whether there is discretion indicates that
this issue is still relevant. The United
States also suggested that the proposed text goes in the direction of prompt
settlement of disputes, insofar as complainants do not have to wait for a
measure to be applied in order to challenge it as such.
396.
One participant
suggested that the guidance would be useful if it allowed adjudicators to make
a finding that if a measure that on its face grants discretion to act
inconsistently were to be applied it in a certain way it would be
inconsistent,. The United States
considered however that this would require speculation as to how the measure
might be applied and amount to an advisory opinion.
397.
One participant
observed that it might be problematic to create a rule explicitly stating that
WTO adjudicative bodies are not permitted to presume that Members would choose
to breach their obligations. In its view, adjudicative bodies never presume
inconsistent behaviours. However, if there is continuous and persistent incompliance
based on a legislation which provides discretion to comply or not comply, there
would be a record of non-compliance. In such circumstances, it would be
reasonable to assume that, even if the measure does not formally mandate
inconsistency, it necessarily leads to inconsistencies. In its view, where
there is a pattern of inconsistent application, the measure, even though if
formally discretionary, should be challengeable as such. It was also observed
that in situations of repeated inconsistent applications of a measure, the
application of the presumption of good faith may be more complex.
398.
In response, the
United States noted that the example put forward suggested the existence of an
additional measure or action indicating to the authorities how they should
behave. This situation would raise, in the US view, evidentiary issues, but was
not the type of situation the text intended to address. The fact that a measure
is applied a number of times in an inconsistent manner does not make the
measure inconsistent as such, in the United States' view. Situations of repeated application of
inconsistent acts could not be resolved through a finding that the measure that
grants a broad authority is inconsistent as such as a result of the application
of the measure.
399.
The proponent
noted that so far no participant had expressed disagreement that a measure that
mandates inconsistent actions can be challenged as such. It also noted the
absence of disagreement on the assertion that if measure grants discretion, the
adjudicative bodies cannot presume that the Member will act inconsistently. For
the proponent, the disagreement relates to the manner in which these ideas are
expressed.
400.
One participant
observed that there was no clear definition in the proposal of the concepts of
"mandatory" and "discretionary". Although the intention appeared to be to
refer to an obligation or discretion "to act in a manner that would breach
the covered agreements", this absence of a definition led to
uncertainties. It would be more comfortable with language referring to a
measure that necessarily results in an inconsistency. In addition, a
determination of what is "mandatory" or "discretionary" may
in practice involve an assessment of the status of the specific measure under
the relevant national law. The United
States agreed that the question whether a given measure is mandatory or
discretionary may involve consideration of its status under national law and
observed that the actual text did not include the terms
"discretionary" or "mandatory", so that it did not see a
need to define them.
401.
It was further
asked whether a measure not considered legally binding under domestic law could
still be considered mandatory under WTO law, in light of the role of municipal
law in WTO dispute settlement. In order
to understand better the as such and as applied distinction, a participant
asked the United States to explain how this distinction would operate in a
civil law context (in a system involving law, ministerial decrees and
administrative decisions).
402.
It was noted that
the distinction had implications for the kind of remedies available. If a particular measure is found to be
inconsistent as applied and the finding requires the Member concerned to remove
the inconsistency, this would address the situation. However, if implementation
was limited to a particular application, the dispute would not result in a
satisfactory solution. It was also
observed that in situation where a measure is found to be inconsistent in
conjunction with others, DSB recommendations and rulings do not mandate an
amendment of all the measures. The Member could lawfully choose to implement by
amending only some of the measures. In the proponents' view, it was relevant to
look at the question of implementation, but it is a different issue. It clarified that the proposal was not
targeted at rulings on a group of measures. Rather, it relates to the situation
in which a measure that affords discretion is found inconsistent. The implication
for implementation is that the measure does not need to be modified, since the
problem lied in its application. For
example, a regulation that authorizes government officials to act in a
consistent or inconsistent manner would be "discretionary" and would
not have to be changed.
403.
It was observed
that the proponents seemed to link the notion of discretion to the question of
compliance with WTO law. However, it was suggested, discretion also arises when
a Member has the choice of applying or not applying a measure.
404.
In concluding the
discussion, I took note of the concerns expressed and of the United States'
responses. I suggested that it would be useful to have further discussions
between delegations that have expressed concerns about the potential for
abusing the system.
405.
We also
considered the final paragraphs of the section on "Order of analysis".
The United States explained that the issue addressed here is the temporal
time-frame of measures examined by panels. It noted that in practice, various
situations have given rise to questions. For instance, could a measure that
existed at the date of consultations but was modified before issuance of the
report be analysed by adjudicative bodies? What of a measure that no longer
exists at the time request for consultations or a measure proposed but not yet
adopted at the time of the request for consultations?
406.
The proponent
considered it would be useful to provide guidance because of the lack of
consistency in panels and Appellate Body's practice. It noted that one of the concerns related to
the situation where a measure is in place at the date of the request for
consultations but repealed when a panel is requested and is later put back in
place. The question that such situation poses is whether this would prevent
findings. In the proponents' view, the complainant should be able to proceed
and have findings in order to avoid having moving targets. The United States
also recalled that the object of the dispute settlement system is to resolve
actual disputes, so if a measure has expired before consultations, the panel
should not review it. For these reasons, the United States proposes to adopt a
simple approach and select a single date to determine which measures can be
reviewed. Under this approach, a measure that exists at the time of request for
consultations can be reviewed. Other questions will need to be addressed as
issues of compliance.
407.
Some participants
agreed that this issue would merit consideration because it is a jurisdictional
matter currently not clearly addressed in the DSU. It was suggested it might be addressed
through an amendment to the DSU instead of guidance to adjudicators. The proponent agreed that this is a
jurisdictional issue and that it was useful to look at Article 4.2 of the DSU
as a source of inspiration. The language of this provision was in present
tense, which implied that the measure needs to have an effect at the time of
the request (measures that no longer exist or do not yet exist do not have an
effect).
408.
Concern was
expressed that the language used in the proposed text did not make clear
whether it would be possible to challenge a measure that is not yet in force at
the time of the request for consultations but is expected to be in force soon.
Clarification was also requested on the situation with respect to measures capable
of repetition. The United States explained that measures capable of repetition
would not necessarily be within the jurisdiction of panels, and that the
proposal does not intend to capture historical measures. As for measures not
yet in effect but existing at the time of the request for consultations, the
United States clarified that they should be captured. However, measures not yet
in existence (proposed measures) should not, because there is no certainty as
to whether they will ever come into existence.
In the US view, the defining document should be the request for
consultations and the basic question to be answered is whether the measure was
in the request for consultations.
409.
Concern was
expressed at the notion that the scope of the panel's jurisdiction could not be
expanded between the request for consultations and the panel request. One participant observed that, in its view,
the defining document for the panel's jurisdiction was the panel request, rather
than the consultation request. Whilst it
agreed that there must be consistency between the two documents, it expressed
difficulties with the fact that the proposal would leave out measures related
to the request for consultations because they were not in existence at the time
of that request
410.
The United States
acknowledged that there might be measures not expressly covered in the
consultation request that could nonetheless be brought into the scope of the
panel proceedings. Panels and the Appellate Body had recognized that a purpose
of consultations is to improve parties' understanding of the measures at issue
and have therefore accepted to review existing measures related to those
expressly identified in the request for consultations. However, the United
States did not believe that this allowed for the addition of measures that are
different and not related to the measures in the consultations request.
411.
I thanked
participants for the useful exchange and took note of the elements of
convergence and also of the concerns expressed. I encouraged the proponents and
other delegations to consult further to try to reach common views.
Panel composition
412.
On panel
composition, we concluded the discussions in the G40, focusing mostly on
paragraphs 7 to 9 of the European Union's revised text.
413.
One participant questioned
what would happen if, in light of very specific criteria provided by the
parties, the Secretariat was unable to find 12 panelists as foreseen in
paragraph 4. The European Union recalled
that, as noted in previous discussions, setting very specific criteria would
put the Secretariat in a difficult position.
For that reason, paragraph 4 of the text provides flexibility to the
Secretariat. Further flexibility is provided by paragraph 7, which is intended
to address the situation of deadlock that may arise when the criteria are too
specific.
414.
With respect to paragraph
7, which envisages the possibility of a second list being presented by the
Secretariat, the European Union clarified that the parties would need to
broaden the criteria in order to allow a second list to be proposed.
415.
It was asked when
this second list would need to be presented, and how this would affect the
20-day period for resorting to the Director-General to compose the panel. The European Union explained that it did not
see the proposal as changing this period.
Accordingly, the procedural steps foreseen in the proposal, including
the presentation of a second list under paragraph 7, might or might not have
all taken place, but the right of a party to proceed to DG composition at that
point should not be called into question.
416.
The European
Union also clarified that the situation of an “insufficient number of panelists
available” referred to a situation in which, after the availability check,
there are less than 3 or 5 persons left from the initial list. In that case, the Secretariat would need to
propose a second list. The European Union explained that the second list would
replace the first one, and the parties would get to exercise veto rights on
that list as well.
417.
We then discussed
paragraph 8, which seeks to clarify the moment at which a request for a
developing country panelist would be taken into account in the panel selection
procedure.
418.
It was asked what
the phrase "at the moment of indicating criteria under paragraph 4"
implied and what would happen if the request for a developing country Member
panelist was made at a later stage. The proponent explained that this is
intended to operationalize Article 8.10 of the DSU by clarifying the
appropriate moment for requests to be made under this provision. Earlier discussions indicated that the
appropriate moment to formulate the request would be when the parties
communicate their preferences, allowing the Secretariat to screen the universe
of potential panelists taking into account these preferences. In its view, there was no need for a
particular additional period for the developing country Member to consider its
own status in addition to otherwise considering its preferences. The European Union
also noted that, as things stand today, the request is made at the moment of
communicating preferences.
419.
Clarification was
sought on the operation of the footnote to paragraph 8, in particular with
respect to its first sentence which provides that "[a]mong nominations
with equal combined preference, the person(s) with the lowest degree of
divergence between the parties' rankings shall receive priority." In
response, it was explained that the intent is that the Secretariat would
examine how the points were obtained and select the more consensual candidate.
420.
It was also asked
how this part of the proposal would work in combination with the separate
requirement of making an effort to satisfy at least one of the parties’
criteria and how it would be ensured that a reasonable number of developing country
citizens would be proposed. The European Union responded that this is in the
hands of parties when formulating their criteria. The proposal does not, in
their view, change the current situation, insofar as parties do not know the
number of developing country panelists considered by the Secretariat.
421.
Concern was
expressed as to whether the operation of the footnote may increase the risk
that the overall composition arising from the rankings would not result in a
combination of panelists that represents the qualities parties were looking
for, if it took into account only the ranking of the individual candidate. In that respect, the proposal may lead to
having recourse more often to DG composition.
422.
In response, the
European Union explained that the requirement relating to a developing country
panelist would be connected to the overall balance of criteria defined by the
parties. The system does not foresee two separate rankings. However, it implies separate counting
exercises to ensure an overall balance between preferences and the requirement
of a developing country national panelist where requested. If parties exercise
their ranking rights responsibly they should ensure that the developing country
Member panelist criterion is placed at an adequate level in the ranking and
reflects the overall balance of preferences expressed.
423.
It was further
asked how the Secretariat would determine "the needed number of
persons" under this footnote. The
European Union confirmed that this could be expected to be one, under the
current text of the DSU. However, under the proposal, nothing precluded that
the number be higher, if the parties' preferences implied that there should be
more than one developing country national panelist.
424.
Finally, a
discrepancy was noted between the text of the last sentence of paragraph 8,
which refers to a "developing country citizen" and the language of
Article 8.10 of the DSU, which refers to a "panelist from a developing
country Member". The European Union
clarified that there was no intention of introducing the concept of citizenship
as a defining element of this provision.
425.
We then turned to
paragraph 9, which clarifies how composition by the Director-General would work
under this proposal. The European Union
explained the bracketed language in this paragraph. It noted that the first set
of brackets ("[if possible][to the utmost extent possible]") was
intended to introduce flexibility in the Director-General's decision to select
persons not included in the Secretariat’s initial list. The second set of brackets ("[to the
extent they are available,]") clarified that the screening of
availabilities of the highest ranked candidates, carried out in the previous
phase, should also be taken into account by the Director-General.
426.
The European Union
explained that the flexibility provided for the Director-General to select the
panel outside the Secretariat’s original list under the two square-bracketed
alternatives was introduced following discussions with other delegations. The
European Union noted that an objective of the proposal was precisely to limit
the Director-General's discretion to nominate persons that the parties did not
have a chance to consider. Therefore the European Union's preference is for the
second bracketed text ("[to the utmost extent possible]"), to give a
strong encouragement to the Director-General to stay within the universe of
panelists identified by the Secretariat.
The European Union clarified that the choice between the two alternatives
gives an indication of how difficult the situation would have to be to entitle
the DG to go outside the list.
427.
Further
clarification was sought on the types of circumstances that may justify such
departure from the Secretariat’s list.
It was asked what criteria would entitle the Director-General to go
outside the list, and whether he or she would have to explain why it was not
possible to stay within it. The European Union explained it did not envisage a
system of challenge or review of the Director-General's decision, or a
requirement for the Director-General to justify a decision to go outside the
list. Rather, the proposal, and the bracketed language in particular, was aimed
at providing some indication to the Director-General, but he would remain free
to appoint who he considers are the most appropriate panellists for the dispute
in accordance with Article 8.7, which remained the operative legal text in this
respect. It was suggested that a more accurate formulation might then be
"if appropriate".
428.
It was asked how
the proposal, which ultimately entitles the Director-General to appoint
panelists outside of the list, would differ from the current practice and
whether this would reduce the impact of the limited list initially presented.
The European Union explained that the proposal aimed at achieving a proper
balance. In this sense it was useful to
make the parties aware that when they have resort to composition by the
Director-General, they may not get their preferences; however it was also
important to limit to the utmost extent possible the Director-General's ability
to go outside the list.
429.
It was also asked
how the Director-General would be expected to take into account the preferences
of parties with respect to the names in the Secretariat’s list, including their
objections to the composition arising from the ranking process. The European
Union considered that, as things stand today, a variety of situations is
already possible, and the whole spectrum of situations that arise today would
also occur under the proposal. The Director-General should have all the
rankings and even consult the parties in order to exercise his or her
responsibility with the best available information.
430.
With respect to
the last bracketed language in paragraph 9 ("[to the extent they are
available,]"), the European Union explained that this was intended to
clarify that the Director-General would not have to consider persons whom the
Secretariat knows are not available. However, it did not necessarily mean that
all names would have to be checked before the Director-General made his choice.
Rather, the Director-General would make his determination taking into account
the availability check previously made by the Secretariat and his own.
431.
It was asked what
meaningful role the Chairpersons of the DSB and other relevant organs that need
to be consulted by the Director-General could play, if the Director-General is
limited in his choice to the list initially presented by the Secretariat. The European Union suggested that the
proposal does not change the current practice insofar as the Director-General
would continue to receive input from Secretariat staff and would still have the
discretion to give weight to the opinions expressed by the different Chairs in
the process of consulting them. The ultimate requirement remained, under
Article 8 of the DSU, for the Director-General to select the most appropriate
panelists for the dispute at hand. The
possibility of nominating panelists outside the Secretariat’s initial list also
provided flexibility to the Director-General in this respect.
432.
Reference was
made to the earlier proposal for a roster of panelists and the broad support
expressed for this concept in a recent symposium. The European Union observed
that this had not, in past discussions, received the same level of support
among participants in the negotiations.
Third-party rights
433.
This week we
continued to consider the draft legal text on third party rights in
consultations, building on the convergence around the approach proposed under
the first item in the document.
Discussions in the small group led to further drafting improvements. The
following text was considered:
"11. (a) Whenever a Member
other than the consulting Members considers that it has a substantial trade
interest in consultations being held pursuant to paragraph 1 of Article XXII of
GATT 1994, paragraph 1 of Article XXII of GATS, or the corresponding provisions
in other covered agreements4, such Member may notify the consulting Members and
the DSB in writing, within 10 days after the date of the circulation of the
request for consultations under said Article, of its desire to be joined in the
consultations.
(b) The Member to which the
request for consultations was addressed undertakes to accord sympathetic
consideration to any representations made by the applicant Member concerning
its reasons for desiring to be joined in the consultations. The applicant
Member shall be joined in the consultations unless the Member to which the
request for consultations was addressed notifies, in accordance with
subparagraph (c), that it considers that the claim of substantial trade
interest is not well-founded.
(c) The Member to which the
request for consultations was addressed shall notify the applicant Member and
the DSB in writing within 7 days after the date of receipt of the request to be
joined in the consultations whether it [accepts the request or considers that
the claim of substantial trade interest is not well-founded] [considers the
claim of substantial trade interest to be well-founded or not]."
434.
In the G40, the
proponents reported that they had come to an agreement addressing the remaining
concerns expressed by some delegations.
The first sentence of subparagraph (b) of Article 4.11 was now
agreeable. Concerning the two options offered by the bracketed language of subparagraph
(c), the proponents clarified that conceptually the intention of the proposal
was not to change the current practice, which allows notifications to express
acceptances of third party requests in a simple way, without elaborating on
whether the interest is well-founded. With that in mind, the proponents
believed that the language in the first set of brackets captures this idea and
is consistent with drafting of subparagraphs (a) and (b.) The proponents
submitted this for the consideration of the group whilst noting that they were
open to suggestions.
435.
One delegation
questioned whether the language in the first square-bracketed would not
undermine the automaticity embodied in subparagraph (b). It pointed to the
relation and the potential contradiction between the two subparagraphs:
according to subparagraph (b), an absence of notification would imply that the
third party request is accepted, while the language of subparagraph (c)
required ("shall") the defendant to notify both the acceptance and the
rejection of requests. This, in its view, left no option for not replying, and
therefore for the automaticity to operate. With the option of the first squared
brackets, it was not clear which of subparagraph (b) or (c) is the operative
provision.
436.
A discussion
followed on the manner in which the substantive conditions in subparagraph (b)
would relate to the notification requirements in subparagraph (c). The proponents suggested that it would be
useful to keep separate the notion of automaticity of acceptance and the
notification requirement. There was an
obligation to notify within 7 days when the claim is considered not to be
well-founded. If no notification is
sent, the automaticity operates and therefore the third party request is
accepted. Separately, an obligation to inform the DSB of which Members were
accepted could be included.
437.
The proponents
agreed that from an intellectual point of view there was a need to choose
between automaticity and notifying both acceptances and rejections. They
suggested introducing on subparagraph (c) a sentence that would acknowledge the
possibility of not reacting. Another possibility at which the proponents
pointed is that the notification of acceptance be made only to the DSB for
transparency purposes. Drafting suggestions
were made to reinforce the idea of automaticity, such as clarifying the DSB
notification. The proponents agreed with the idea of a separate DSB
notification.
438.
I noted that
there appeared to be no conceptual difference of view and that delegations shared
the common view that an absence of timely rejection implied the automatic
participation of the requesting Member.
I suggested that proponents and other interested delegations consult
further on the exact language to reflect the common intention of participants
and bring new language to the next meeting.
439.
The discussion
then moved to the second aspect of the proposal, relating to panel
proceedings.
440.
The proponents
recalled that the proposal on Article 10 contains three elements: the first
element in Article 10.2 (a), which aims to provide a time period to notify the
interest in participating as third party and regulate the issue of late third
party notification. The second element
was in Article 10.2(b) (iii), which provides for the possibility to participate
in each substantive meeting. Finally,
the third element is that the panel may grant additional third-party rights
only upon agreement of the parties. The proponents also explained that this
constituted a departure from their original proposal and took account of the
concern expressed of not overloading the work of parties and at the same time
facilitating third-party participation.
441.
With respect to
the timeframe for expression of third party interest, support was expressed for
codifying the practice of the 10 days from the date of panel establishment to
express third party interest. However
concerns were raised with respect to the proposed treatment of notifications
made beyond this 10-day period. Several participants saw value in allowing some
flexibility in this respect. At the same
time, questions were raised about the potential impact on the panel's
organization of its work and the potential additional burden for parties, as
well as on the composition of the panel, if the notification was received from
a Member who had a national serving on the panel. It was also asked on what basis the panel
would decide whether to accept such "late" requests.
442.
The proponents
clarified that the 10-day period constituted a crystallization of the current
practice and could serve as an incentive to submit the request within that
period. The proponents clarified that they did not believe that allowing late
third party notification would change the panel's Working Procedures, and the
requesting Member would bear the cost of a late request. Leaving the issue of acceptance of late third
party notification to the panel's discretion was intended to take account of
the fact that parties may be prone to disagreements and this should not hinder
the acceptance of reasonable requests. The proponent suggested that, after
consulting with the parties to the dispute on their concerns, such as the
nationality of a panelist or disruption in the proceedings, the panel would
take these considerations into account in taking a decision on the
request.
443.
In respect of the
situation in which the late request was presented by a Member whose national is
serving on the panel, it was asked whether this would call into question the
composition of the panel as possibly inconsistent with the requirements of
Article 8, and whether entrusting the decision to the panel in that case would
create a conflict of interest for the panelist concerned. In response, it was suggested that this
provision may rather provide the solution to the question, in that it would not
be consistent with Article 8 to accept as third party a Member whose national
was serving as panelist, unless the parties agreed to it.
444.
It was also asked
who would take the decision if a late third party notification came before the
panel's composition. One participant
also was not certain that this issue was within the panel's jurisdiction to
decide.
445.
There was some
discussion of the current practice in respect of notifications made more than
10 days after the establishment of the panel.
It was observed that such notifications had been made in some cases and
accepted by panels. It was also observed
that the "10 day" practice followed as a carry-over from the GATT was
currently not a clear "rule".
One delegation questioned the existence of a clear practice on late
third party notifications. Another delegation referred to three cases in which
panels accepted late third party notifications, as confirming the practice.
446.
One participant
questioned the need, from a policy point of view, to codify this situation
rather than leaving it to panels' discretion if these cases constitute an
exception. It also questioned the need,
from a practical standpoint, for such an extension. In its view, the 10-day
period Members have to consider whether want to join as a third party at the
panel stage is sufficient, since it starts the time of the written request and
comprises the period before the first and second DSB meeting. It was also
suggested that providing for acceptance of late third party notification could
undermine the 10 day-period. It was
asked what would be considered a reasonable period to express interest after
the 10-day period.
447.
I took note of
the points raised and of the proponents' readiness to work towards language
acceptable to all. I noted the
suggestion made to leave this issue as something that could only be waived by
the parties and not left to the discretion of the panel.
448.
The discussion
then turned to the second aspect of the text on Article 10, that is, the
question of the rights to be granted to third parties. I noted in this respect that the proponents
had made it clear, in their proposal, that their suggestion to limit the
discretion of the panel to grant further rights in addition to those proposed
in paragraph 2(b) was conditional upon acceptance of those standard
rights. So in order to facilitate a
constructive discussion, I invited participants to focus specifically on
whether this proposed approach could constitute a fair balance of rights and
obligations.
449.
The proponents suggested
that the proposal only added one right: the right to take part in the second
substantive meeting, which would include the right to make an oral statement
and the right to respond to the questions arising in and from the meeting. Additional rights beyond those identified
would be subject to the agreement of the parties. This would bring clarity and predictability
in the extent of third party rights, and would also bring consistency in this
respect. The proposal aimed at achieving
a balance in the treatment of third parties in different cases.
450.
One participant
expressed support for enhancing third party rights at this level and codifying
rights that have been given in practice. Several other participants also
expressed support for enhancing third party rights whilst ensuring that such
access would not be detrimental to parties.
However some participants considered that a better balance was reflected
in an earlier proposal that envisaged third parties being allowed to
participate actively at the first substantive meeting but only to be present at
the second meeting, with flexibility for the panel to grant additional rights
on a case-by-case basis. Other
delegations also expressed concerns about the burden arising from the proposed
enhanced rights for the parties, in particular in relation to the second
substantive meeting. It was also
observed that the separate proposal on transparency would address the issues of
attendance at substantive meetings and access to written submissions.
451.
The proponents explained
the need for setting aside a third party session at the second substantive
meeting to make oral statements and respond to questions. They distinguished
the right to be present from active participatory rights, clarifying that, when
meetings are open to the public, third parties would not need to be present in
the room.
452.
It was also asked
whether the correct place for such codification was the text of Article 10 of
the DSU rather than Appendix 3. In this regard, it emphasized that regulating
third party rights in Article 10 itself could create an imbalance compared to
the parties' rights, which are detailed in the Appendix.
453.
I encouraged
participants to consider the linkages between this proposal and the proposal on
transparency (open hearings and access to submissions) given that both
proposals are not, in my view, mutually exclusive. I took note of the need to have a balance, as
a matter of drafting symmetry, between the expression of parties' and third
parties' rights in the text. I encouraged participants to try to bridge formal
and substantive differences on these issues.
Strictly confidential information (SCI)
454.
This week we also
completed the discussion of Appendix 5 of Canada's revised text on SCI in the
G40.
455.
Further
discussion took place on the role of the requirements to act in "good
faith" and exercise "utmost restraint" in resorting to the
procedures. It was reiterated that a
general requirement to act in good faith was already embodied in Article 3.10
of the DSU, so that it was not necessary to repeat it again in a specific
paragraph of the text. It was suggested
that a general reference to Article 3.10 in some preambular language, and
encompassing all phases of the procedures, may be more appropriate.
456.
It was questioned
again what the purpose was of also referring to "utmost restraint"
and what situations this was intended to cover, given that the existence of a
definition and of a challenge mechanism would seem to define the situations in
which recourse to SCI procedures was legitimate. It was also asked whether this reference
implied that the definition should be subject to a strict interpretation. Was
it intended that, even if information fell within the scope of the definition,
the party concerned would be expected to consider not seeking adequate
protection for it? In this respect, it
was observed that, depending on the legal status of the information, it may not
be possible to decide not to seek protection for it.
457.
The proponent
clarified that the notion of "restraint" was intended, like the
reference to good faith, to prevent abuses.
This would signal to Members the need to consider seriously whether to
seek additional procedures, taking into account the associated burden on the
proceedings, and the general objective of transparency in the proceedings. There was, the proponent argued, a
distinction to be made between the nature of the information and its value to
the right-holder, and the Member's assessment of the contribution of that
information to the proceedings and its decision to submit it as SCI.
458.
Possible
scenarios of abuse were identified, such as a situation where only a limited
part of the information contained in a document is genuinely strictly
confidential, where it may be sufficient to identify that information, rather than
the whole document, as confidential. It
was observed however that even in that situation, such issues could be
addressed through recourse to the challenge mechanism and the application of
the definition. In response, the
proponent observed that the objective would be to avoid having to get to that
stage, by encouraging Members to exercise some judgement from the outset in
seeking protection under SCI procedures.
459.
One participant
suggested that what seemed to be at issue was the notion that recourse to the
procedures should be something of an "exceptional" nature. Another participant suggested that the right
balance would be one that allowed the parties to present the case fully,
thereby enabling the panel to have at its disposal the relevant information for
its determinations, while preventing abuses.
Although ultimately, the issue could be decided on the basis of the
definition in the challenge mechanism, there was merit in encouraging Members
not to resort lightly to the procedures.
Specific drafting suggestions were made, including a suggestion to have
a general sentence to the effect that "each party shall exercise utmost
restraint in exercising its rights under this Appendix", or something
equivalent. Canada expressed readiness
to consider alternative formulations.
460.
The functioning
of the proposed challenge mechanism was also discussed. In particular, it was asked how the
presumption of treatment of the information as SCI would function, and whether
it was intended that the burden of proof within the challenge mechanism rest on
the party challenging the designation.
Canada confirmed that this was its intention. It was observed that,
given the cumulative nature of the three elements of the definition, it would
be sufficient for the challenging party to demonstrate that any one of the
conditions was not fulfilled.
Conversely, if the designating Member bore the burden of demonstrating
that all three conditions were met, this may prove excessively burdensome. The proposed allocation of the burden of
proof was also consistent, Canada suggested, with the presumption of good
faith.
461.
By contrast,
under paragraph 4, the presumption would be reversed, in that it would be for
the party alleging that protection was required to demonstrate that the information
at issue warranted protection as SCI. It
was acknowledged, in this respect, that the level of protection afforded under
paragraph 4 was less extensive than under paragraph 3, since by hypothesis the
information would have been made available initially without protection.
462.
Specific drafting
improvements were suggested in paragraph 3, including the replacement of the
term "criteria" by "definition" and of the terms "the
panel considers" with "the panel decides". Canada agreed with
these proposed changes, and also agreed to similarly review, mutatis mutandis, the terms of paragraph 4.
463.
It was also
suggested that the language used to describe how the information and material
containing it should be disposed of in the event that the party chose to
withdraw it following a successful challenge could be clarified. Specifically, it was not clear how the
"contents" of information differed from the information itself and
how it would be possible to return "information" beyond the return of
the physical document or support containing it.
It was also asked whether it would always be appropriate to require that
the information not be used, when its withdrawal may be the result of a
determination that it was in the public domain or that the other party was its
right-holder and did not seek protection for it.
464.
In response,
Canada suggested that this part of the text could be reviewed to distinguish
between: (1) return of what can be physically returned; (2) destruction of what
cannot be returned and (3) not disclosing information that was only known as a
result of its presentation in the proceedings.
465.
Canada also
agreed to review the language with a view to making clear that if the
designating party did not oppose the challenge, there would be no need to go
through the whole procedure and obtain a determination from the panel.
466.
In response to a
question, Canada further clarified that in the event of procedures being sought
by a third party, where the panel would have the discretion to adopt procedures
or not, that decision would not be based on an assessment of whether the
information at issue met the terms of the definition in Appendix 5. Rather, the
procedures under Appendix 5 would only come into play after procedures had been
adopted in accordance with Article 18.4 (at the request of a party or third
party). In this respect, Canada
explained that it was reviewing also the terms of Articles 18.4 and 18.5, to
distinguish more clearly between the right to seek the adoption of BCI procedures
(to be addressed in Article 18.4) and the rights and obligations arising from
such procedures once adopted (to be addressed in Article 18.5).
467.
In response to a
question concerning the extent to which the proposed procedures would differ
from past adopted BCI working procedures, and in light also of the related proposal for a DSB decision,
information was made available to participants concerning BCI working
procedures adopted by past panels.
468.
In conclusion,
Canada indicated its readiness to review the language of its proposal in light
of the comments made, with a view to presenting a further revised text.
8. Week
of 7 May 2012[74]
469.
This week, I held
consultations on third-party rights, Member-control and flexibility, remand,
strictly confidential information (SCI) and developing country interests.
Third-party rights
470.
On third-party
rights, we continued our discussion of the revised text presented by the
Friends of third parties[75],
both in the small group and in the G40.
Third
party rights in appellate proceedings
471.
In the G40, we
first discussed third party rights in appellate proceedings. The proponents
recalled that they did not propose new text in this respect but supported the
proposal in the Chairman's text of July 2008.
472.
Several
delegations expressed support for allowing flexibility to join the proceedings
at the appellate stage and expressed readiness to consider logistical and
practical arrangements to address other delegations' concerns over the
potential burdens that this may entail.
473.
Some delegations
reiterated their concern that this proposal would entail additional burdens
both for the Appellate Body and for the parties. In their view, this would have a bearing
particularly at the hearing: the more third parties there are, the less time
there is for parties to make their case.
This would move the process away from helping parties resolve their
dispute.
474.
It was observed
in response that granting Members the possibility to become third participants
on appeal did not amount to creating a new class of interveners, as they would
have the same rights that existing third participants already have. It was also questioned whether the proposal
would in fact increase the number of third parties overall, given that under
current rules, the need to reserve rights at the panel stage also created an
additional burden on Members wishing to reserve systemic interests. In response it was observed that WTO Members
who would choose to defer participation until the appellate stage would have to
assume that all panel reports would be appealed, which is not the case.
475.
It was suggested
that in any event the Appellate Body would have the ability to address issues
relating to the number of participants by managing participation so as to
ensure balanced proceedings, as it does now.
One participant doubted whether the Appellate Body would in fact do
this. A proponent observed that
procedural arrangements should be made in the Appellate Body's Working
Procedures rather than in the DSU. A
suggestion was made to insert general language in the text to clarify that the
participation of third parties should not have an adverse impact on the ability
of parties to argue their case, while leaving it to the Appellate Body to
organize the details of how to achieve this through its working procedures.
476.
It was also suggested
that under the current practice, parties normally know the views of third
participants, because they have already been expressed at the panel stage. It was suggested that new participation at
the appellate stage implied that third parties may bring new legal points,
submissions and arguments that parties will have to address. It was argued that this would undermine the
parties' ability to defend their interests and focus on the resolution of their
dispute. It was asked whether this
concern might be addressed by imposing limits on issues that new third
participants may raise, or applying an additional threshold for participation.
477.
The proponent
observed that it is the appellants and other appellants who define the issues
examined on appeal and that third parties, regardless of their number, do not
have this prerogative. Even bearing in
mind the principle of iura novit curia,
they saw no potential for new third participants to bring new issues on appeal.
The most that third parties can do, they argued, is add new arguments, support
existing ones or provide more perspectives on already discussed issues. With respect to the suggestion of applying an
additional threshold for participation, it was observed that, as things stand
today, there is no limitation in practice to participation at the panel
stage. In addition, developing a test to
decide which Members should be granted third party rights would be very
difficult.
478.
There was also
some discussion of what would motivate a Member to become third participant at
the appellate stage. Concern was
expressed that interest might be expressed on the basis of the outcome of the
panel proceedings rather than of the issues, thus polarizing the debates. In response it was suggested that the current
situation was no different, given that such polarization may also take place at
the panel stage. It was also suggested that this may in fact be a more
efficient allocation of resources, as Members must currently join at the panel
stage without necessarily knowing if the issue of interest to them will be
relevant. It was noted, as in earlier discussions, that not all the issues may
have been apparent from the beginning of the panel proceedings.
479.
One delegation
emphasized the importance of the opportunity for all WTO Members to participate
in proceedings especially at this stage, given the Appellate Body's role in
providing legal interpretations of the covered agreements. A discussion followed on the difference
between the exclusive authority of the General Council and Ministerial
Conference to adopt authoritative interpretations of the WTO Agreements under
Article IX of the WTO Agreement and legal interpretations developed by panels
and the Appellate Body, which are binding only on the parties to the dispute. The importance of this proposal especially
for developing countries facing resource constraints that were unable to
participate at the panel stage was noted.
480.
It was suggested
that the obligation to reflect third parties' arguments would be more
cumbersome, if there are additional third parties. In response it was suggested
that this burden should not be overestimated.
It reflected current practice and simply consisted of inserting the
arguments into the report.
481.
I took note of
the views expressed. I noted that a number
of delegations were supportive of enhancing third party rights at this stage,
while understanding the importance of
not creating additional burden on the process. I also noted delegations'
readiness to explore ways to address these concerns.
482.
We also considered
the text itself, including the manner in which the interest to join should be
expressed, the deadline for expression of interest, and the description of the
rights of third participants.
483.
With respect to
the manner in which interest should be expressed, a discrepancy was
highlighted between the text of the proposal in Article 17.4, which refers to
the "interest to do so", and Article 10.2 of the DSU which refers to
substantial interest in "the matter".
This left it unclear how broad the scope for expressing interest could
be. The question arose whether there
should be a lower threshold to participate in Appellate Body proceedings
compared to panel proceedings. A proponent
stated that it was not suggesting a lower threshold applied, though the thresholds
may be different, to the extent that the interest in participating may be more
systemic in nature.
484.
It was suggested
to replace the text on the notification of interest in subparagraph (b) with
the original G6 text, which mirrored Article 10.[76] It was
also suggested however, that given the limited scope of appeals as defined by
Article 17.6 of the DSU, the interest at issue could only relate to issues
within that scope. In this respect, a
reference to "the matter" could be too broad. It was proposed to change the language in
subparagraph (b) to refer to "interest in the appeal".
485.
The 5-day deadline
in Article 17.4(b) for expressing interest was questioned, in light of the
Appellate Body's revised Working Procedures.
Members would have to join as third parties prior to receiving the
notice of other appeal. At the same
time, a later deadline may further complicate the serving of documents.
486.
An alternative
deadline calculated from the date of circulation of the report was first
suggested, but it was observed that it should be possible to join after an appeal is lodged, rather than before. A relative deadline was suggested instead,
referring to the deadline for the notification of other appeal, for example
"no later than 3 days after the deadline for the notice of other
appeal".
487.
The proponents
were ready to explore language based on a "no later than"
formulation, but remained concerned about the servicing of documents. A
participant observed that under the current Appellate Body Working Procedures,
the deadline for submitting a third participant's written submission is 21 days
after the filing of the notice of appeal. It was suggested that it was
appropriate to leave to the Appellate Body to determine how the documents could
be served on new third participants.
488.
With respect to
the rights of third participants, it was noted that wide latitude seemed
to be given to third participants in subparagraph (c), which refers to the
"right to be heard". It was also suggested, however, that this
language was in fact narrower than the language on "participating" in
subparagraph (b). One delegation suggested that it should be clarified what
access third participants should have to documents other than the notice of
appeal. It was also proposed to merge
subparagraphs (b) and (c).
489.
In concluding the
discussion, I encouraged the two groups of proponents to look for common ground
on the issues discussed, in consultation also with other interested
delegations.
Third
party rights in compliance proceedings
490.
The proponents
explained that they did not want to change the meaning of this provision and
that the intention was only to propose clearer language. They understood that
under the existing DSU language and also under the sequencing proposal, there
is no obligation to request consultations prior to requesting a 21.5 panel but
it is possible. They believed it was
necessary to clarify that, where consultations are requested, third party
interest could be expressed provided that the consultations are open.
491.
I recalled that
in the context of our discussions on sequencing, changes were proposed to
Article 21.5, including with respect to consultations. Specifically, it was proposed to clarify in
Article 21.5(c)(i) that "The procedures under this paragraph do not
require the complaining party to request consultations under Article 4 before
requesting the establishment of a panel."
The proponents clarified that they were trying to avoid any ambiguity
that may result from this formulation.
This language, they argued, can be interpreted as either precluding or
permitting consultations.
492.
I invited
participants to comment on two aspects: (i) first, whether there is agreement
on the notion that, if consultations are requested in the context of compliance
proceedings under Article 21.5, third party interest in these consultations may
be expressed in the same conditions as under original proceedings; and (ii) if this is the case, whether the proposed
reformulation of Article 21.5(c)(i) adequately captures this intention.
493.
Several participants
sought clarification of the basis for the proponents' perception that the
language previously agreed was unclear.
The proponents explained that conceptually they believed that all
delegations agreed that consultations are optional and therefore remained
possible. They explained that whilst
they did not interpret the current text as precluding consultations, some
delegations may interpret it that way.
They noted that the negative phrasing could have some legal meaning and
sought to provide further clarity.
494.
I sought
confirmation of participants' views in this respect. Participants confirmed
their understanding that the intended meaning of Article 21.5(c)(i) was to
allow but not require consultations to take place before a panel is sought
under Article 21.5. Participants also
confirmed their understanding that, if consultations were sought in the context
of proceedings under Article 21.5, third party interest could be expressed as
in original proceedings. [77]
495.
It was observed
that the proposed text had no specific linkage with the issue of third parties,
and that the original language was part of the previously agreed sequencing
text. The proponents stated that the intention was not to reopen something that
was agreed, but they invited participants to explain why the proposed revised
language was not acceptable and to identify their concerns with it.
496.
One participant
noted that it would be more comfortable with an express reference to Article 4
in the text. A proponent responded that
such a reference was unnecessary, in light of the general reference to
"procedures under this Understanding" in the introductory
paragraph. Another participant suggested
that the proposed reformulation may be simpler and therefore preferable.
Third
party rights in proceedings under Article 22.6
497.
We then
considered the text relating to Article 22, paragraphs 6 and 7. The proponents explained that third party
participation in Article 22.6 proceedings is not currently addressed in the DSU
and is left to the arbitrator's discretion.
It saw value added to allowing third parties to participate and to
clarifying the situation in the DSU.
498.
I noted that that
the text was based on separate proposals on Article 22.6 and 22.7. The proposal here relates only to: (i) the final sentence of paragraph 6.(a),
proposing that express third party interest in an arbitral proceeding under
Article 22.6 could be expressed in conditions comparable to those applicable to
original panel proceedings; and (ii) the reference to paragraph 4 of Article
17, in Article 22.7, where the possibility of an appeal of the arbitral
decision is proposed. Whether there
should be an appeal of such proceedings was a separate issue, which was not yet
resolved. This part of the proposal was
therefore relevant only to the extent that an appeal is accepted, and the
proponents of third party rights confirmed that they took no position on
whether that should be the case.
499.
A proponent
explained that Article 22.6 arbitral proceedings deal with two issues: claims
about the level of nullification or impairment and claims that the principles
and procedures of Article 22.3 of the DSU have not been followed. They therefore deal with factual and legal
questions. Under current practice, participation and its extent is left to the
arbitrator's discretion. The value of
the proposal was to address this uncertainty.
The idea was to express that Article 10 of the DSU applies mutatis mutandis; therefore whatever rights were granted
under Article 10 would also be reflected in Article 22.6 proceedings. Any
Member wishing to become third party would know from the beginning of the
process which rights will it be granted.
500.
One delegation
expressed support for this proposal, noting that arbitrators often struggle
with limited facts and important legal issues and could benefit from
information provided by the third parties. It also agreed that the reference to
Article 10 mutatis mutandis was an efficient way to
deal with this issue and enquired whether all Members would have to express interest
afresh to become third parties in this phase.
A proponent replied that since arbitration proceedings often come
several years after the initiation of the original proceedings, it would
provide more legal certainty to ask all Members to confirm their interest.
501.
Another
delegation was sympathetic to proposals to enhance third party rights but felt
there was a need to strike a balance between enhancing rights and an efficient
dispute settlement system. It suggested that the proposal seemed to go too far,
and that preserving the arbitrator's discretion to grant third party rights on
a case-by-case basis contributed to striking such balance.
502.
Some delegations
observed however that at the retaliation stage, where there is already a
finding of inconsistency and a complainant with the right to suspend
obligations against another Member, the situation had a degree of urgency and
is essentially bilateral in nature, involving calculations, trade data and
econometric analysis specific to the relations between the parties, rather than
systemic legal issues. A proponent
observed that under the current rules, the arbitrator had no guidance on issues
such as how to make determinations on the level of nullification or impairment,
what should be the starting point of calculations, or the methodology to be
followed. The approach followed in one
case may be replicated in other cases and followed as an example. Other Members may therefore have an interest
in contributing by submitting their views on the approach to be followed. Another proponent argued that claims relating
to the principles and procedures of Article 22.3 of the DSU, including
cross-retaliation issues, are very much of systemic interest, especially in
today' system where arbitral rulings are not appealed.
503.
One participant
suggested that if legal issues of systemic interest arise, they should be
addressed through another avenue, not via third party
participation in 22.6 proceedings. One
delegation agreed that arbitrations may raise legal issue of systemic
importance such as the concept of benefits, the scope of the violation, the
scope and extent of compliance and non-compliance, the concept of nullification
or impairment, the meaning of equivalence or how to ensure equivalence. However, it noted that at the same time there
were costs to involving other participants, especially at this stage where
there was a strong interest in speeding up the process. It recalled that the practice to date was to
allow third parties under very limited circumstances, as illustrated by the EC - Hormones
proceedings.[78] Granting third party rights in this case had
amounted more to a consolidation of procedures on almost identical matters,
where the outcome in one arbitration could affect the outcome of the other. In its view, third party participation should
continue to be allowed only under these very limited circumstances. One of the proponents noted that it would be
reluctant to limit the rights only to Members that are engaged in similar
disputes. It considered that the merits
of the proposal were greater than its risks and that delays would be manageable
through working procedures.
504.
We continued this
discussion in the G40. In that context,
the proponents explained that the aim of their proposal is to allow Members to participate
as third parties in respect of systemic issues in which they have an interest,
including the application of procedures under Article 22.3 of the DSU. It was noted that arbitrators in previous
Article 22.6 proceedings have exercised their discretion to allow third parties
to participate. The proponents wished to
expand this opportunity to allow third party participation as a right of
Members, with a specification of the rights to be granted.
505.
Certain
delegations expressed support for this proposal as a way to provide more access
to the system. Supporters indicated that third parties could provide useful
contributions to assist the arbitrators in their task, such as establishing a
methodology for determining the level of suspension, or determining the proper
counterfactual to assess. They noted
that panel and Appellate Body proceedings also involve factual discussion, for
instance, in SPS or TBT disputes, but this has not served as a reason to limit
third party participation. Furthermore,
they noted that the decision to allow third parties in the context of panel
proceedings does not depend on how many Members might be affected by a given
measure.
506.
Other
delegations, however, expressed concern that the proposal tilts the balance too
far by allowing participation by third parties in specific factual questions
that do not have application outside the parameters of a particular
dispute. These delegations characterized
Article 22.6 arbitrations as primarily an area of bilateral relations, and one
that does not determine the inconsistency of application of any of the covered
agreements. In this light, some
delegations indicated a preference for retaining the current practice in place
to leave an arbitrator with discretion to grant access, as opposed to granting
an automatic right. At this stage in the
life of a given dispute, delegations also expressed concern with delaying the
determination of an outcome by allowing third party participation.
507.
In response to a
question, it was explained that under current rules and practice, third parties
requests were received in five of the cases in which Article 22.6 arbitral
decisions have been issued to date.[79] Third party rights were granted by the
arbitrator in two of these cases, both relating to the EC - Hormones
disputes, where the complainants became third parties in each other's
proceedings.
508.
One delegation
suggested that it may strike the right balance to allow third party
participation, not during the arbitration itself but during an appeal stage, in
the event that Members agreed to allow the determination of arbitrators to be
subject to appeal. It was felt that this
might permit third parties to provide input on any issues that were determined
to be of systemic value, without overwhelming the arbitration exercise
itself. In suggesting this, it was
recognized that the question of appeal of Article 22.6 arbitrations formed part
of a separate discussion. Delegations
further questioned what effect third party participation at an appeal stage
would have if the nationality of a third party were the same as that of an
arbitrator. It was offered that Article
8 of the DSU would not apply in this context, as arbitrators were not
considered to be "panelists".
Some delegations felt that issues of conflict or bias would not arise,
as an arbitrator would be bound by findings on appeal regardless of what any
third party argued. Others suggested
that the code of conduct and rigorous selection process should shield against
any such concerns. Moreover, it was
noted that the nationality of Appellate Body Members was never an issue when
considering disputes on appeal, and similarly, nationality should not pose a
problem for arbitrators.
509.
I took note of
the discussions and invited proponents to continue their efforts with other
delegations and report on further progress.
Flexibility and Member-control
510.
In the G40, we
continued a discussion of the draft parameters on guidance to adjudicative
bodies, focusing on the interpretive approach to be applied in WTO dispute
settlement.[80]
511.
I first recalled
that the discussion in the small group had confirmed an interest in a
principles-based approach. I encouraged
participants in the G40 to consider this issue in light of that objective. I also recalled that a number of clarifications
had been made in the small group discussions, which are described in earlier
summaries.[81]
512.
The United States
recalled that the aim of this part of the proposal was to address the manner in
which adjudicators should deal with the often noted fact that when reaching
agreement on text, negotiators may leave some aspects unresolved. In such situations, it was appropriate to
recognize the existence of ambiguity, but it would not be for adjudicators to
resolve it, nor should they undertake to fill gaps in agreed text. The four subheadings under this proposal were
intended as complementary and informing each other.
513.
Some participants
indicated at the outset that, in their view, adjudicators are capable of
resolving the issues before them and therefore they were not persuaded that
guidance was necessary in this matter.
In addition, concern was expressed that the guidance itself should not
lead to further confusion.
514.
Several
delegations observed that the application of the relevant rules of
interpretation, including Articles 31and 32 of the Vienna Convention on the Law
of Treaties (VCLT), would provide the means for adjudicators to resolve any
ambiguities arising in the interpretation of provisions of the covered
agreements.
515.
There was some
discussion of the types of situations in which ambiguities may arise. It was observed that the notion of ambiguity
was itself not without ambiguity. It was
acknowledged that ambiguities may be deliberate ("constructive") or
unintended. A distinction was also
suggested between ambiguities relating to language and those relating to
concepts. It was questioned whether
ambiguities of different origins should receive the same treatment.
516.
The proponent
clarified that their intention was to provide guidance only with respect to
situations in which an ambiguity remained after the application of the rules of
interpretation of Articles 31 and 32 of the VCLT. Specifically, the situation at issue was one
in which the adjudicator would have completed an analysis of the terms of the treaty
in accordance with Article 31 and determined that this analysis left the
meaning "ambiguous", as envisaged in Article 32, and where recourse
to the supplementary means of interpretation of Article 32 has also not allowed
the ambiguity to be resolved. In this
situation, more than one interpretation would remain possible, and the
intention was to provide guidance to adjudicators as to how to resolve this
remaining uncertainty. The proponent
explained that its proposed solution was to clarify that, in such situations,
the ambiguous language should not serve to validate a finding on the claim or
defence at issue, where this would require foreclosing one of the possible
meanings of the language at issue. This,
the proponent clarified, did not involve an enquiry into the underlying reason
for the ambiguity.
517.
One participant
suggested that the application of the interpretive process under Articles 31
and 32 of the Vienna Convention is not so linear, and that the reference to
ambiguity in Article 32 does not address the question of whether the
adjudicator is bound to rule.
518.
Clarification was
also sought as to what exactly the proposal would imply, in terms of the
adjudicator's ruling on the matter before it.
It was clarified that the intention was not to have a situation of non liquet, but rather that the language at issue could not
serve as basis for a successful claim or defense. In other words, the burden of establishing
the claim or defence would not be met by the party bearing it, at least not on
the basis of the ambiguous language invoked, if the meaning of that language
remained ambiguous. This would ensure that the intentions of negotiators are
respected, by preventing the adjudicator from deriving rights and obligations
from language that lent itself to more than one interpretation.
519.
It was questioned
whether this implied that the solution would always be in favour of the
defendant, if the interpretation that leads to an absence of violation is
systematically favoured. In response it
was observed that the guidance would also apply to situations where the
ambiguity involves a defence. Concern was also expressed that the introduction
of such guidance may generate an incentive for strategic behaviour, by
systematically arguing the existence of ambiguity in order to escape a finding
of violation.
520.
It was also asked
on what basis a possible interpretation would be preferred over another and
whether ruling out one of the possible interpretations might not in itself
diminish the rights and obligations of Members.
It was further observed that to the extent that what was at issue was
the interpretation of specific language, this language should be given
meaning. It was asked how this approach
would ensure that the effet utile of
the treaty terms is preserved.
521.
With respect to
gap-filling, it was suggested that this was a distinct notion from ambiguity,
although one participant observed that an inappropriate resolution of an
ambiguity may result in gap-filling. The
proponent agreed that this was a distinct notion but considered that the same
principle should apply, i.e. that the adjudicator should not seek to resolve
the gap by filling it. Rather, it would
be for the Membership to do so. The
proponent expressed interest in hearing views on whether the language proposed
in the draft text, including that the function of adjudicative bodies is to
resolve disputes over obligations undertaken and not to substitute for
negotiators and re-write, reduce or supplement the agreed text, accurately
captured this intention.
522.
In concluding, I
took note of the fact that the discussion had clarified the intended scope of
the guidance. At the same time, it remained unclear to what extent participants
wished to provide guidance to adjudicators on this issue, and if so, what this
guidance should be. I encouraged the
proponent and interested delegations to continue to discuss, including on the
specific language highlighted by the proponent.
Strictly Confidential Information (SCI)
523.
This week, we
discussed a further revised text presented by Canada. Canada first noted that the DSU currently
foresees that submissions to adjudicators are confidential and also envisages
the possibility of making public some of this information. It proposed to have ultimately three levels
of confidentiality: (i) the traditional confidentiality of information
submitted to panels; (ii) transparency proposals that would have some
information made public; and (iii) some information sufficiently important in
value to make it more confidential than the standard confidentiality
requirement.
524.
Canada recalled
that its original proposal was quite ambitious, and that a more "light
touch" approach was later developed, moving away from a detailed mandatory
procedure. Over the past year, valuable
input received from other participants had allowed further evolution, to reach
the current version, this combined simplicity and a guarantee of protection
where necessary, including checks and balances to avoid abuse.
525.
The revised
version of the text, Canada explained, still had four components:
-
DSU text,
containing core rights and obligations;
-
An appendix, less
detailed than in earlier versions of the proposal to provide guidance to
adjudicators, setting out minimum procedural requirements;
-
Minor changes to
panel working procedures in appendix 3;
-
A draft DSB
decision for a body of sample BCI working procedures adopted by past panels,
providing flexibility for experimentation and information-sharing and the
development of best practices.
526.
Canada then
explained that under Article 18, the order of paragraphs 4 and 5 had been
rearranged, so that paragraph 4 sets out the right to have the procedures
established, while paragraph 5 addresses the requirements relating to the
procedures once adopted. With respect to the duration of protection, two
options were proposed in paragraph 5, reflecting suggestions made in earlier
discussions.
527.
Participants were
appreciative of Canada's effort to revise the text in light of earlier comments
and discussions.
528.
With respect to Article
18.4, it was discussed whether one or two sentences would be preferable, to
express the situations in which protection should be granted. It was explained that two aspects were
intended to be covered: first, the right to seek protection for information
from the initial panel stage and to ensure the continuity of this protection
through to subsequent stages of the proceedings; and secondly, the possibility
of seeking protection for the first time at a later stage if necessary. The proponent expressed readiness to explore
possibilities of expressing this in a single sentence, though it was unclear
how easily the concepts of right to protection and continuity of protection
could be expressed simultaneously.
529.
It was questioned
whether it would always be necessary to adopt procedures for BCI protection at
the later stages of the proceedings, for example if the information protected
at the panel level was not relevant to the issue under appeal. It was suggested that language such as "where
requested by a party, the [adjudicator] [Appellate body] shall adopt procedures
…" might address this concern. It
was also suggested that if the procedures in the Appendix were intended to
apply to adjudicators other than the panel, the reference to the panel in the
challenge procedure should be adapted.
530.
There was also a
discussion of the extent to which protection might be needed for the first time
later than the panel proceedings. It was
suggested that Article 21.3 arbitral proceedings could be covered, even if the
likelihood of SCI being submitted at that stage was low. Questions remained on the extent to which it
would ever be legitimate to present new information, and thus seek protection
for it, at the appellate stage. The
proponent explained that its intention was to allow protection to be sought at
every stage where it is admissible, without seeking to alter existing rules as
to what was or was not permissible in this respect. In particular, there was no intention of
modifying Article 17.6. It was asked to
what extent the proposal might not nonetheless indirectly amount to an
amendment of this provision, to the extent that it would imply that new
evidence may be submitted at the appellate stage. The proponent expressed readiness to consider
further how this issue might be addressed, for example through language such as
"nothing in these procedures will prevent the submission of new
information at a later stage if it is otherwise allowed".
531.
It was observed
that the commentary submitted with the text suggested that third parties may seek
BCI protection, to be granted at the discretion of the panel, but this
intention was not expressly reflected in the text of Article 18.4. In Article 18.5, on the other hand, reference
was made to procedures adopted pursuant to Article 18.4 at the request of third
parties, despite the fact that third parties did not enjoy a right to obtain
the adoption of procedures under Article 18.4.
532.
A participant
wondered if the reference to the "same level of protection" being
granted throughout the proceedings should appear in Article 18.5 rather than
Article 18.4, as it related to the level of protection. Canada suggested that
this aspect relates to both the granting of the protection and the level of
protection.
533.
It was questioned
whether it was necessary to specify in Article 18.4 that incorporation of the
principles of Appendix 5 could be "directly or by reference". It was also asked what the consultations with
parties in 18.4 would relate to, if all the points included in Appendix 5 had
to be incorporated in the procedures anyway.
The proponent clarified that Appendix 5 addressed only the definition
and the challenge mechanism, and the procedures to be adopted by the panel
would likely also include many other aspects.
While the elements included in Appendix 5 would have to be incorporated,
other aspects could be consulted on.
534.
Some participants
sought clarification of the extent to which parties would be free to depart
from any of the terms set out in Appendix 5, including the definition and the
challenge procedures, to suit their particular needs in a given case. They saw merit in allowing a degree of
flexibility in this respect, where the parties agree to it. Clarification was sought in this context on
the meaning of the expression "minimum" provisions and whether it
implied a distinction in the status of different elements of the Appendix. The proponent clarified that the intention
was not to allow any departure from the terms of the Appendix, and that this
expression referred to the entirety of the provisions in the Appendix. This would not preclude a higher threshold
for protection, but it would not be possible to adopt a less demanding
definition or to eliminate the challenge procedure as contained in the Appendix.
In the proponent's view, providing excessive flexibility in this respect would
defeat the object of the procedures.
535.
A participant
requested clarification of the role of the concept of "exceptional
circumstances" in Appendix 5, and at what stage in the procedures
this would come into play. The proponent
suggested that this notion would not come into play at the stage of adopting
the procedures, but at the stage of submitting information. The exceptional circumstances would not need
to be justified, as good faith would be presumed.
536.
Some participants
also continued to have concerns over various elements of the definition,
including the requirement of "serious harm to essential
interests". It was asked how a
panel would be expected to assess this criterion and whether it was desirable
to require it to engage in such an analysis.
Canada considered that the notions of serious harm and essential
interest were fairly widely used in judicial settings, and could be left to
adjudicators to provide more specific meaning thereto. Concern was also reiterated with respect to
the requirement of "reasonable efforts" to maintain the information
secret and its implications with respect to the treatment of leaked
information. With respect to the notion
of information being "lawfully" held, the proponent clarified that
this was intended to signal a requirement of ownership, though it stressed that
the lawful owner would often be a private entity, distinct from the Member
seeking protection for the information in the proceedings. It considered that the definition, which was
inspired by domestic practices, reflected elements commonly found and was
applicable in a variety of situations.
537.
It was questioned
whether the definition of SCI properly belonged in the Appendix or whether it
should rather be located in the main text. The proponent was not persuaded that
there would be added value to having it in the provision itself.
538.
It was also asked
whether the references to concepts taken from intellectual property law, such
as "public domain" and "undisclosed information", were
appropriate. For example, the notion of
"public domain" may in fact be quite limited in scope. It was suggested that an examination of the
definition of some of these terms under the TRIPS Agreement may assist in
clarifying their meaning. The proponent
expressed willingness to review this to ensure that the terms used would
properly reflect the intended scope of coverage.
539.
Clarifications
were sought as to how the procedures addressed information subject to
protection under Annex V of the SCM Agreement.
It was questioned in particular how procedures under the DSU, to be
adopted by a panel, could bind a facilitator established under the SCM
Agreement. It was clarified that the
intention was to ensure that information already made available under Annex V
would be entitled to protection under SCI procedures in panel proceedings, and
also that the initial procedure under Annex V be covered, at least from the
time that panel proceedings start.
540.
With respect to
the relationship between SCI protection and the confidential status of
information submitted under Annex V procedures, the proponent suggested that
just as SCI protection was granted in addition to and beyond the basic DSU
status of confidentiality of information submitted to adjudicators, nothing
precluded information protected as confidential under the SCM procedures from
also qualifying as SCI once panel proceedings started. The proponent was open to discussing
protection of information as SCI under facilitation procedures going backwards,
but at minimum it sought coverage going forward once the panel was established.
It also acknowledged a temporal problem in the formulation of this part of the
text, and was open to looking into that.
541.
I took note of
the positive response of participants, and also of the questions raised. There seems to be a common view that SCI
protection is important, and I encouraged Canada to try to take on board the
comments heard as much as possible. I
indicated that I would like to revert to this issue as soon as possible based
on progress to be made in near future.
Remand
542.
This week, we
continued our discussion on remand.[82] In discussing this issue in September, we had
initially focused on two broad conceptual issues: (1) the question of who should initiate
remand, and (2) whether a "double-implementation" procedure was
desirable, or whether the entirety of the findings and recommendations –
including those implicated within the remand procedure – should be adopted and
implemented together.[83]
543.
In November, the
G6 had presented a non-paper in which it shared further thoughts about these
two basic conceptual questions. Also in
November, Korea proposed an alternative approach reflected in draft legal text.[84] We had not had an opportunity to discuss this
text at length until now.
544.
This week, the G6
initially identified certain areas of convergence between the proposals, such as the fact that it would be for the
Appellate Body to identify the situations giving rise to remand and for a party
to initiate remand proceedings. It also
identified several issues for discussion, including: (1) how we should express
who can remand; (2) how a request for remand to the original/reconstituted
panel is couched; (3) how to address concerns over delays; (4) how to address
issues of split implementation and whether language is required on how to address split implementations; (5)
how to address requests for multiple remands; and (6) what happens in the event
that parties decide not to remand.
545.
We then had a
threshold discussion on who should trigger or initiate remand, and the
role a complainant or respondent may play within a remand mechanism. Both proposals under discussion contemplate
that either a complainant or respondent may wish to seek to initiate a remand
proceeding under certain circumstances.
Both proposals also envision that the Appellate Body would need to
indicate situations in which it could not "complete the analysis",
which would give rise to a situation where a party may request remand of a
particular claim or defence. Delegations
agreed that parties should retain the ultimate decision as to whether or not to
proceed with remand.
546.
Delegations
discussed whether either party to a dispute should be allowed to request
remand. In this context, delegations
considered several hypothetical scenarios, to clarify how the findings and
recommendations of the Appellate Body would be expressed, including in the
situation where the Appellate Body upheld a finding of inconsistency in respect
of a given claim, but was unable to complete the analysis in respect of a
defence raised by the respondent in relation to that inconsistency. The questions arose of what findings the
Appellate Body would make in that situation and what recommendations would flow
from these. [85]
547.
It was suggested
that the procedure should not result in a situation where implementation
obligations might arise with respect to an initial violation, while the outcome
of the defense remained uncertain. It
was questioned whether it would be the case that a respondent would have an
interest in initiating a remand proceeding in such a situation, if no
recommendation has been made with respect to the initial finding. Clarifications were also sought as to how,
under the second proposal, the notion of the scope of the findings being
"enlarged" or reduced would apply, including in these situations.
548.
Participants also
considered the question of implementation of the findings and
recommendations in remand situations.
There are still different views as to whether, as a result of a failure
to complete the analysis and a desire to conduct a remand proceeding, there
should be a "single adoption" for the ensuing panel and Appellate
Body reports or whether there should be a "double adoption" system.
549.
As envisioned,
under a single adoption procedure, the entirety of the Appellate Body's
findings in a dispute would be reflected in a single report and adopted in one
instance, after the conclusion of a remand proceeding. Under a double adoption scenario, it would be
possible to adopt the initial Appellate Body report, containing any completed
findings (together with the relevant panel report), and proceed with
implementation in respect of those findings while unresolved aspects of the
dispute are addressed through remand.
Thereafter, there would be a second adoption of the report or reports
addressing those claims or defences that were addressed during a remand
proceeding.
550.
Delegations
discussed how these proposals might impact on the implementation procedure,
taking into account a Member's domestic political constraints. Concern was expressed that a double or split
adoption procedure would result in every subsequent step of the proceedings,
including the RPT for implementation and any compliance proceedings, also being
"doubled".
551.
Clarifications
were also sought as to what would happen, under both proposals, in the event
that no remand was sought, and how the findings and recommendations of the
Appellate Body would be expressed in both cases.
552.
Following this
discussion, I encouraged both proponents to work together to identify areas of
further convergence in their proposals.
I also encouraged other delegations to work with proponents. The proponents confirmed their interest in
continuing to discuss their proposals in the build-up to our next
discussions.
Developing country interests
553.
A group of
proponents of developing country interests[86] presented this week, as a non-paper, a
concept note setting out issues of common concern.
554.
They observed
that whatever outcome is achieved in this negotiation, it will have to contain
issues of interest to developing countries.
These should be at the heart of a solution, so that developing countries
and LDCs can access the system. Until
now, they observed, not many developing countries have been able to take part
in dispute settlement proceedings. There
were Special and Differential Treatment provisions in the DSU, but these were
generally not effective. The group
wanted to give teeth to these provisions to enable greater participation of
developing countries in dispute settlement.
555.
The group
explained that the concept paper is an effort to unify previous proposals and
incorporate new elements of discussion to enrich the debate. It identifies several areas of interest:
-
Adequate
timeframes, to address specific needs of different disputes and adjust
timeframes to accommodate difficulties faced by developing countries;
-
Inducing
compliance. The proponents are seeking
ways to level the playing field in various ways, including taking account of
the impact of the measure on the economy of the developing country complainant,
support from other Members or administrative sanctions;
-
Mitigating the
costs of litigation;
-
Regulating access
to participation of non-parties and non-Members, including to:
·
give clarity to
how Article 13 of the DSU may be used (amicus curiae
briefs) and;
·
enhance third
party rights in the panel and appellate stages.
556.
Participants
welcomed the proponents' joint effort in presenting this paper. It was observed that this was a sign of engagement
and commitment to these negotiations and of proponents' eagerness to engage
other participants in a discussion.
557.
Several
participants shared the proponents' view that many developing countries faced
difficulties in engaging effectively in dispute settlement proceedings, and
agreed that developing country interests needed to be an integral part of any
outcome in these negotiations. It was
suggested that levelling the playing field should be a key objective in this
respect.
558.
The document was
acknowledged as a good basis for discussion, and participants expressed
readiness to engage constructively in discussions, including at a conceptual
level, on the basis of the document. It
was also commented that a number of these issues had been discussed in the
past, including on the basis of specific text, and that this would facilitate
discussion.
559.
At the same time
it was observed that "the devil is in the detail", so that it would
be necessary also to look at specific language in order to make a full assessment
of the proposals. The proponents
clarified that their intention was precisely to generate a discussion that
could give rise to the development of draft legal text, taking into account the
views and concerns of other Members.
This would provide the best chances of developing text that would
address the concerns of both the proponents and other participants, and thus be
agreeable to all. The proponents
illustrated with examples how they have been working towards specific solutions
that could give practical meaning to various provisions and concepts identified
in the concept note.
560.
Some participants
noted that the broad objective should be to ensure that the dispute settlement
system is user-friendly and accessible to all Members, so that the issues did
not necessarily present themselves in terms exclusively of developing country
vs. developed country distinctions. The
wide variety of circumstances that different Members may face in practice,
including among developing countries, was noted.
561.
Several participants
offered preliminary comments on some of the specific issues identified in the
paper, expressing support for the objectives, or raising questions.
562.
I thanked the
proponents for their important effort in presenting this paper, which I
believed represented much work and was an important contribution to our work
towards a successful conclusion of the negotiations. I noted that many of the issues in this
document have been discussed already and for some time, though not always at
the level of detail that would have been desirable. Positions had remained somewhat unclear in
some areas, and it would be important now for all participants to engage
constructively in an open discussion towards legal text. I noted that this
document presents a very good opportunity to find common ground on these
issues.
9. Week
of 4 June 2012[87]
563.
This week, I held
consultations on remand, Member-control and flexibility, developing country
interests and strictly confidential information (SCI). We
also briefly took stock of ongoing work on third party rights and remand.
Remand
564.
On remand, we
continued the discussion of the G6 and Korea's proposals in the small group.
565.
From previous
discussions, my sense was that further work was required on the threshold issue
of who should trigger remand and the issue of single vs. split adoption and its
consequences on the implementation of findings. This week I suggested that we focus on
clarifying a series of more technical issues on which some progress could be
achieved without prejudice to views on these two conceptual issues :
a. how a request for remand should be formulated;
b. whether the panel's mandate should also include the possibility of
making legal findings or should be limited to making only factual findings; and
whether the remand panel would be able to deal with new factual evidence;
c. what happens in the event that no remand is sought; and
d. the question of multiple remands.
How a request
for remand should be formulated
566.
The G6 was of the
view that the proposal in the Chairman's text,[88]
based on their own proposal, was solid, having been crafted in response to Members'
requests for flexibility. The proposal addressed the formulation of remand at Article
17bis, specifying that the referring
party, without prejudice who that may be, should request remand in writing to
the original panel, notifying the DSB and third parties.
567.
Korea observed
that its proposal did not differ substantially from the G6 proposal: the
Appellate Body would clarify what issues need to be remanded and formulate tentative
conclusions. Either party could then request these issues to be referred to the
original panel for remand. If a party decided to exercise the option of remand,
it should notify the DSB and other parties in writing. Korea also clarified
that the mandate of the remand panel is framed by the Appellate Body's
tentative conclusions and the party's remand request, so that the remand panel
is confined to analysing only those issues identified by the Appellate Body as
needing remand and referred to it by a party.
568.
Clarification was
sought on situations where more than one issue is remanded and whether,
in such situation, two separate remand proceedings were envisaged, or a single
proceeding with multiple remands notified at the same time. In response, Korea stated that if the
claimant requests an issue to be referred to remand and the responding party
also refers another issue to remand, only one remand procedure would take
place, in which both issues would be examined. The G6 agreed with Korea's
understanding that both requests would be folded into a single panel procedure,
although some language may be needed to address the timing of requests.
569.
It was asked
whether the remand panel's mandate would extend to the examination of a
defence that was not considered by the original panel because it had found
no initial violation. In that situation, if the Appellate Body reversed the
panel's finding and remand was required to complete the analysis of the initial
claim, would the remand panel also have the mandate to consider the relevant
defence? In response, both proponents
considered that if the respondent had not raised the defence before the
original panel, it would not be for the remand panel to examine it. However if
the defence had been raised, then they believed that the remand panel should be
authorized to analyse it. It was also
suggested that it would be for the Appellate Body to identify what is to be
remanded and to include the defence in the scope of findings needed to complete
the analysis. In light of this clarification, it was further asked whether the
proponents intended to change the current practice since, as things stand
today, the Appellate Body would only analyse a defence if a breach has been
found. The proponents clarified that the
proposal does not alter the current practice, whereby defences put forward by a
responding party are analysed in original panel proceedings even if they were
not part of the request for the panel's establishment.
570.
Another scenario
was considered, whereby the original panel would exercise judicial economy with
respect to the chapeau of Article XX of the GATT 1994 because it finds that the
requirements of the relevant subparagraphs are not met. In that scenario, would
the respondent be entitled to remand this issue to the panel? The proponents confirmed that, in their view,
this question could be remanded to allow the analysis to be completed.
571.
A further
scenario was identified, whereby the Appellate Body would reverse a panel's
finding that the panel request failed to meet the specificity requirements of
Article 6.2 of the DSU. It was asked
whether the remand panel would be competent to examine the entirety of the
claims not initially ruled on. It was
further asked how the Appellate Body should describe the scope of remand in a
situation where the panel has declined to exercise jurisdiction on certain
claims. The proponents explained that
the proposal relied on the Appellate Body' ability to identify the findings
needed to complete the analysis and enable a party to seek remand on specific
issues. They also suggested that situations in which the panel has declined to
exercise jurisdiction may not be covered by the remand procedure, which was not
a "magic bullet" to solve all problems, but was intended primarily to
deal with factual deficits. A participant noted that it had understood the G6
proposal to be more ambitious and suggested that a remand procedure that was
narrowly limited in scope would fail to meet the objective of facilitating a prompt
resolution of the dispute. It suggested
that the timing implications of remand should be assessed in light of the
overall perspective of settling the dispute: a broader remand would provide
timesavings to the extent that parties would be able to avoid having to launch
a new dispute on issues that would otherwise be in the scope of the remand.[89]
572.
A delegation
raised concerns about the definition of the scope of the remand referral,
noting that in remand proceedings, there is an implicit constraint on what a
party can identify for remand, based on what the Appellate Body has identified.
In this respect, the proposal sets a limitation on what a remand panel is
entitled to examine (in paragraph 3 of Article 17 bis),
but no similar limitation is expressed on what a party can bring before the
remand panel. In this delegation's view, in light of the increasing number of
challenges on the basis of Article 6.2 of the DSU in original panel
proceedings, it was important to anticipate similar challenges on requests for
remand. Korea clarified that it did see
such constraint embedded in paragraphs 2 and 3 of Article 17 bis and that the combination of these provisions is an
attempt to put boundaries to the issues that can be remanded by the
parties. The G6 agreed with Korea that
both provisions create concentric circles: paragraph 3 sets out the theoretical
maximum scope of the panel mandate and paragraph 2 constrains such scope
further; as a result the panel may only examine what is indicated by the
Appellate Body and what the parties have chosen to remand.
573.
It was also
suggested that the use of term "issues" in the G6 text creates
some uncertainty as to the intended scope of the remand panel
proceedings: Article 6.2 of the DSU uses the terms "measures" and
"legal basis", Article 7 uses the term "matter", and the
proposal seems to introduce a new term: "issues". The G-6 confirmed
that this concept was intended as distinct from the concepts of "measures",
"legal basis" or "matter" and that on this aspect, the
proposal deferred to what the Appellate Body would define as the
"issues" that need to be clarified to enable completion of the
analysis.
574.
It was asked what
the form of the referral would be and whether it would be through a
letter addressed to the Chairman of the panel and notified to the DSB. The G6 observed that, notwithstanding further
drafting improvements, on principle it would be satisfied with requesting
parties to send a letter to the Chair of the panel, copied to the DSB and
circulated to the Membership.
575.
A difference was
noted between the two proposals on the timing of the referral: whilst
the G-6 proposal provides that a party shall make referral prior to adoption of
the Appellate Body report, Article 17bis in Korea's
proposal states that the referral takes place "by the time the Appellate
Body specifies". Korea clarified
that this language served to provide a deadline beyond which if no party seeks
remand, the Appellate Body would issue its report according to its scheduled timetable.
It also clarified that the Appellate Body would indicate what issues need to be
remanded in tentative conclusions, which would not be issued in the form of a
report or circulated to the Members. These tentative recommendations would only
be issued to the parties and will identify and describe the issues that need
factual elaboration.
576.
Korea also
confirmed that these tentative recommendations would not be drafted as an
interim report. Therefore, no input is expected from the parties after having
read them. Korea further explained that the timeframe to
request remand would be taken into account in the period for completion of the Appellate
Body's work.
Factual
and legal findings
577. Participants then considered whether the remand panel should be
entitled to address both facts and law or whether its mandate should be limited
to making factual findings, leaving the completion of the analysis to the
Appellate Body.
578.
One delegation
questioned whether it would make sense for the purpose of solving the dispute to
have a purely factual remand and suggested that a remand procedure that could
get to the bottom of the dispute was desirable. In response, Korea stated that
the limitation to factual issues draws on the existing practice of the
Appellate Body, which already completes the analysis, and that the proposal was
intended to facilitate this more systematically. It agreed that remand was conceivable for
both type of issues but it would then be a new proceeding. It was unsure that such a complex procedure
could be completed in 60 days, which is the timeframe envisaged in this
proposal. If the remand procedure
covered legal issues, it could also open the door to multiple remands and
appeals. Korea considered that a balance needed to be found between the
benefits of a holistic approach and the efficient resolution of the dispute.
579.
Some delegations
were sympathetic to the concerns of wanting to expedite the procedure but
considered that there were benefits to having two stages of analysis. It was suggested that if a panel is able to
examine both facts and law, it may have a better sense of what factual findings
are required and this would avoid situations where the panel might provide the
Appellate Body with facts that are not those that it needs to complete the
legal analysis. It was also suggested that there is a rationale for the system
that is currently in place, whereby the panel examines the facts and the law
and the Appellate Body reviews the legal determinations made by the panel. It was suggested that the introduction of
remand should not alter this division of functions which was important in
increasing Members' confidence in the system, and that limiting the panels'
role to fact-finding would diminish the parties' right to obtain two views and
a full review of issues in dispute.
580.
It was questioned
how much time would in fact be saved with the imposition of this limitation to
the remand panel's mandate. Korea suggested that the duration of compliance
proceedings could serve as proxy for an estimation of the time involved. It also noted that factual remand was the
other side of the coin of single adoption of report. It saw the benefits of
full remand proceedings but stressed that they would require more than 60 days.
581.
The proponents clarified
what type of evidence a remand panel could review. The G6 stated that it
saw a similarity between their proposal and Korea's in that both were silent on
the question of new evidence. It explained that the rationale for this was that
this issue will have to be dealt with on a case by case basis. Korea also did not wish to preclude the possibility
of examining new evidence if necessary and relevant to the issues being
remanded. Both proponents wanted to
accord a certain level of discretion to panel to review new evidence if that
was necessary to assist in completing the analysis.
582.
One delegation
recalled that the source of problem addressed with the remand procedure is the
lack of factual findings and it was therefore important to be able to consider
new evidence if that is needed to complete the analysis. It also observed that,
if the complainant remained in control of the issues to be remanded, it would
be in a position to judge whether remand should focus on narrow factual
findings where there is already evidence on the record or whether it wants a
finding on broader issues. It emphasised
it was important not to introduce too many restraints into an instrument that
is to be a tool to solve problems.
What
happens if no remand is sought?
583.
The G6 suggested that the question of what happens if no remand is sought only arises in cases of single
adoption because the clock then starts ticking.
It explained that under the G6 proposal, the timeframes, deadlines and
automaticity of procedure are retained.
Korea explained that under its proposal, if no remand is sought,
completion and circulation of the Appellate Body's report would take place as
scheduled. In this respect it noted the
commonalities of both proposals.
584.
A participant
asked what implications a decision not to pursue remand would have for
subsequent compliance proceedings. The situation considered was of an
implementation measure addressing a finding of inconsistency, where the
complainant argues in compliance proceedings that the measure is inconsistent
with another aspect, that could have been remanded in the original proceedings
but was not. In the view of the G6, this
question related to the jurisdiction of compliance panels, which was not
modified by the remand proposal: if a compliance panel is entitled to look at
this aspect of the measure under the current rules, it would remain so under
the proposal, and if it is not, the proposal would not broaden the scope of the
compliance panel's jurisdiction. One
delegation saw useful guidance on this issue in a case concerning anti-dumping
determinations where the panel and the Appellate Body found in favour of
complainant on one issue, not on the second.
If the measure taken to comply modified the first aspect and not the
second, the respondent could raise this question on the unchanged part of the
measure, to the extent that the measure was a measure taken to comply. In response it was questioned whether the
existence of a remand procedure would not in itself introduce a modification,
such that it may be inappropriate to assume that existing solutions would
continue to apply unchanged if remand were introduced.
585.
I took note of
the useful contributions and proposed to resume the discussion of remand in our
next meeting. Overall, my sense was that
the discussion revealed that the two proposals converge on a number of practical
aspects, such as the form or the timing for requesting remand. The discussion
also reflected a common understanding of the allocation of roles between the
Appellate Body and the parties in the process of referral and the scope of the
remand panel's mandate. Under both approaches, the remand panel's mandate is
the result of the Appellate Body identifying the issues that need to be
clarified in order to complete the analysis and the parties choosing which of
these identified issues are ultimately remanded.
586.
Without prejudice
to the proponents' respective positions as to which party should trigger
remand, it appears that both proposals also concur on the possibility of
remanding both breaches and defences, and on the possibility for the remand
panel to analyse untested defences so long as they were raised in the original
panel proceedings. Both proponents also coincide in their assessment that the
purpose of a remand procedure is primarily to solve issues of factual
deficiency, and that new evidence could be examined by the remand panel where
relevant.
587.
It was less
clear, however, to what extent the proponents intended situations in which the
panel had declined to exercise jurisdiction to be covered by the remand
procedure (for example in the event of claims not having been examined at all
by the original panel, on the basis of an initial finding under Article 6.2 of
the DSU).
588.
The discussion
also suggested that a number of participants favoured a broad remand procedure,
covering also issues of law. This was
deemed to better contribute to the prompt resolution of the dispute and to
preserve the rights of parties to a double review of legal issues. Korea
remained concerned that such a procedure could not take place within a 60
day-deadline but recognized that both types of remand, factual and legal, could
be envisaged.
Flexibility and Member-control
589.
This week, we
also completed a discussion of the proposals on Flexibility and Member-control
in the G40.
590.
Discussions first
addressed the draft parameters on the use of public international law in WTO
dispute settlement.[90] The US indicated that it had continued to
talk to delegations since the small group meetings and confirmed its readiness
to discuss this further with interested delegations in light of the interest
previously expressed in a more principled-based approach. The US explained that the basic idea in these
draft parameters is to address the relation of WTO dispute settlement to public
international law, which has arisen in a number of cases but not yet received a
clear answer.
591.
The US recalled
that WTO dispute settlement is designed to apply the WTO covered agreements,
and not other international law. Hence,
WTO adjudicators are not called upon to apply or
enforce other rules of public international law. It clarified that where the WTO covered
agreements themselves referred to or incorporated provisions of other
agreements (such as in the TRIPS Agreement), these would become relevant by
virtue of this incorporation.
592.
This was a
distinct question, the US explained, from the possible role of public
international law in the interpretation
of the WTO covered agreements. In this
respect, Article 3.2 of the DSU foresees a role for public international law,
in that it refers to the customary rules of interpretation of public
international law. It has been
understood that the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties (VCLT), in
particular Articles 31 to 33, contains such rules. Article 31, the US explained, refers to
"relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations between
the parties"[91]
as an aspect to be taken into account in interpreting treaty terms. This raised the question of what this notion
encompasses.
593.
The US observed
that references have sometimes also been made to other sources of international
law without it being clear what their role might be. For instance, the ILC commentaries refer to
certain maxims and other principles that are not codified in Articles 31 to 33
of the VCLT. Discussion has also arisen,
the US explained, about references made by adjudicators to the procedures of
other tribunals. This in the US view, is
not an "application" of public international law but rather involves
the adjudicator logically drawing from the experience of other adjudicators to
develop its own approach to procedural issues.
The overall purpose of the guidance was for the Membership to provide
greater clarity as to how it expected adjudicators to address these issues,
rather than leave them guessing the extent to which public international law
may be relevant to their task.
594.
In the discussion
that followed, delegations sought further clarification of the problem being
addressed through the proposal. Some
delegations questioned the need to provide guidance through a DSB decision, which
may unduly freeze the issues. In
particular, what constitutes customary law was a matter that is by nature
evolutionary. Concern was also expressed
that an attempt to codify generally uncontroversial notions may introduce
unwanted ambiguities or rigidities. It
was suggested that incremental development through successive cases may be more
suited to developing adequate solutions and that resolving some of these
delicate issues through general guidance may be overly ambitious. It was also suggested that caution should be
exercised in seeking to limit the use of public international law by
adjudicators. The US explained that a
purpose of providing the guidance through a DSB decision was to allow
flexibility for future evolutions. In
response it was questioned whether such a decision, which may not be easy to
modify, would really be flexible.
595.
There was also a
detailed discussion of the notion of "other rules of international law
applicable between the parties" in Article 31.3(c) of the VCLT. In this context, the US explained that its
proposal was to clarify that, for the purposes of interpreting the WTO
Agreement, the expression "applicable in the relations between the
parties" refers to all WTO Members (i.e. the parties to the WTO agreement)
and not just the parties to the dispute.
Other rules of international law applicable between a limited number of
WTO Members only would therefore not be considered to be "applicable in
the relations between the parties" within the meaning of Article
31.3(c). This would ensure that the
interpretation of provisions in the WTO covered agreements would not differ
depending on who the parties involved in the dispute are, and that WTO Members
who have not agreed to be bound by certain other rules under international law would
not see their WTO obligations affected by such rules.
596.
Rules arising
from an RTA were cited as an illustration of a type of "rules of
international law" that may be applicable between the parties to the
dispute but would not qualify as meeting the requirements to be taken into
account in the interpretation of WTO covered agreements under Article 31.3(c). It was noted that this was a distinct
question from whether Article XXIV of the GATT 1994 might be invoked in
justifying the WTO-consistency of measures taken in the context of an RTA.
597.
It was also
clarified that the interpretation rules contained in Articles 31 to 33 of the
VCLT apply to WTO dispute settlement not as treaty text meeting the
requirements of Article 31.3(c) but because, as elaborated in early cases and
since then, they have been acknowledged to constitute "customary rules of
interpretation of public international law" within the meaning of Article
3.2 of the DSU.
598.
The US also
sought the views of other participants on whether any evolution had, in their
view, taken place since the VCLT that would suggest a need to update the
reference, and on whether provisions other than Articles 31 to 33 of the VCLT
(such as Article 28 on non-retroactivity of treaties) also reflected customary
rules of interpretation. One participant
suggested in response that Article 28 appeared to set out a principle of
international law of a substantive rather than interpretative nature.
599.
It was questioned
whether the reference in the proposal to an ILC commentary explaining that
certain maxims and general principles were not included in the codification of
Articles 31 to 33 might be confusing. It
was observed that in the quoted passage, the ILC suggests a broad degree of
discretion for the adjudicator to use such maxims and principles, which seems
at odds with the US intention of delineating limited uses of international law
by WTO adjudicators. The US considered
that the cited passage suggests a two-fold message: first, that such maxims are
not part of customary rules, so that they are not required to be followed and
secondly, that it remains possible to apply them out of common sense. The US
was ready to review this part of the text in this light, but considered that
the key question remained what guidance members wished to provide in respect of
such issues.
600.
In closing this
discussion, I noted that these were important issues and encouraged
participants to pursue further discussions to clarify their intentions in this
respect.
601.
The discussion
then turned to the proposal on panelist expertise in Article 8.2, on the
basis of the text previously considered in the small group.[92]
602.
Several
participants confirmed that they had no difficulty with the objective of this
proposal. It was also observed that this
objective was fully complementary with the separate "panel
composition" proposal.
603.
Some
clarification was sought as to how the requirement of "specific expertise
in the kind of matter at issue" was intended to operate in combination
with the seemingly more general concepts of wide spectrum of experience and
diverse background. In response it was
clarified that the intention was to ensure that among the panelists, but not
necessarily in each individual panelist, specific expertise relevant to the
case at hand would be found. As to what
such expertise might consist of, this would be informed by the preferences
expressed by the parties in each case.
604.
One delegation
agreed that panelists should be well-qualified but had reservations on the
added value of this text. It considered that broad knowledge of WTO issues
could be useful, especially in cases involving more than one covered
agreement. In response, it was noted
that the text did not seek to modify the requirements outlined in Article 8.1,
which related to the qualifications expected of panelists generally. It was also observed that the language of the
proposed Article 8.2 was drafted in hortatory terms ("should"), allowing
for a margin of flexibility in its application.
605.
I took note of
the fact that a number of delegations see merit in this proposal, and also
noted the doubts of one delegation as to its benefits. I encouraged the proponent to meet with that
delegation to discuss this further.
606.
In conclusion, I
noted that we had completed our discussion of these proposals, but much work
remains to be done. I encouraged the
proponents and other interested delegations to continue to work together on
these issues.
Developing country interests
607.
On developing
country interests, we returned to the concept non-paper presented by the Africa
Group, Cuba, Ecuador, India and Pakistan in May.
608.
The proponents
confirmed that they were continuing to work towards draft legal text reflecting
the ideas contained in this paper. They
explained that the non-paper, combining several earlier proposals and bringing
together complex topics, was intended to make Members aware of what was being
worked on and gather their views.
609.
I encouraged
participants to provide as much guidance as possible to the proponents
concerning their level of comfort in respect of the various possible solutions
identified in the non-paper and on the parameters that would make it easier or
more difficult to support specific proposals, encouraging them to engage in a
frank and constructive exchange.
610.
Some participants
welcomed the suggestion by the proponents that draft legal text be put forward
issue-by-issue to the extent possible, if this allowed the discussion to become
text-based as soon as possible. It was noted in this respect that comments at
this stage could only be preliminary, though it was also observed that the
existing Chairman's text already provided some basis for a text-based
discussion. The proponents committed to
expediting the drafting process in order to present some draft legal text by
the next meetings.
611.
This week, we
considered the first three topics addressed in the non-paper: (i) adequate
timeframes to address the specific needs of developing countries; (ii)
adjusting the remedies available in order to induce effective compliance; and
(iii) mitigating the cost of litigation in dispute settlement procedures.
Timeframes
612.
The non-paper
proposes adjustments to various stages of the proceedings to accommodate the
specific needs of developing countries, including a longer consultation period,
adequate time for the preparation of submissions to panels and a longer RPT for
implementation.
613.
Some delegations
noted that recent experience showed an increasing number of developing
countries actively involved in disputes and well integrated, which suggested
that Members had been able to work under DSU timeframes.
614.
A participant
noted that an assumption on which the proposal seemed to be based was the
existing financial and human resources constraints. However, the longer the
process, the more costly it will become.
The proponents responded that there was no assumption that lengthening
timeframes would reduce costs. However, human resources constraints implied
that a developing country would have to either ask for more time to prepare or
appear before the adjudicator unprepared.
615.
The proponent of
the separate proposal on time-savings observed that a quicker process generally
appeared to serve the goal of a prompt resolution of disputes. It enquired
whether the proposal to extend timeframes would apply to all developing
countries or whether it was envisaged to target specific subcategories such as
LDCs or SVEs or according to other criteria which would reflect specific
problems of access.
616.
Other
participants also asked whether the extended timeframes would apply to all
developing countries, regardless of whether they are complainant or respondent
in a case and regardless of the development status of the other party. Some delegations expressed concerns, should
the extension of timeframes for developing countries apply only in disputes
between developing and developed Member countries. This would raise, in their view, due process
issues and would also undermine the basis of the request as grounded in the
beneficiaries' development needs. For
this reason, one participant urged the proponents not to limit their proposal
to situations in which the other party is a developed Member. A delegation noted that, as a developing
country, 90% of the disputes in which it had been involved concerned another
developing country and asked the proponents to clarify paragraph 4 of the
non-paper, which stated that adjustments shall be made "at the request of
the developing country respondent".
617.
In response, the
proponents observed that these questions and concerns had already arisen in the
context of earlier discussions on the nature of special and differential
treatment provisions. Bearing in mind that, ideally, it would be better for the
proposal to benefit all developing countries, the scope of coverage of each
proposal would be considered individually.
In principle, given that the intent of the proposal is to address
asymmetries between developed and developing countries, the proponents
considered that if the dispute involved two developing countries, normal
timeframes would apply and there would be no extension. However, they also
stated that as far as the respondent's first written submission was concerned,
the respondent deserved more time, regardless of the development status of the
complainant. The proponents committed to looking into the scope of each
proposal. As for the inter-linkages with the time-saving proposal, the
proponents offered to meet with the proponent of that proposal at the drafting
stage.
618.
A delegation
voiced concerns about trying to introduce new categories of Members. It
emphasized the many difficulties developing country face in meeting the DSU
deadlines (such as mobilizing resources, drafting documents in English,
logistical arrangements), regardless of their size. It stated that these
problems needed to be addressed, instead of re-categorizing Members on the
basis of criteria such as size, territory, population or growth, which would be
very sensitive.
619.
With respect to
the timeframe for consultations, the proponents noted that procedures under the
DSU were premised on the presumption of good faith by Members. In light of such
presumption, the proponents believed that giving Members more time before
establishing a panel would contribute to solving disputes prior the
establishment of a panel and avoid the dispute moving to a further stage.
620.
Several
delegations raised questions and concerns with respect to lengthening
consultations. A first question that arose was what was the exact time period
that was to be extended and whether the proposed extension of the timeframe of
consultations related to existing 60-day and 30-day periods, or whether it
related to the timeframe proposals reflected in the Chairman's text. Other
delegations expressed concerns that it may lengthen the process as a whole and
preclude a prompt resolution of the dispute.
Other delegations questioned the need for explicitly introducing such
adjustment since in practice, consultations extend beyond the 60 day-period
when there is a genuine interest in solving the dispute. They pointed out that the DSU already
includes the possibility of lengthening the consultations timeframe by
agreement between the parties.
621.
One participant
stressed that any changes introduced should be workable and was not persuaded
that this would be the case for this part of the proposal.
622.
The proponents
explained that the aim of this proposal was to make the best use of the time
allocated in the process and provide an opportunity to developing countries who
truly wish to avoid a dispute to do so. The proponents emphasized the various
internal coordination problems developing countries face, such as hiring
lawyers or making logistical arrangements to attend consultations, which in
their view justify a longer consultation period. As for the exact period in the
consultations the proposal sought to extend, the proponents stated that they
were still at the drafting stage on this aspect, but a 30-day timeline to hold
consultations was without doubt too short, although ideally, overall timeframes
needed to be extended as well.
623.
As far as the
timeframe for the respondent's first written submission is concerned, the
proponents explained that it was generally admitted that complainants currently
have the benefit of time on their side. They felt that the respondent,
especially a developing country, may not be able to present its views properly
in the short timeframe allocated for the first written submission.
624.
Questions were
raised again concerning the exact time-period that proponents wished to extend
and whether the proposed extension took as a basis the Chairman's text. It was
noted that the Chairman's text already contained a provision directing the
panel to grant such extensions,[93]
and that a workable mechanism could be envisaged, to have panels ruling on such
extensions.
625.
One delegation
raised due process concerns with respect to having two distinct deadlines, one
for developed country Members and an extended one for a developing country
Member. The proponents replied that
Appendix 3 of the DSU already embodies two different deadlines for the
complainant and respondent's first written submissions.
626.
Finally,
concerning the length of the RPT, a participant noted that the current rule was
to determine the shortest time period possible, and asked how the proposal
would relate to the existing guideline for arbitrators. The proponents noted
that as things stand, 15 months was the guideline and they would consider how
to phrase the draft text and whether it should identify 15 months as a
minimum. Another delegation noted that
there was already language in the Chairman's text[94] which would direct panels to take into
account the developing country status of the implementing Member, which would
ensure the proposal's workability. It also noted that in the current practice,
arbitrators tend to recognize that developing countries may face particular
difficulties in implementing rulings.
Inducing effective compliance
627.
The proposal
seeks to level the playing field between developing and developed country
Members, in the absence of effective compliance by a developed country, in the
following ways:
·
The calculations of the level of nullification or impairment of benefits
would include the impact of the measure on the economy of the affected
developing country Member;
·
A developing country Member seeking to retaliate may cross-retaliate
without resorting to procedures set out in Article 22.3 of the DSU;
·
If compliance is not achieved, collective enforcement by other Members
would be allowed,
·
If there is still no compliance, administrative sanctions would apply against
the Member concerned.
628.
The proponents
indicated that, as noted by past panels, the obligation to bring measures into
conformity is a fundamental element of the system and a basic element in the
DSU. All players at all times should respect all their obligations. In their
view, prolonging non-compliance can inflict huge damages on developing
countries and can unravel important segments of their economies. The proposal
therefore provides tools to effectively induce compliance.
629.
Participants
asked whether and, if so, why the proposals would not apply when the other
party is a developing country. It was
observed that inducing compliance was a very important element for the overall
effectiveness of the dispute settlement system.
This was as fundamental for developing country Members as it was for
developed country Members and disputes between developed countries were
sometimes not complied with either. Some
delegations noted that the development status of countries is not the only
reason for which compliance was sometimes not achieved and that the problems
relate more to imbalances in economic powers or domestic implementation
difficulties. The proponents considered
that despite the overall good record of compliance there were still pending
cases which showed that the system is ineffective for some Members. This needed to be addressed to make it
effective for all Members.
630.
One delegation
agreed with the statement in the non-paper that "prompt implementation of
the rulings and recommendations of the DSB is essential to ensure the proper
functioning and credibility of the dispute settlement system." However, it
could not reconcile this principle with the proposal to extend the
implementation period.
631.
A clarification
was sought on the second sentence of paragraph 6 of the proposal ("(…) on
the basis of the level of nullification or impairment of benefits, including
the impact of the measure on the economy of that developing country"),
noting that, under current rules, the suspension of concessions is based on the
nullification or impairment caused by the inconsistent measure. It asked whether the proposal sought to
impose suspensions that would exceed the impact of the inconsistent measure and
asked them to clarify how the proposal was related to the notion of "equivalence". The proponents noted that Article 21.8 of the
DSU already required the DSB to consider the impact of the measures on the
economy of the developing country Member concerned and that the proposal intended
to give meaning to this provision.
632.
One delegation
noted that the proposal on cross-retaliation would be the easiest aspect to put
in place in terms of workability, since the current system already recognized
cross-retaliation.
633.
Several
delegations enquired about the concrete mechanisms by which collective
retaliation would be put in place. One delegation alluded to the concept of
auctioning retaliation rights. A delegation stated that collective retaliation
would fail the test of workability and that it could not envisage a workable
system in which a partner would retaliate on behalf of another Member. One delegation expressed concerns with the
use of the term "enforcement".
634.
The proponents
replied that a simple mechanism of collective retaliation could be envisaged,
under which a Member could look for a partner to retaliate in situations where
cannot do it. They welcomed any ideas
delegations may have on how to create an effective mechanism of collective
retaliation.
635.
Several
delegations enquired about the notion of "administrative sanctions". The
proponents referred in response to the administrative measures already foreseen
in the WTO Agreement when Members fail to promptly provide their contribution
to the WTO budget.
636.
A delegation
noted that with the imposition of administrative sanctions, the situation would
move from a two-party situation to an organization-wide situation. It
questioned who would decide that there is absence of compliance and who would
take the decision of imposing administrative sanctions. Should it be the DSB,
it noted that according to the current rules, this should be done by
consensus. It wondered whether this
aspect of the proposal would also imply a need to amend the Marrakesh Agreement
and questioned whether such amendment formed part of the current mandate to
review the DSU.
637.
It was also
observed that the non-paper highlighted difficulties developing country Members
have in exercising their retaliatory rights, and yet, the proposal aimed at
increasing such retaliatory rights. It was suggested that if developing countries
already face particular challenges in implementing retaliatory rights,
providing them with increased rights was not likely to induce compliance, if
the problem of exercising those rights remains.
638.
A delegation
suggested that compensation be explored as an alternative means to induce
compliance, by strengthening Article 22.1 of the DSU. It was noted that the main problem under the
current system was that compensation was voluntary and that implementing
Members do not offer compensation. On the contrary they rely on the fact that
the other party will not enforce its retaliation rights. The proponents took
note of this suggestion and said they would be looking into strengthening
compensation. They also welcomed any
other suggestion delegations may have to induce prompt compliance.
Mitigating the costs of
litigation
639.
The proponents
seek to establish rules concerning the allocation of litigations costs, in
particular for small developing countries and least-developed countries. In particular, they contemplate (i) the
creation of a special fund to cover litigation costs for developing countries
and (ii) setting out specific rules for the allocation of litigation costs
between the parties to the dispute.
Litigation costs would be borne by the party who brings an
unsubstantiated complaint or that imposes a WTO-inconsistent measure, as
determined by a panel and/or the Appellate Body.
640.
The proponents
explained that the non-paper combined two earlier proposals, the idea being
that the WTO would house a fund to finance lawyers' fees in disputes between
developing and developed country Members, covering the costs for developing
country. The fees of the Advisory Centre on WTO Law (ACWL) would be used as a
basis for this.[95]
The proponents explained that, whilst the ACWL contribution to developing
countries' access to the dispute settlement system is very important, it is
still insufficient to provide access to all developing countries. The
proponents explained that they had received a number of questions in bilateral
meetings, such as who would pay the fund, where the budget would come from,
what the timing of the contributions would be, or how many times countries
could access it. They intended to present a comprehensive matrix on these
aspects. With respect to the allocation
of litigation costs between the parties, the proponents mentioned that one
Member had expressed concerns about these costs being punitive, and noted that
such allocation of costs is in place in a number of national jurisdictions as
an administrative aspect of disputes.
641.
Delegations asked
what should be understood by "litigation costs" and whether all
phases of the proceedings would be covered.
The proponents confirmed that in principle none of the dispute
settlement stages would be excluded from this notion.
642.
Several
participants asked for clarification of the concept of "unsubstantiated
claims". Concern was expressed that
a single unsubstantiated claim could determine who pays the costs of the entire
process. The proponents clarified that the term used was "unsubstantiated
complaint", precisely to avoid debates on the number of claims that would
need to be successful, and that it would be left to the adjudicator to make
this determination. Some delegations
stressed the definitional challenges and noted that in most cases it is
difficult to determine who has lost or won a case.
643.
Some delegations
drew a parallel with the notion of "frivolous claims" in investment
cases, and cited NAFTA Chapter 11 dispute resolution as an example, noting that
despite litigation costs being regulated they were not allocated in all
cases. Proponents took note of these
comments and stated that they would look into other dispute resolution
mechanisms as guidance for drafting their proposal.
644.
Some delegations
expressed concerns about the use and abuse of litigation costs, which could
have a deterrent effect on legitimate disputes or create an incentive to bring
disputes that would not have been brought otherwise. Whilst considering that
the financial costs for using the WTO dispute settlement system was a
legitimate concern, they remained cautious on the manner in which it should be
addressed. In that respect they
expressed a preference for the fund as opposed to litigation costs.
645.
A delegation
questioned whether conferring on panels and the Appellate Body the authority to
allocate litigation costs would change the nature of the dispute settlement
system. It noted that the allocation of costs is a very different issue from
that of WTO-law consistency. In addition, it noted that reports only acquire a
binding force after they are adopted by the DSB and therefore questioned
whether the allocation of costs prior to DSB endorsement of the existence of an
inconsistency would raise an issue. The proponents contended that under the
current rules, arbitrators already make a determination of costs when dealing
with proceedings under Article 22.6 of the DSU and that the proposal would only
be introducing other aspects.
646.
A delegation
enquired about the relationship between the fund and litigation costs. The proponents clarified that litigation
costs would only be allocated in the event the fund is exhausted. They also
explained that the fund was not only the first step but also the preferred
option, insofar as it was perceived as more neutral and had not been criticized
by delegations as punitive.
647.
Other delegations
raised practical operational questions such as when the payments would take
place and questioned whether the fund would ever be exhausted, if the provision
foresees refund in case of unsubstantiated complaints. One delegation raised
concerns about using ACWL fees as a benchmark, considering that those were too
high, and suggested that recourse to the ACWL was hindered where conflicts of
interests arose.
648.
The proponents
committed to revert to the questions raised at the next meeting.
Strictly confidential information (SCI)
649.
We continued and
completed a discussion of the proposal on SCI, based on Canada's revised text
of May.
650.
With respect to
the proposed Decision by the DSB, Canada explained that the objective was to
allow Members, including those who may not have been parties to previous
proceedings involving BCI procedures, to have access to the range of procedures
adopted to date. This would allow them
to draw from this experience in the development of specific procedures in
future cases. It would still remain for
each panel to decide on the working procedures to adopt for the purposes of a
given case. In response to a question,
Canada observed that this was a matter of transparency on institutional
arrangements for the benefit of Members, distinct from the transparency issues
raised under separate proposals.
651.
A number of
delegations expressed support for the proposed decision, and sought
clarifications on its operation. Canada explained that the document referred to
in the decision would contain BCI procedures adopted by past panels and
attached to their reports, as available as of the time of the DSB
decision. With respect to subsequent
proceedings, the decision would contain an instruction, going forward, for the
Secretariat to make available SCI working procedures adopted by adjudicators,
upon completion of the relevant proceedings.
The proposal referred to availability of these procedures on the WTO
website as the most convenient way to access such information, but this did not
prejudge exactly how this should be done.
For example, documents containing these procedures could be circulated
and then accessed through a dedicated page on the website.
652.
A clarification
was sought as to whether Annex V procedures under the SCM Agreement were
intended to be covered also. The
proponent suggested that resolution of that question may follow from resolution
of the relationship of BCI to annex V proceedings in the rest of the text.
653.
Discussions then
focused on other aspects of the text not fully addressed in earlier
discussions. There was a discussion in
particular of the two square bracketed options under Article 18.5,
expressing the scope and duration of the protection to be granted to SCI. Canada recalled that the second option had
been introduced in light of comments and suggestions received in earlier
discussions, to address concerns arising from the original formulation. Under the first option, a mechanism for
withdrawal of the designation was foreseen, and the approach was based on the
duration of protection. This had been
noted to raise some practical questions as to how and when such withdrawal
would take place. Under the alternative
approach (second square bracketed text), the duration of protection was not
directly addressed and no mechanism was required to implement it. Under this approach, protection continued to
exist beyond the duration of proceedings, and the information could be used
only for the purposes of the dispute. In
this respect, it may be a preferable approach.
This approach also avoided discussion arising as to whether an SCI
designation confirmed by a panel would be binding on the parties and would
prevent a subsequent unilateral withdrawal of the designation.
654.
There was some
discussion of how information that is withdrawn from the proceedings as a
result of a successful challenge would be treated. Specifically, it was questioned what the
difference was between the treatment of such withdrawn information and
information protected as SCI, if in both cases parties were precluded from
using it. In response, it was explained
that the two types of information received fundamentally different treatment within
the proceedings: withdrawn information
would no longer be part of the record and could therefore not be used in the
proceedings, while SCI would be fully within the proceedings. With respect to restrictions on the use of
withdrawn information outside the context of the proceedings, it was asked whether
the text precluded the use of such information even in situations where the
panel might have determined that the information did not warrant protection
because it was in the public domain, and whether the restrictions on use of
such information were in fact stricter than those imposed under Article 18.5
for information protected as SCI. It was
clarified that the intention was that withdrawn information could not be used
to the extent that it had been obtained through the proceedings, but this would
not preclude its use on other bases if it was otherwise known.
655.
In this context,
it was also highlighted that it was very important for holders of sensitive
information to have a clear assurance that, if SCI status is denied in the
proceedings, any information submitted could safely be withdrawn without being
disclosed. It was also suggested that, in any event, information that had been
made available in the proceedings, whether ultimately determined to be SCI or
not, would normally constitute confidential information under Article 18.2. Hence, its disclosure was also precluded on
that basis.
656.
Some discussion
followed on situations in which information that should have remained secret
may nonetheless have come to public attention though inappropriate acts of
disclosure, and how this should be treated. In this respect, a participant
observed that it may not be relevant how the information came to be in the
public domain, if that was the outcome.
657.
In response to a
request, Canada confirmed that it would be possible, under the proposal, for
parties to agree to allow information that did not meet the definition to be
protected, in that the designation would only be reviewed if challenged. It believed that this was unlikely and that
the challenge mechanism would provide checks and balances in this respect. This was part of the overall balance of
interests reflected in the procedure: the panel was bound to adopt procedures
if requested, but it retained control over the contents of the procedures to be
adopted, other that the elements in Appendix V.
The parties then controlled the designation of information as SCI in the
absence of a challenge.
658.
Concern was
raised that in a situation where information submitted by another party was
alleged to be SCI, it would be difficult to recall the information if it had
already been widely disseminated. It was
suggested that such adverse impact could be minimized if it were made clear
that in the event of such situation, the information should be treated as SCI
pending the completion of the panel's assessment of its designation. Canada considered that such risk existed and
was difficult to avert, but that the type of preventive measure suggested could
perhaps be taken by a panel without this needing to be expressed in the text.
659.
Concern was also
reiterated on the notion of "exceptional circumstances" in paragraph
2 of Appendix V. Canada confirmed that
it was not intending to introduce a test to be applied by a panel, but rather
an encouragement to use the procedures rarely.
It was suggested that this might be expressed differently, for example
referring to resorting to the procedures "only when necessary".
660.
In response to a
question, Canada also explained that it saw no contradiction between the
protection of SCI and the confidentiality of information under Article
18.2. The proposal would introduce an
additional level of protection for some information, but the confidentiality of
all information under Article 18.2 would remain.
661.
In concluding
this discussion, I noted that it would be important to continue to work at the
technical level towards clean draft legal text at least on those aspects where
there is basic agreement on the concepts. I suggested that at this point, based
on discussions to date, that included at least the following aspects:
·
that WTO
adjudicators would be required to adopt SCI procedures if requested by a party;
·
that a third
party may also request the adoption of SCI procedures but this is not a right;
·
that whatever
level of protection is provided at one stage of the proceedings should be
carried over into the next phases if requested; and
·
that a procedure
should be available, under which the adjudicator could ascertain whether the
information for which protection is sought merits such protection.
Stock-taking
662.
In the G40, the
proponents of third party rights reported that they were continuing discussions
among themselves and remained available for further discussion as
necessary.
663.
The proponents of
remand also indicated that they had had constructive meetings together and were
collaborating towards perhaps presenting a single document showing areas of
convergence and divergence to facilitate further discussion.
664.
I encouraged
proponents of issues in respect of which the work has not yet been completed to
make every effort to be ready for the next set of meetings, for completion of
this phase of the work.
10. Week
of 16 July 2012[96]
665.
This week, I held
consultations on timeframes, including developing country aspects. We also briefly took stock of on-going work
on other issues.
Developing country interests/Timeframes
666. This week, proponents of "developing country interests"[97]
submitted draft legal
text on the first issue addressed in the concept paper presented in May,[98]
i.e. timeframes.
667. During last month's discussions, it
was noted that there was a linkage between this and the separate Australian
proposals on time-savings. For that reason, we considered both sets
of proposals together, seeking to identify points of potential convergence and
divergence between them and to discuss inter-related aspects of both proposals.
668. In light of the fact that the two
sets of proposals do not cover exactly the same stages of the proceedings, we
proceeded on the basis of the chronological order of proceedings under the DSU.
I also invited delegations to raise and
discuss potential linkages with other proposals that may have timeframe
implications.
669. As background to the discussion,
information was made available to participants on experience to date with
respect to timelines under the DSU.[99]
Consultations
670. The legal text presented by
proponents of developing country interests addresses different aspects of
consultations, under Articles 4.10 and 12.10.
In introducing
the text, the proponents explained that earlier discussions of the concept
paper had been very productive in providing them with ideas for the present
text and that they had also had useful consultations with Australia to examine
commonalities and differences between their respective proposals.
671. We first considered the joint
proponents' proposed amendment to Article 4.10 of the DSU, on developing country interests
in consultations. They explained that many in the
group felt that this provision, as currently drafted, is not specific
enough. The proposal therefore seeks to
clarify the content of the obligations as well as who bears the burden of
it. They propose to add to the text two
concrete examples of obligations that clarify the scope of the general
obligation: (a) in disputes brought between developing and developed countries,
the venue of consultations should be the choice of the developing country
Member; and (b), to address capacity constraints of developing countries,
developed countries should submit all questions in writing 15 days in advance to
allow an adequate preparation of the consultations.
672. Participants thanked the proponents
for putting forward specific draft text. A number of delegations expressed sympathy for
the concerns underlying the proposal.
Several participants sought clarification of the scope of the
obligations in relation to the development status of the parties. The proponents clarified that the provision
was specific to consultations held between developing and developed countries
and would not apply to consultations held between developing countries. They
also clarified that subparagraph a) was limited in scope to consultations held
between developed and developing countries, but regardless of whether the
developing country is acting as complainant or as respondent, while
subparagraph b) would be limited to consultations involving a measure taken by a developing country Member.
673. With respect to the draft chapeau of Article 4.10,
several delegations expressed concerns about the use of the verb
"shall", which reflects a hard
obligation, combined with the expression "inter alia",
which suggests an obligation of an open nature. They also enquired about the
appropriateness of using "shall" in a "best endeavors"
obligation phrased in terms of "giving special attention". It was
also asked what rights could be covered under the expression "inter alia", beyond those specifically identified.
674. One delegation noted that the chapeau seemed to set a general requirement to give special
attention, which seems to be an obligation of behavior not requiring any particular
results. In contrast, subparagraphs a) and b) require specific actions or
consequences. Overall, in that
delegation's view, the term "special attention" did not seem to be
defined contextually by a) and b) and these subparagraphs seem to go beyond
granting special attention. It suggested
that the text of the generic requirement to give special attention and the
specific obligations be separated.
Another participant suggested using the expression "these
obligations shall include but not be limited to…" in replacement of "inter alia".
675. The proponents took note of
delegations' concerns with respect to the use of the prescriptive language
"shall" together with the term "inter alia". They explained that their proposal was
intended to address the lack of specificity of Article 4.10 and to provide
meaning to the obligations it embodies.
The use of "inter alia"
is intended to ensure that issues specifically identified as important to
developing countries are captured by the scope of this provision. The
proponents clarified that the idea was not to broaden inappropriately the scope
of this provision. They were prepared to
review the proposed language in this light.
676. One delegation underlined the
importance of being able to measure and assess the fulfillment of obligations,
where the verb "shall" is used, as opposed to "should". It
cautioned against the use of prescriptive language that would create
distinctions that are difficult to adjudicate.
The co-proponents recalled that differential treatment for developing
countries is recognized in existing WTO covered agreements and ministerial
declarations, including the DSU, and that these rights, which are granted on
the basis of the existence of asymmetries between Members, should not be called
into question. The proponents also
cautioned against a text filled with empty "shoulds" as basis for special
and differential treatment.
677. Other participants suggested that
the discussion should focus on how to operationalize specific provisions, so as
to move constructively and find possible ways to get around polarized
issues. I noted that special and
differential treatment discussions have never been easy, because of the
existence of definitional issues.
However, the objective was to improve the relevant provisions with a
view to strengthening them and making them more precise where possible and the
discussion should try to focus on the merits of each proposal rather than
questions of principle.
678. A participant acknowledged the
importance of special and differential treatment and supported it but observed
that, based on the discussion, it seemed that proposals were likely to face
more resistance when giving a right to a party would at the same time withdraw
rights of the other party. In its view,
the key laid in enhancing developing countries' rights without undermining the
position of other Members. There was
also a need for pragmatic ways to operationalize special and differential
treatment without eroding well-established and successful practices. Another
delegation emphasized the importance of focusing on the specific challenges
developing countries are facing in the use of the dispute settlement
procedures.
679. In relation to subparagraph a)
and the choice of venue for holding consultations, several delegations
requested the proponents to clarify the meaning of the term "venue"
and whether it means the particular city in which the meeting takes place or
the actual room and conditions in which the meeting will take place, in which
case this could lead to sweeping results. The proponents clarified that venue
in this context meant the city or place and proposed to clarify this if
necessary.
680. The proponents also recalled that
subparagraph a) was limited in scope to consultations held between developed
and developing countries; however, the choice of venue would be in the hands of
the developing country Member, regardless of whether it is acting as a
complainant or as a respondent.
681. A delegation noted that the DSU
currently contains no rule on the determination of the venue and that providing
such a rule would be useful to ease possible tension amongst consulting
parties. Several delegations
acknowledged the specific financial constraints of developing countries, but
also stated that regardless of financial resources, it is often difficult to
have all members of delegations in a single venue. For this reason, in their opinion, it would
be more convenient to leave the choice of the venue to a case-by-case
determination so as to provide discretion and flexibility to the parties. They
suggested that some language could be included to require developed countries
to take into consideration, in the determination of the venue, special problems
of the developing country Member.
682. Several participants considered that
the choice of venue was a problem particularly for developing countries that
lack financial resources to fly members of their delegations to Geneva. They
also noted that the determination of the venue is often a source of tension
between the parties. They expressed sympathy for any proposal that tries to
overcome challenges the dispute settlement process imposes on developing
countries and saw merit in a provision that would make the choice of venue depend on the developing country
Member. One delegation suggested that
the proposal could envisage financial contributions to allow developing
countries to reach the consultations venue agreed by the parties.
683. Some delegations expressed
reservations on the repercussions such provision could have on third party
participation. They noted that if
the chosen venue was the capital of the developing country Member, it was
likely that most Members having expressed interest in being joined in the
consultations would not be able to participate effectively due to their own
financial constraints. It was suggested
that Geneva is often chosen as the fallback option in order to facilitate third
party participation to the consultations.
Another delegation disagreed, noting that in its experience as a
developing country and third party, the most valuable third party participation
was in subsequent stages of the proceedings.
It also suggested that there were other possibilities to allow
participation of third parties when the chosen venue is not Geneva, for
instance by allowing the presence of local diplomatic representatives of the
third party in question. In response it
was questioned, however, whether this would allow an efficient participation of
third parties.
684. The proponents noted that third
party participation was a valid concern but that their proposal only aimed to
address the problems of developing countries involved in consultations as
parties, and did not aim to tackle third party participation issues. Existing
obstacles to third party participation under the current DSU would remain but
their proposal did not exacerbate them.
685. Subparagraph b of the proposal foresees that, in
consultations involving a measure taken by a developing country Member, any questions
shall be submitted in writing at least 15 days before the date of holding
consultations.
686. Several delegations saw merit in the
advance presentation of questions for the purpose of holding fruitful
consultations and in the interest of both parties. They suggested that the provision should
therefore be extended to all developed and developing country Members. One delegation questioned the need for
codifying and limiting the scope of what was in fact a current practice in all
consultations in which it had been involved.
Another delegation did not consider the inclusion of such rule to be
necessary since, as other participants had indicated, advance questions were in
the interest of both parties.
687. The proponents welcomed the fact
that participants seemed to agree that sending written questions in advance was
important and beneficial to the consultations process. It was precisely for
this reason that they considered it would be useful to codify this practice in
the text. They explained that since the
purpose of consultations is to avoid the adjudication stage and to facilitate
settlement, advance notice of questions would provide developing country
respondents with time to consult the relevant ministries and stakeholders and thereby
promote a positive solution to the dispute.
However the intention was not to limit the flexibility of Members. They
agreed to consider, in light of the discussion, the merits of broadening the
scope of this provision and welcomed the drafting input of interested
delegations.
688. Whilst agreeing that advance
questions in writing enhanced the efficiency of consultations, some
participants expressed concern that the scope of consultations would be limited
to those questions. They suggested that
language be introduced to clarify that the scope of consultations would not be
limited to written questions sent in advance and that the complainant could
raise additional and supplementary questions not posed in writing. The proponents confirmed that it was not
their intention to preclude follow-up and additional questions.
689. With respect to the 15-day
timeframe, it was suggested that this was rather short, insofar as a party has
10 days from the receipt of the consultations request to respond to it and 30
days to hold them, which implies that advance questions would be sent only 5
days after receiving the response to the request for consultations. The
proponents explained that this period had been chosen in light of another
proposed amendment in their proposal, namely to extend the 30-day timeline to
enter into consultations. Another
delegation suggested that it might be clearer to set the date of the receipt of
written questions with reference to the date of the consultation request
instead of the date of holding consultations.
690. We then turned to the duration of
consultations, which is addressed differently in the two proposals. The draft text presented by the joint
proponents would amend Article 12.10 of the DSU to extend by 15 days the period
within which parties should enter into consultations in cases involving a
measure taken by a developing country Member. The proposal would also extend the period of consultations, including for perishable
goods cases, without specifying by how many days it should be extended. In
contrast, the Australian proposal envisages the shortening of
the consultations period to 30 days, with the possibility of extending it to 60
days for developing country Members.
691. I recalled that under Article 4.7 of
the DSU, the complaining party currently may not request the establishment of a
panel before 60 days have elapsed from the date of receipt of the request for
consultations, unless the responding party fails to meet the DSU deadlines to
respond to the request or to enter into consultations. The consultation stage can also be concluded
earlier if the parties jointly consider that consultations have failed to
settle the dispute. I also noted that in
practice, the average duration of consultations to date has been 162 days (from
the date of request for consultations to the date of the first request for panel
establishment).[100]
692. Australia recalled that its original
proposal was grounded in looking at the entire dispute settlement process to
see where time could be saved. It
clarified that the proposal would not alter the possibility of holding
consultations for a period longer that the contemplated timeframe, but the objective
was to allow an accelerated procedure if parties wished to expedite the process
and proceed to the panel stage. Further
to earlier discussions, it had also thought it useful to allow the possibility
of an additional 30 days for consultations involving a developing country
Member.
693. The joint proponents explained that
their proposal contained two elements. They wished to retain the 60-day period
before a panel can be requested, especially in light of the statistics that
show that most cases do not go beyond the consultations stage, which in their
view signals the usefulness of holding consultations. They expressed comfort with the Australian
proposal insofar as its special and differential treatment provisions would
maintain the existing 60-day period until a panel can be requested for
developing country respondents. Some of
the proponents wished to extend this period beyond 60 days and they sought
other delegations' views in this respect.
694. The joint proponents explained that
their first concern related to the period for entering into consultations,
noting that the current 30 days (or as otherwise mutually agreed) was too
short. Therefore they proposed to extend
this period to at least 15 more days when the measure consulted upon is taken
by a developing country Member, irrespective of whether the complainant is a
developing or a developed country Member.
In their view, 45 days would provide sufficient time to developing
country Members to address internal coordination issues before entering into
the consultations.
695. A participant asked how the
proponents determined that 15 days would be the appropriate extension of this period. The proponents clarified that this choice had
been made after consulting with other developing countries active in dispute
settlement and in light of their experience to date, which has suggested that
an additional two week-period would help to better prepare consultations.
696. Several delegations expressed
support for lengthening the period for entering into consultations for
developing countries to 45 days, recognizing the potential challenges in
meeting a shorter deadline. One
participant explained that, although their general position was to favour
neutral provisions, in this particular case it recognized that developing
country Members faced particular challenges and would view positively this
lengthening as a special and differential treatment provision. It was also suggested this would make the
consultations more meaningful, thereby promoting the preferred outcome of
mutually agreed solutions.
697. A participant suggested that this extension
should not be contingent upon the developing country Member's request but
rather should be automatic. Another
noted that the use of the expression "at least" seemed to suggest
that there were no limits on the time-period that could be requested and
wondered what discretion was left to the other party to reject such
requests. To address this concern, it
was suggested that the words "at least" be deleted. It was also asked whether multiple extension
requests could be made and would have to be accepted. The proponents explained that their intention
was not to allow developing countries to extend the consultations period beyond
what is reasonable. Should a developing
country request 15 additional days, those would be granted. Further additional time would be granted only
upon agreement. The proponents were prepared to adjust the language to reflect
this intention.
698. The proponents also clarified that
the proposal should be read in the context of Article 4.3 of the DSU, which
provides that consultations should be entered into within 30 days or as otherwise
mutually agreed. The proposal was meant to alter only the 30 day-period, not
the parties' discretion to agree on another timeframe. In that context, it was suggested that this
part of the proposal could be relocated to Article 4.3, where the duration of
consultations is otherwise addressed.
This would also clarify that if the parties wanted to hold consultations
in less than 45 days, nothing would preclude it. The following language was suggested:
"…enter into consultations within a period of no more than 30 days when
consultations involve a measure taken by a developed country Member, or no more
than 45 days when consultations involve a measure taken by a developing country
Member, or a period otherwise mutually agreed".
699. Some participants did not favour,
however, extending the 60 day-period to request panel establishment or
the timeframe for consultations in cases of urgency. It was suggested that a lengthening of these
timelines would adversely affect the complainant's right without promoting a
mutually agreed solution amongst the parties.
700. Some participants drew attention to
the potential tension between lengthening the period to enter into
consultations and the period during which a party is precluded from requesting
panel establishment. Some delegations
questioned the value of maintaining an additional 15day-period within which the
panel cannot be requested when it is clear to the parties that the consultations
will not lead to a mutually agreed settlement. It was suggested that the period for entering
into consultations could also serve to set the period to request a panel,
especially if it is extended to 45 days for developing countries. Australia noted in this respect that its
original proposal had not been framed taking into account the joint proponents'
proposal to lengthen the period for entering into consultations to 45 days, but
that, with such extension in mind, it could be considered to allow the request
for establishment of a panel to be made as soon as the consultations period has
elapsed, that is after 30 days for developed and 45 days for developing country
Members. Australia also clarified that its
proposal involved no change to Article 4.3.
701. The joint proponents expressed
concern at the suggestion that under the original Australian proposal they
would have been allowed a full 60 days without a panel being requested but that
with a 15 days extension of the period for entering into consultations, they
would have to forego that right. They
considered that the period between entering into consultations and requesting
the establishment of a panel was useful, to reflect on what has occurred during
the consultations stage and explore opportunities to settle the dispute. Other participants also considered that this
period allows follow-up on the consultations, to prepare for the panel stage or
provide an opportunity for the Member whose measures have been consulted upon
to withdraw or amend them. A participant
suggested that the period for entering into consultations and the period within
which a panel cannot be requested were two different aspects: the former aimed
at reaching an amicable solution between the parties, whereas the latter was
the initiation of the third-party adjudication phase, which escaped the control
of the parties.
702. Australia stressed that there would
be no obligation, under its proposal, to request a panel immediately after the
consultation period has elapsed. On the contrary, its proposal was intended to
provide flexibility to parties wishing to request a panel immediately to do so,
but did not prevent consultations from running their full course.
703. In concluding, I noted that further
discussions appeared to be needed amongst the joint proponents and Australia to
square the circle and bridge gaps between the inter-linkages of both
proposals.
704. Finally, we turned briefly to panel
establishment. Australia explained
that Members can currently block the establishment at the first DSB meeting at
which a panel is requested and that such possibility disappears at the second
request, where establishment becomes automatic.
Australia was of the view that this slowed the whole process down and that
by applying the rule of negative consensus from the first DSB meeting, between
2 to 4 weeks could be saved. It noted that past discussion had indicated that
some developing countries would wish to retain the status quo,
allowing them to block the establishment at the first meeting.
705. One delegation expressed support for
saving time at this particular stage. However, it expressed concerns with
introducing special and differential treatment at this stage insofar as, if a
question arose as to whether a Member has a right to block, this would oblige
the DSB to adjudicate it, which it was not in a good position to do.
706. I thanked the proponents and
delegations for the useful discussion and proposed to resume after the summer
break.
Stocktaking
707. At the end of the week, we also took
stock of other ongoing work.
Remand
708. I asked proponents of the two
proposals on remand to update us on any recent progress made. They informed the G40 that they met in this
week with the objective of developing a single, merged text. In this exercise, proponents indicated that
they have identified several areas of convergence and have inserted brackets in
areas where divergence remains, also taking into account comments received from
other delegations over the past months.
Proponents informed the group that they will continue to work over the
summer and hope to bring a merged text, with some brackets, to our meetings in
the fall. I encouraged them to have such
text ready by our next meeting in September.
Developing country interests
709. We also took stock of recent work on
developing country interests, other than timeframes. The proponents indicated that they are
consulting with a broad range of developing country delegations as they work
towards draft text related to the remaining aspects of their proposal. They signaled their intention to present new
text in late October. I took note of
their efforts and encouraged them to continue their work and present a legal
text as soon as possible to facilitate a useful discussion. I also indicated my intention of continuing
the discussion on timeframes in September, as well as of holding a discussion
on aspects of the proposal pertaining to third party interests, in connection
with other third party-related proposals discussed recently.
Post-retaliation
710. A proponent of a proposal on post-retaliation
informed delegations that it recently held several constructive meetings with
other proponents in the interest of possibly developing common text for further
discussion in upcoming meetings, in a manner comparable to the ongoing work on
remand. I encouraged proponents to work
towards text that could be discussed moving forward.
Next meetings
711. In concluding the week, I proposed
that we meet the week of 17 September to continue our discussions on remand and
on developing country interests and timeframes.
I also mentioned that it would be useful to seek to wrap up work on some
areas where broad agreement has been expressed but text had not been
finalized. Specifically, I proposed that
we attempt to conclude the work on mutually agreed solutions and third party
participation in consultations. I
requested proponents to work towards final text in both areas for the next
meetings. I also suggested that we
discuss any new developments on the post-retaliation proposals.
11. Week of 1 October 2012[101]
712.
This week, I held
consultations on third party rights, developing country interests and
timeframes. We also took stock of ongoing work on remand and post-retaliation.
Third party rights
713.
We resumed the
discussion on third party rights in consultations, in an attempt to finalize
the revised text on the basis of what was previously agreed.[102]
714.
I recalled the proposed
text for subparagraph (a), which foresees that a Member wishing to participate
in consultations shall express its substantial trade interest to consulting
Members and DSB in writing within 10 days from circulation date of request for
consultations.
715.
I also recalled
the convergence reached around the concepts reflected in subparagraph (b), that
is, a clarification regarding the consideration to be given to the
representations made by the Member wishing to be joined in consultations and
the notion that a request to join consultations would be considered accepted,
unless the responding party notifies within 7 days that it does not accept it.
In the latest version of the text, as reflected in JOB/DS/8, this 7‑day
deadline was located in subparagraph (c) and referred to in subparagraph (b).
716.
We then turned to
the outstanding drafting issue. I recalled that the proposed subparagraph (c)
addresses the notification to be made by the responding Member further to a
request to be joined in consultations and that the most recent version of the
text foresees that both acceptances and rejections would be notified. I recalled
that this was inserted in response to the interest expressed by some delegations
in ensuring that transparency would be provided on the outcome of all requests,
including those that have been accepted. I noted that under the current
practice, the respondent is required to notify acceptances, but not rejections,
of requests to be joined in consultations, and that the Secretariat then
circulates a document listing Members whose requests to join have been
accepted.[103]
In light of this practice, I enquired whether delegations would be ready to
explore mechanisms other than notifications by the responding Member in order
to achieve greater transparency, for instance through the circulation of a DSB
document listing the Members that have and have not been joined in the
consultations.
717.
The proponents
reported that they had been working on different ideas to address the tension
arising between, on the one hand, the automaticity flowing from the absence of
a response within 7 days and, on the other hand, the enhanced transparency
derived from making available the information regarding both of acceptances and
rejections. The proponents explained that a first solution they envisaged was
to delete the word "unless" from subparagraph (b) as drafted in
JOB/DS/8, to allow the notification of both rejections and acceptances, and to
include a subparagraph regulating the consequences of a failure to notify. The
second option considered by the proponents was to keep the text of the
provision in its most recent version, deleting the first set of brackets of
subparagraph (c) and maintaining the second set of brackets. In addition, they
envisaged introducing a subparagraph (d) as a transparency provision,
foreseeing a list of Members that have been accepted and rejected.
718.
The proponents
explained that in their view, both solutions would achieve the same objective.
They invited views from participants on their preference as to whether both
acceptances and rejections, or only rejections, should be notified. They also
sought delegations' views on the introduction of a provision regarding the
failure to notify. Finally, the proponents asked participants how they
envisaged addressing the transparency issue, either by imposing a notification
obligation of the Member to which the request to be joined has been addressed
or by foreseeing another mechanism, such as a DSB document.
719.
Some delegations
expressed a preference for notifying both acceptances and rejections to the
applicant Member. However, another delegation considered that this would
undermine the principle of automaticity embodied in the proposal, which
foresees the notification of rejections only.
720.
A possible
approach was discussed, under which the second sentence of subparagraph (b)
would contain the 7-day deadline for notifying rejections of requests to be
joined, and subparagraph (c) would provide for the issuance of an official
document containing a list of Members that have been joined in the
consultations, based on requests notified under subparagraph (a) and any
negative responses received under subparagraph (b). Some participants stated
that they were generally comfortable with such an approach, and made drafting
suggestions to streamline the text. Further discussion focused on clarifying
what should be notified and circulated to the applicant Member and to the DSB
under the various subparagraphs.
721.
With respect to requests
to be joined in consultations (subparagraph (a)), it was suggested that it
was appropriate to continue to notify them to the DSB and circulate them
individually, as was currently the case.
722.
With respect to responses
to the requests (subparagraph (b)), it was discussed whether they should be
individually circulated, or whether sufficient transparency would be provided
by having a single document issued with a list of Members whose requests were
accepted, but no circulation of the individual responses, as was currently the
case. Participants discussed the difference between the two types of
communications to which subparagraphs (a) and (b) would refer, and to whom they
should be circulated. One delegation noted that subparagraph (a) refers to
letters of notification of interest to join, which, under the current practice,
are circulated to Members, whereas responses to these letters, whether
accepting or rejecting the request (referred to in subparagraph (b)), are
currently not circulated. In this delegation's view, there would be duplication
if individual letters of rejection and acceptance were circulated in addition
to a list of Members having been joined in the consultations.
723.
In this context,
the appropriate language to distinguish between the notification of requests to
join under subparagraph (a) and the notification of responses under
subparagraph (b) was discussed. It was suggested that if there was to be a
difference of treatment between these two situations in terms of circulation of
documents, the language should reflect this. I drew delegations' attention to
the current language of the DSU that uses the verb "notify" for the
letters of expression of interest to join the consultations and the verb
"inform" for the letter of responses. A participant suggested that
responses in subparagraph (b) be notified to the applicant Member and to the
Chairperson of the DSB, rather than to the entire DSB. This would imply that
letters of responses are not circulated to the DSB. One delegation considered
that the verb "inform" would not be appropriate for the applicant
Member and considered the expression "notifying" the applicant Member
to be more suited. However, it agreed that referring to the Chairperson of the
DSB for the letters of responses and using the verb inform the DSB Chairperson
would distinguish between the two types of letters and avoid duplication of
information.
724.
Several
delegations expressed support for a list to be issued, as opposed to the
circulation of individual response letters. A participant questioned, however,
why it was assumed that the circulation of the response letters to the
Membership should be avoided and whether other participants considered that
making this information public would be difficult, either for the rejected
Member or for the Member rejecting the request. Some participants considered
that the notifications of requests and responses foreseen under subparagraphs
(a) and (b) would be sufficient.
725.
Some delegations,
while supporting a list approach, highlighted the benefits of notifying both
rejections and acceptance to the applicant Member, as a matter of good
practice. A participant considered that it would be appropriate to maintain the
current practice of notifying the applicant Member as to whether it has been
accepted or rejected, but also considered that it would not be necessary to
swamp Members with individual communications in this respect, especially if a
summary document is circulated, gathering the information. It was noted that
the proposal did not foresee a requirement for Members to identify the motives
behind a rejection, so that circulating the letters of response would not
provide more information than a list. Circulating a single list as opposed to
letters of responses and a final list would also contribute to reducing costs
and red tape. Another delegation questioned this assertion, noting that in the
event of late acceptances, a second list would need to be issued. In response
it was suggested that such corrigenda would be an exception.
726.
If a document
listing the Members that have been joined in the consultations were envisaged,
it was suggested that the timeframe for the circulation of such document should
be based on the deadline of subparagraph (a) rather than on the date of
specific requests to be joined, to ensure that it is not affected by the
different dates at which various requests might be made. It was also suggested
that the circulation should occur before the consultations take place. Other
delegations questioned the need for establishing a DSU-mandated deadline on
this particular point, noting also that the DSU generally does not establish
obligations on the Secretariat. It was suggested that the text could simply
require the document to be circulated "promptly". Clarification was
also sought as to the basis on which the list would be drawn up, in the event
that only rejections are notified.
727.
A delegation
sought clarification as to the reason for changing the current practice. The
proponents recalled that the original objective of their proposal was to
facilitate third party participation at different stages of the proceedings. In
this respect, convergence was reached on the "sympathetic consideration"
formulation, which would allow Members to consider different preoccupations of
requesting Members at the consultation stage. During the discussions, some
delegations had expressed transparency concerns. The idea of a list and the
debate around what needs to be notified had emerged in this context.
728.
Proponents and
other interested delegations continued to work on this issue after the meeting.
I encouraged them to continue this work between now and our next meetings.
Developing country interests/Timeframes
729.
This week, we
also continued a discussion of timeframes, based on the proposals reflected in
the Chairman's text of July 2008 and the draft legal text presented in July by
proponents of developing country interests.
Panel
establishment
730.
We considered the
proposal to allow panel establishment to take place at the first meeting at
which it is requested, while allowing the possibility of establishment at a
second meeting upon request of a developing country Member.
731.
The proponent
explained that its objective, as in other timesaving proposals, was to seek a
more efficient use of time wherever possible. Specifically, there seemed to be
no particular purpose to holding two meetings for the establishment of panels.
732.
Several
participants supported the objective of gaining time at this stage of the
proceedings by allowing panels to be established at the first meeting at which
the request is placed on the DSB's agenda. One participant observed that, while
the two-meeting procedure had been introduced initially as part of the
agreement towards automatic panel establishment, practice under this provision
had demonstrated that this led to unnecessary delays.
733.
Some participants
had no objection to the proposal, provided that developing country Members
would retain the right to two meetings. They explained that the time between
the two meetings was important in order to prepare for the subsequent panel
stage, especially for developing country Members with resource constraints. In
this context, it was asked if such preparations could not start prior to a
panel's establishment, during the consultations phase. In response it was noted
that, for example, the formalities required to hire outside counsel may take
time and the decision may be taken only once a panel proceeding is under way. It
was also discussed whether this concern could be addressed by ensuring that
sufficient time would be granted to such developing country Members to prepare
their submissions once the panel is established. It was further suggested that
the time between the two meetings might serve to settle the dispute. In
response it was observed that settlement opportunities would continue to exist
subsequently.
734.
Some participants
expressed concern that special and differential treatment at this stage of the
proceedings should not lead to jurisdictional issues before the DSB that may derail
the entirety of the proceedings. This could occur if the DSB had to determine
the status of the responding Member in order to decide whether establishment
should take place at the first meeting or may be postponed. It was observed in
response that the need for adjudicative bodies to rule on the development
status of a party may arise under a number of existing provisions under the
covered agreements, wherever S and D treatment was foreseen. In
further response, it was suggested that issues relating to substantive rulings
under the covered agreements by the adjudicators were of a different nature
from jurisdictional issues, which may affect the validity of the panel's
establishment, and hence of all subsequent procedural steps. It would be
preferable to avoid creating such a situation.
735.
It was observed
that the proposal, as currently drafted, foresees "sympathetic
consideration" to be given to a request for postponement made by a developing
country Member, rather than automatic postponement. This would not raise the
same jurisdictional concerns as an automatic right, if it was left to the
discretion of the complaining Member to accept or decline a postponement
request. Some delegations considered, however, that this would be insufficient
to guarantee that the right to a second meeting would be preserved.
Submissions to
panels
736.
The discussion
first focused on the proposal that the complainant be given 14 days,
instead of the current 3 to 6 weeks, for the filing of its first written
submission under the indicative timetable in Appendix 3 of the DSU. It was
recalled that the rationale for this proposal was to rectify what is perceived
as an imbalance in the current DSU text, i.e. the fact that the complainant,
who has full control over the initiation of the proceedings, is given more time
than the respondent to prepare its first written submission. The proponent
recalled that its original proposal envisaged a period of 5 days only, which
had been considered too short and therefore extended to 14 days. It also
recalled that the proposal would also introduce a starting point for the
timetable, from the organizational meeting.
737.
A participant
noted that it has long observed that the Appendix 3 timelines for first
submissions make little sense in light of experience and should be inversed to
reflect reality. With respect to the starting point of the timetable, it
suggested that the date of receipt of the final timetable may be a better point
of reference, given the time that may elapse between the organizational meeting
and the finalization of the timetable.
738.
With respect to
the proposal to amend Article 12.10 to provide a minimum period of 4 to 6 weeks
for the filing of a responding developing country Member's first submission,
a clarification was sought as to whether this was intended as a strict minimum
requirement, as opposed to the timelines under Appendix 3, which are indicative.
The proponents confirmed that this was the intention, in order to guarantee
that developing country respondents would have sufficient time to file their
submissions. A participant expressed concern at the stricture of this approach,
noting that in some cases, proceedings had been accelerated in a manner that
would become impossible under this proposal.
739.
The proponents
sought clarifications on the practice to date and the effectiveness of the
current Article 12.10, which contains no minimum timeframe. In response it was
observed that panels would normally seek to accommodate as much as possible the
requests of parties with respect to filing dates, whether Article 12.10 was
expressly invoked or not. However it would be difficult to draw general
conclusions on the effectiveness of the existing provision based on this
practice.
Reasonable
period of time for implementation (RPT)
740.
We then turned to
the reasonable period of time for implementation. For arbitrators determining
the RPT pursuant to the current text of Article 21.3(c) of the DSU, the
guideline is a period of 15 months from the date of adoption, but the RPT may
be shorter or longer "depending upon the particular circumstances". In
addition, it has been established, through successive arbitral awards under
this provision, that the RPT should be the shortest period possible within the
legal system of the implementing Member. Pursuant to Article 21.2, some
arbitrators under Article 21.3(c) have taken into account the situation of the
developing country Member to determine the time within which it can implement
the recommendations and rulings.[104]
In practice, the average length of the RPT to date has been 11 months and 16
days when it has been determined pursuant to Article 21.3(c) arbitration and
9 months and 5 days when agreed by the parties pursuant to Article 21.3(b).
741.
The Chairman's
text of July 2008 contained a footnote "h" at Article 21.3(c),
enjoining the arbitrator to take into account the particular problems and
interests of developing country Members. The legal text presented in July
includes similar, though not identical, language, as a final subparagraph to
Article 21.3 of the DSU.
742.
The proponents
explained that they were trying not to be too prescriptive. They highlighted
that, contrary to the Chairman's text, their proposal was not limited to RPTs
determined by arbitration and would cover also RPTs determined under
subparagraphs (a) and (b) of Article 21.3. It was suggested that the term
"establishing" might be more accurate than the term
"determining" if agreed RPTs are also intended to be covered. The
proponents agreed. The proponents also confirmed that existing footnotes in the
DSU text were not intended to be deleted.
743.
A number of
participants agreed that it was appropriate, in the context of determining an
RPT, to take into account factors that may affect the implementation process
within the domestic legal system of the implementing Member, including
practical aspects that may have an impact on what a "reasonable"
period may be in the circumstances. In this respect, it was acknowledged that
significant constraints may be faced by developing country Members in the
implementation process and support was expressed for the thrust of the proposal.
At the same time, it was suggested that such circumstances should be taken into
account in any RPT determination, not only those relating to developing
countries.
744.
A number of
clarifications were sought as to how extensive the scope of the provision was
intended to be. In particular, it was asked what exactly the terms
"interests" and "problems" of developing country Members were
intended to cover and how they differed from each other. It was asked whether
these terms might for example cover considerations relating to the interests of
a domestic industry affected by the rulings, or considerations not directly
relating to the measures at issue and the implementation process, such as the
general economic situation of the implementing Member. It was suggested that,
in the absence of a clearly defined scope, the provision did not make clear how
extensive it might be. It was suggested that some considerations, such as
political sensitivities in the implementing Member, may not be relevant to the
determination.
745.
The proponents
observed that these terms were already found in the DSU. It was noted that
Article 21.2 referred specifically to "matters affecting the interests of
developing country Members with respect to measures
which have been subject to dispute settlement", thus limiting
the scope of the provision. It was also asked why the term
"particular", which was found in the previous text, was omitted from
the text of the proposal. The proponents expressed willingness to consider such
language to clarify the scope of their proposal. They explained that their
primary aim was to ensure that it could not be argued, in the context of an RPT
determination, that considerations relating to constraints faced by a
developing country Member should not be taken into account in determining the
"shortest period of time" for implementation in the domestic legal
system of the Member concerned.
746.
In this context,
the proponents emphasized that they were not seeking to modify the existing
benchmark for the establishment of an RPT, but to guard against interpretations
that would preclude such considerations from being given due attention. They
noted that such considerations had in the past already been considered by
arbitrators, for example in Indonesia – Autos
or Argentina – Hides and Leather. Other
participants sought further clarification of what would be gained by the
proposal, in light of the existence of such rulings under the current rules,
and whether it was intended that more would be done under this provision than
was currently the case. The proponents confirmed that the intention was to
reflect in the DSU text the existing practice, rather than modify it.
747.
Clarification was
also sought with respect to the use of the expression "of developing
country Members" and whether this was intended to relate to the
implementing Member, or both parties, or all Members. A participant suggested
that the text could be clarified by referring to "problems and interests
of implementing developing country Members". In response it was observed
that there may be instances where a complainant Member's interests might be
taken into account, for example to determine that administrative action for
implementation should take place rapidly rather than slowly. Another
participant questioned how the circumstances of the complaining Member could
have an impact on what constitutes "the shortest possible period"
within the implementing Member's domestic legal system.
748.
It was asked
whether the proposal implied that the objective of achieving immediate
compliance would no longer apply. A participant observed that while immediate
compliance is the preferred outcome, the DSU recognizes that where this is not
practicable, a "reasonable period" will be granted. It suggested that
the benchmark developed under Article 21.3(c), based on the "shortest
period possible" within the legal system of the Member concerned, struck
the right balance between the objective of prompt compliance and what is
possible in reality, and this was what arbitrators had sought to achieve. In
that context, it was appropriate to consider the relevant circumstances in the
implementing developing country Member. The proponents agreed with this
characterization and confirmed that the objective of their proposal was to
ensure that such circumstances would be taken into consideration.
749.
In conclusion, I
took note of the elements of convergence on some of the drafting improvements
proposed, and noted that further discussion seemed necessary on the nature of
the problems or interests to which consideration is to be given and the scope
of coverage of the proposed text.
Period before adoption of panel
report
750. We also discussed possible
time-savings in the period before adoption of the panel report. Panel reports
are currently adopted not before 20 days and not after 60 days counting from
the date of circulation. In practice to date, on average 47 days elapse before
adoption or notification of an appeal. This aspect of the proposal foresees the
possibility of immediate request for adoption upon circulation, still allowing
the 10 days after the report is placed on the DSB agenda to examine it.
751. A number of participants expressed support
for this proposal, noting that these timesavings should not have any great
negative effect on parties. In particular, participants recognized that this
proposal would work in conjunction with the proposal to circulate panel reports
to the Membership in the original language, in advance of their translation
into all official WTO languages, without prejudice of the legal deadlines for
adoption. This would imply that all Members would receive the final report at
the same time as the parties and would therefore have more time prior to its
official circulation in the three languages to consider it. Some participants
expressed concern in cases where the original language of a report was French
or Spanish. It was observed that in such cases, the parties to the dispute
themselves, who are most affected by the adoption or appeal, would have
requested this and would therefore not be prejudiced.
Stocktaking
Remand
752.
I invited the
proponents of different proposals on remand to provide an update on the state
of their recent work. They indicated that they were not yet ready to share
progress at achieving a common text but had
worked together recently to achieve further convergence on outstanding areas
where the proposals take different approaches. They also recognized the need to
gain support among the larger group. They would continue to engage with each
other and other Members in the coming weeks in advance of our next meetings, in
order to present a single document.
753.
I thanked the
proponents for their efforts and encouraged them to work intensely with a view
to moving forward so that that they might present their progress at our next
meeting to the larger group. I encouraged them to take into account the views
of other delegations, with an interest in concluding and moving to the next
phase in our process.
Post retaliation
754.
I also invited
proponents of the two proposals on post-retaliation to provide an update on
their recent work.
755.
I recalled that
the two groups' proposals seek to introduce detailed procedures to deal with
the situation in which the Member concerned considers that it has complied with
the rulings and recommendations, after retaliation has been authorized. Earlier
discussions had revealed a number of points of convergence between the two
proposals, but also significant differences that had not been bridged. In
particular, the proposals differed in their approach to the initiation of
compliance proceedings in a post-retaliation situation.
756.
Under the European Union/Japan
approach, the Member concerned would notify the DSB that it has taken a measure
that it believes achieves compliance with the DSB recommendations and rulings.
On the basis of this notification, the complainant may elect to initiate
compliance proceedings if it disagrees that compliance has been achieved. Under
the G6 proposal, on the other hand, the responding Member should request the
establishment of a compliance panel if it believes it has achieved compliance
with the DSB recommendations and rulings. In short, the European Union and Japan
approach would have the complainant initiate compliance proceedings also in a
post-retaliation situation, while the G6 approach places the onus on the
responding Member to justify that it has remedied the non-compliant situation,
before the retaliation authorization can be removed.
757.
The proponents
updated the group on some of the outstanding differences between their two
proposals, in the hope that the views of other participants could provide some
direction for ongoing discussions. Foremost, the proponents observed that their
proposals differ in respect of which party should bear the burden of proof in
respect of initiating a compliance proceeding in the post-retaliation context. Both
proponents associated the issue of which party should bear the burden of proof
with the question of which party should initiate proceedings, in cases where
there is a disagreement as to whether compliance is achieved.
758.
Participants
debated the nature of compliance proceedings in the post-retaliation context. Some
delegations questioned whether the circumstances would be any different in
compliance proceedings in the post-retaliation context as opposed to those
following the conclusion of an RPT in the initial stages. It was suggested, in response, that the situation
differed in that, at the post‑retaliation stage, an authorization to suspend
obligations had been granted. Delegates discussed whether the legal positions
would be different in that context, since the legal question to be addressed,
i.e. whether compliance had been achieved, was the same in both situations.
In this light, it was questioned whether it would make sense to formulate
compliance procedures applicable in the post‑retaliation context – including
for the initiation of the procedures and allocation of the burden of proof –
that would operate in a way that is fundamentally different from procedure
applicable in other contexts.
759.
Delegations also
noted the relevance in this context of the approach previously endorsed in
respect of sequencing, which would provide for the initiation of compliance
proceedings by the complaining party. It was also noted that the guidance
offered by the Appellate Body in US/Canada – Continued
Suspension under the current rules would be of limited relevance in
such context. Some participants also considered that these rulings of the
Appellate Body did not in fact provide clear guidance as to how compliance
proceedings should operate in a post-retaliation context, even under the
current rules.
760.
Participants then
considered how the proposals would work in terms of defining the terms of
reference of a panel in post-retaliation compliance proceedings. It was
discussed in particular how, under the G6 proposal, the two requests, by the
complainant and respondent, would combine to define the panel's terms of
reference, and how the allocation of burden of proof would operate. The G6
explained that the respondent party would identify the steps taken for the
removal of the specific inconsistency that had been the basis for the earlier
findings of violation, and would bear the burden of demonstrating compliance in
respect of such provisions in the proceedings, while the complaining party
would bear the burden of demonstrating any new inconsistency that it may have
identified in its own request.
761.
Concerns were
expressed over the potential complexity of distinguishing between the sources
of initial violations and new claims for the purposes of distributing the
burden of proof among the parties in the proceedings. One participant also
expressed concern that an approach that would place the burden of demonstrating
compliance on the responding Member may call into question the presumption of
good faith, which was problematic.
762.
There was also a
discussion of the potential jurisdictional role of a detailed notification by
the Member concerned as a means of ensuring that the Member concerned would
bear an initial burden to bring forward sufficient information to allow an
assessment of the consistency of steps taken towards compliance, and as
potential basis for subsequent compliance proceedings.
763.
One delegation
asked whether a requirement for consultations was part of either proposal and
whether this could assist parties in determining what remains in disagreement
prior to reaching the panel stage. There was an interest in considering further
this possibility.
764.
Following the
discussion, I encouraged delegations to continue their discussions in the
coming weeks in an effort to achieve further convergence in advance of our next
meeting.
12. Week
of 12 November 2012[105]
765.
This week, we concluded
a consideration of the issues under discussion.
Specifically, we took stock of recent work on post-retaliation, remand
and third party rights. We also
discussed draft legal text presented by a group of proponents of developing country
interests.
Post-retaliation
766.
As you will
recall, post-retaliation was discussed in October, based on the proponents'
explanation of their recent efforts to bridge the gaps between their
positions. In this context, the EU and
Japan on the one hand, and the G6 on the other hand had explained where their
main difficulties remained.
767.
This week, the
proponents confirmed that they had continued to meet to seek common
ground. They also reported that although
significant differences remained between their positions, they were committed
to continuing to work together towards narrowing these differences.
768.
I took note of
the continued interest in addressing this issue and of the goodwill of
proponents to come to common positions.
I encouraged them to continue their efforts.
Remand
769.
The proponents of
remand, that is, on the one hand the G-7 and on the other hand Korea, present a
consolidated merged version of their texts this week. Participants welcomed the
effort of proponents.
770.
The proponents
explained that this was not a joint proposal but rather reflected the joint
effort of proponents to move as much as possible towards common positions. The text reflected some convergence. Some drafting changes had been introduced,
notably to the language defining how the party entitled to seek remand would be
defined under the Korean approach. On
other elements of the proposals, significant differences remained and were
identified in the document.
771.
Specifically,
five key points of divergence were identified:
the nature of
the document in which the Appellate Body identifies the need for remand;
the constraints
imposed on who can initiate the remand procedure;
whether the
Appellate Body issues two full reports, subject to separate and double adoption
or one report subject to single adoption;
the
jurisdiction of the panel and the format and scope of the results of its
review;
whether the
results of the panel’s remand review are subject to appeal.
772.
In light of this,
I invited other participants to clarify as much as possible where their
preferences lie in respect of these various points.
773.
With respect to
the nature of the document in which the Appellate Body would identify
issues for remand, clarifications were sought as to how the Korean proposal for
"tentative findings" would work.
It was asked whether the totality of the Appellate Body's findings on
issues not requiring remand would be reflected, and if so whether these would
also be "tentative" and subject to further review. Concern was expressed that this may lead to re-opening
of completed issues. If not all findings
were reflected however, this could make it difficult for the parties to assess
the merits of seeking remand or not. It
was questioned what the legal status of the tentative findings would be,
pending adoption.
774.
The proponent
explained that the tentative findings would include aspects not for remand as
well as remand issues, and would bear some resemblance to an interim
report. However the comments of parties
would be limited to the question of remand.
The proponent also clarified that the use of the term
"tentative" was intended to convey the fact that the report as a
whole would not be final at that stage.
775.
It was asked what
sort of time-frame Korea had in mind for the completion of the remand process
under its proposal. Korea responded that this would be determined on a
case-by-case basis by the Appellate Body.
It could be expected that some additional time would be required, but
this would be outweighed by the benefits of having a remand procedure.
776.
It was suggested
that the question was to find a well-balanced solution, reconciling timeframe
and procedural concerns. It was noted
that the prior circulation of tentative findings had merit in terms of allowing
a single adoption and implementation procedure.
Concern was also expressed however that it was not entirely clear how
the "tentative" report would work.
In this respect, the alternative of the Appellate Body issuing a full
report, as it would now, was simpler.
777.
Clarification was also sought on the meaning
of the expression "appropriate findings" in the G-7 text, and what
this implied beyond the terms of Article 19 of the DSU. In response it was explained that this
language was intended to convey that the Appellate Body should make full
findings on those issues on which the analysis was completed. A participant
recalled that this language had originally been introduced, together with
additional language, to address uncertainties about the nature of findings and
recommendations to be made under Article 19 of the DSU in the event that a
defence was left pending. It was noted
however that the proposed language did not in fact make clear how the Appellate
Body was expected to address this issue.
If that was the objective, then this could be addressed more clearly. In this respect, it would be possible to
explore ways of providing clearer guidance to the Appellate Body, to ensure
that it would make findings and recommendations only in respect of those issues
that would not be affected by a remand procedure.
778.
With respect to who
can initiate remand, the different approaches reflected in the two
proposals were noted: either the text itself would define which party may
initiate remand, or the Appellate Body would determine it.
779.
It was asked whether proponents had considered
the concerns previously expressed about risks of unwanted delays if remand can
be initiated by the respondent, including with respect to claims that the
complainant itself may not have had an interest in pursuing further. It was suggested that there may be ways of
dealing with situations where defences are at issue, for example by ensuring
that the Appellate Body would not make findings if completion of the analysis
was not possible on a defence. This
would also eliminate the need to consider this question of defining which party
can initiate remand. In addition, to the
extent that a "double adoption" procedure was rendered necessary by
the need to avoid unnecessary delays if the respondent initiated remand, the
resulting complexities appeared to be a high price to pay, which could maybe be
avoided.
780.
With respect to double
vs. single adoption, it was recalled that a number of participants had
expressed concerns about potential delays in the proceedings. It was also suggested that in practice,
although there may be circumstances in which separation would be possible, it
was not clear that immediate implementation of completed rulings would
generally be feasible, because claims tended to be intertwined. In this respect, the Member concerned might
legitimately invoke the need to wait for the outcome of the remand proceeding in
arbitral proceedings to determine the RPT concerning the initial completed
rulings. Several participants reiterated their concern that a double-adoption
procedure gave rise to a number of procedural problems in later stages of the
dispute.
781.
In light of the
various complexities and unresolved questions introduced by the proposals, a
participant was not convinced on balance that the procedure would be of net
benefit. A proponent observed in response that in numerous cases to date, the
Appellate Body had been unable to complete the analysis on some issues. These instances of "incomplete"
resolution of disputes showed that the introduction of remand would be
beneficial.
782.
With respect to
the scope of referral and the possibility of appeal, it was
suggested that the scope for appeal should remain as it currently is and no
attempt should be made to redefine what types of findings are appealable. In this respect, it was observed that even
factual findings may give rise to issues on appeal. Notably, some issues may involve both factual
and legal aspects, and such mixed issues should remain subject to appeal. It was also suggested that it may be very
difficult to distinguish factual and legal issues as proposed by Korea.
783.
Korea observed
that its intention was to limit the scope of remand, so that the issue of
appeal would not arise, and that the scope of remand proposed was based on the
existing practice of the Appellate Body of "completing the analysis",
which would be endorsed in the proposals.
A participant noted that this remained an exceptional practice by the
Appellate Body and that it would be reluctant to place the Appellate Body in
the difficult situation of having to complete the analysis more
systematically.
784.
A participant
recalled its concern that a remand procedure should not be an opportunity to
introduce new factual elements in the proceedings. The proponents recalled their prior
observation that both proposals were deliberately silent on this issue, to
allow flexibility as necessary depending on the type of situation at issue. This
was however not intended to allow a complete re-opening of issues.
Third party rights
785.
You will recall
that we had reverted last month to the draft legal text on third party rights
in consultations, in the hope of finalizing that text. This week, the proponents of third party
rights shared a consolidated text on all aspects of third party rights. In this text, they sought to bring together,
to the greatest extent possible, the text contained in the Chairman's text and
the more recent text proposed by the Friends of third parties, in order to
reduce some of the confusion that may arise from the coexistence of these two
texts. They also sought to reduce
differences between them to the extent possible. Remaining differences are also identified in
the consolidated text.
786.
With respect to third
party rights in panel proceedings (Article 10.2), discussion mostly
focused on the question of whether the panel should be allowed discretion to
accept the participation of Members who expressed interest more than 10 days
following the establishment of the panel.
787.
Some participants
considered that such flexibility, which existed in current practice, could
usefully be codified. Other participants expressed concern that the language
proposed in respect of notifications after the initial 10-day period may create
an incentive to notify late. It was observed that such late notifications
should not lead to complications in the proceedings. It was also noted that the text did not
provide guidance to the panel on the parameters that may guide its decision to
accept or not late third party notifications.
Specifically, it was asked how late notifications would be treated in
relation to the requirement under Article 8.3 of the DSU that no national of a
third party be selected as a panelist unless the parties agree. This question arose both if the late
notification was made prior to the composition of the panel and if it was made
after composition.
788.
The proponents
clarified that they were seeking to keep a balance between this possibility and
an incentive to express interest within the 10 days. They emphasized that if
the 10-day rule itself was codified, it would be necessary also to expressly
allow flexibility for later notifications in order to retain the flexibility
that existed under current practice. It
was suggested that if late notifications were to be allowed, some language
should be developed to explain the elements on which the panel might base its
decision, including in relation to panel composition issues under Article
8.3.
789.
The proponents
also pointed out that their proposed text would no longer refer to
"substantial interest", which in practice had turned out not to have
any practical meaning.
790.
With respect to
the rights of third parties in panel proceedings, the proponents noted that
they were in agreement on most issues, including presence of third parties at
both substantive meetings, but there were differing views on whether third
parties should be able to take the floor in the context of both meetings or
only in the context of the first one.
791.
Some participants
reiterated their reservations concerning active participation of third parties
at both substantive meetings. It was suggested that this question should be
assessed in light of whether it would disrupt the panel proceedings and put
parties in difficulty for the effective presentation of their positions. Another participant noted however that there
may be a tension between allowing third parties full access to information in
the course of the proceedings but not the opportunity to speak in the later
stages.
792.
With respect to
additional rights in panel proceedings (proposed Article 10.2(c)), it was
proposed that they be granted only upon agreement of the parties, on the
premise that the level of rights automatically granted would be enhanced,
thereby reducing the need to allow additional rights to be granted. Some participants noted that this part of the
text was closely tied to the level of basic rights that would be defined in the
previous paragraph. Therefore it should
be considered together with that text.
793.
With respect to
the proposal to allow third party interest to be expressed for the first
time before the Appellate Body (Article 17(4)), some participants
reiterated their concerns with respect to the potential undue burdens that this
would impose on the proceedings and on the parties, at a stage of the
proceedings when time was scarce.
Concern was also expressed that, to the extent that the proposal would
remove some of the incentive for taking part at the panel stage, this could
adversely impact on the quality of panel reports, while at the same time
allowing new issues to be expressed for the first time before the Appellate
Body. Overall, one participant was not
convinced that the added convenience for some Members outweighed the additional
burdens on the parties.
794.
The proponents
recalled that only new arguments, not new issues, might be raised by third
participants on appeal. They also
considered that, to the extent that the proposal might lead to increased levels
of participation at the appellate stage, the procedural burdens that this
entailed could be handled by the Appellate Body, which was already accustomed
to adapting its proceedings to such constraints.
795.
A participant
asked whether a middle ground might be available, to allow the costs to the
parties not to outweigh the benefits.
The proponents considered that the proposal reflected such a balance, by
providing a time-bound opportunity and allowing the Appellate Body to organize
the proceedings so as not to create undue burdens.
796.
It was commented
that 5 days might be an insufficient period for Members to determine whether
they had an interest in participating.
The current Appellate Body Working Procedures provided for the filing of
notices of other appeal on day 5. A few
additional days may therefore be needed to allow a fully informed expression of
third party interest. The proponents
agreed.
797.
With respect to the
proposed Article 21.5(c), participants agree that, if consultations are
requested in the context of compliance proceedings, expressions of
third-party interest should be possible.
The only point under discussion is how this should be formulated. The Friends of Third Parties consider the
language contained in the previously agreed sequencing text to be unclear in
this respect and propose alternative language.
It was noted that there was no disagreement on the concepts here, and
this drafting issue could be reserved for now.
798.
The Friends of
Third parties propose to allow third party participation in Article 22.6
proceedings. It was discussed
whether these proceedings involved issues that were primarily of a bilateral
nature and therefore not warranting input from other Members, or whether legal
or other issues of broader systemic interest were also at issue. There continued to be different views in this
respect. Some participants consider that
these proceedings involve primarily factual issues relating to the calculation
of the impact of the measures on the complaining party. Others consider that the application of the
principles of Articles 22.4 and 22.3 by the arbitrator necessarily involves
legal aspects (including an interpretation of the meaning of nullification or
impairment) and other issues of general interest, such as the choice of
methodologies available for the calculation of nullification or impairment.
799.
A participant
suggested that it was desirable to maintain consistent treatment among various
arbitral proceedings across the DSU and observed that third party access was
limited in arbitral proceedings under Article 25. A proponent questioned the analogy to Article
25 proceedings, which it considered to be of a different nature.
800.
Another
participant suggested that a middle ground might be considered, between the
current practice, which suggested limited discretion exercised by arbitrators,
and full third party access. This might
be achieved by providing the arbitrator with guidance as to the basis on which
to accept participation.
801.
Finally, it was
noted that BCI issues may arise in retaliation arbitral proceedings, which
could be expected to be handled in a similar manner as in other phases of the proceedings.
802.
We also briefly
considered potential third party participation at the appellate stage of
retaliation proceedings (Article 22.7), if this were to be accepted. Those participants that had reservations
about third party participation before arbitrators under Article 22.6 also were
not in favour of such participation at an appellate stage of such
proceedings.
803.
Finally we considered the consequential
changes to Appendix 3 of the DSU that would arise as a consequence of enhanced
third party rights at the panel stage under Article 10.2. The language in paragraph 6 had been adjusted
to reflect an agreement reached by the G-7 and Friends of third parties.
804.
Participants who
had expressed reservations concerning the need for a second oral statement of
third parties before the panel questioned the text proposed in that respect in
paragraph 7 of Appendix 3.
805.
A number of
participants also doubted whether it was necessary to mention in paragraph 8 the
possibility for the panel to ask questions of the third parties, as it was
clear that this was already possible. In
this respect, it was also noted that the panel would be able to give the
parties an opportunity to comment on any responses to questions by third
parties in the context of the second meeting.
806.
The proposals on
transparency, in particular open hearings, were also recalled. It was noted that their adoption could make some
aspects of the proposed text unnecessary.
Developing country interests
807.
This week we also
discussed draft legal text presented by proponents of developing country
interests, on effective compliance and access to the system for developing
country Members. Other Members welcomed
the circulation of this text as an important step forward to facilitate
discussion.
Facilitated
cross-retaliation for developing countries
808.
The proponents
suggest the adoption of the following text as Article 22.3bis
of the DSU, to facilitate cross‑retaliation by developing country members:
"Notwithstanding the provisions contained in Paragraph 3, if the
complaining party is a developing country, such Member shall have the right to
seek authorisation to suspend concessions or other obligations in any sector(s)
under any covered agreement(s)."
809.
As the proponents
explained, this language reflects other participants' comments in earlier
discussions. In particular, the
former language "in a dispute between a developing country Member and a
developed country Member" had now been removed. Facilitated cross-retaliation would be
available to developing country complainants irrespective of the respondent's
status.
810.
In the
proponents' view, the procedure for cross-retaliation under Article 22.3 of the
DSU was too cumbersome and developing countries should not have to demonstrate
that retaliation in a sector or under a covered agreement is not practicable or
effective. The additional time required
for this justification process could have serious implications for the economy
of the developing country complainant in question. The proposal therefore
addressed the time implications of this process before the arbitrator.
811.
Some participants
welcomed the removal of the reference to the status of the responding Member
("double S and D") as a step in the right direction. Some
participants supported the proposal.
812.
Some participants
questioned whether the proposed text added any value to Article 22.3 of the
DSU, which already allows cross-retaliation for any type of complainant. A participant, while sympathetic to
developing country constraints, asked what specific difficulties motivated the
proposal. It was suggested that if a
developing country complainant had a small volume of trade, it could easily
demonstrate that retaliation in the same sector is not practicable or
effective. Another participant stated
that it was reasonable to support developing countries but this had to be done
fairly and neutrally.
813.
The proponents
also wished to ensure neutrality and fairness under the DSU. They explained that the proposal would not
introduce a new right: Article 22.3 of the DSU already provided for
cross-retaliation. The added value of Article 22.3bis
would be to make Article 22.3 readily accessible for developing
countries. Some large developing
countries would have no problems retaliating under Article 22.3. However, a majority of developing countries
lacked a sufficiently diverse trading profile to effectively retaliate in the
same sector. For many Members,
enforcing compliance was the most frustrating aspect of WTO dispute settlement. The specific problems faced in the past by certain
developing countries were well known to all.
These experiences made the issue a legitimate one.
814.
Some participants
reiterated their support for the sequence currently reflected in Article 22.3
of the DSU, of starting with the same sector and then moving to other sectors
and then other agreements. They argued
that retaliation in the same sector facilitated an assessment of
equivalence. The proponents agreed that
the sequence codified in Article 22.3 of the DSU made sense. However, the language of that provision was
not workable for developing countries, because the process of justification was
too burdensome. The proponents explained
that their proposal addressed only certain evidentiary issues: it would maintain the need for the
complainant to provide an explanation of why it was not practicable or
effective to retaliate in the same sector or agreement, but it would do away
with the subsequent exchange of arguments on that evidence. The proposal did
not change the way the arbitrator calculates equivalence.
815.
It was asked how
the proposal would address asymmetry between a large developing country
complainant and a small developed country respondent. The proponents answered that retaliation
served to induce compliance, and all WTO Members were bound to comply. Although compliance was an issue irrespective
of the respondent's status, the proposal involved S&D because in practice
developing country Members had always complied.
816.
The proponents
explained that large developing country Members would not be excluded from the
proposal, but they would not need it to effectively retaliate and were not the
main target of the proposal. Some
participants suggested that if the intention was to address the specific
difficulties faced by certain developing countries, Article 22.3bis should be limited to that group of Members. If
Article 22.3bis remained available for large
developing countries, the means would not match the otherwise laudable goal of
facilitating cross-retaliation for those developing countries that face
particular constraints. For instance, some guidance could be given to
arbitrators on the elements to be taken into account in assessing
impracticability and ineffectiveness under Article 22.3 of the DSU.
817.
The proponents
explained that they had reflected upon providing such guidance to arbitrators
but concluded that this would be difficult to achieve. For instance, cross-retaliation could be
facilitated if raw materials or intermediate goods amounted to a certain
proportion of a developing country Member's trade profile. However, there
was no simple definition of these concepts. Reliance on the relative size of the parties'
economies also presented challenges.
The proponents were open to discussing any ideas for a reliable
indicator. A participant signalled that any reclassification of Member would be
politically sensitive.
818.
Finally, it was
suggested that the text should say "developing country Member"
instead of "developing country".
Calculation
of level of nullification or impairment
819.
The proponents
suggest an amendment of Article 22.4 of the DSU to take into account the
economic impact of the inconsistent measure on the developing country
complainant. The provision would read as
follows:
"The level of the suspension of concessions or other obligations,
authorised by the DSB shall be equivalent to the level of the nullification or
impairment. If the case is one brought
by a developing country Member, the level of nullification and impairment shall
also include an estimate of the impact of the inconsistent measure on the
economy of such Member."
820.
The proponents
explained that developing countries had become extremely vulnerable as they had
experienced an increase in export concentration between 1995 and 2011. Exports constituted a significant and growing
share of developing countries' GDP, and were growing relative to domestic
consumption. Trade restrictions increased the price of imports, and reduced
demand. As a consequence, production,
income, employment and ultimately consumption decreased, too. With time, this could lead to a negative
spiral in other parts of the economy.
821.
The proponents
added that S and D was a long-established principle of WTO dispute
settlement. Under the 1966 Procedures
referenced in Article 3.12 of the DSU, panels in disputes initiated against
developed respondents had to take into account the impact of the measures at
issue on the developing country complainant.[106] Similarly, the 1979 dispute settlement
understanding provided for appropriate action based on the impact of the
measure on the developing country complainant.[107] Under Article 21.8 of the DSU, the DSB was
required to take into account the impact of the measures at issue on the
economy of the developing country complainant.
The proposal would add a second sentence to Article 22.4 to make
Article 21.8 of the DSU effective.
822.
Several
participants supported the proposal, arguing that Article 21.8 of the DSU had
to be made effective in practice. A
participant considered that the Arbitrator in EC - Bananas
III had recognized that the impact of an inconsistent measure might
be higher for developing countries.[108]
Certain participants sympathised with the proposal's rationale and supported
its intent but remained sceptical on how it could be implemented in its current
form.
823.
Some participants
welcomed the move away from "double S and D" in this proposal. In contrast, one participant regretted that,
unlike the original proposal, the revised version did not take into account the
interests of developing countries both as complainants and respondents.
824.
Some participants
asked whether, under the proposal, the concept of nullification or impairment
would differ depending on the complainant's status. It was suggested that this concept should
remain unified, while taking into account the concerns of developing countries
in a case-by-case approach.
Clarification was also sought on the relationship between the current
and proposed text. Whereas the current
Article 22.4 equated the level of retaliation to the level of nullification or
impairment, the proposed second sentence seemed to provide for a compulsory
additional consideration. Some
participants expressed concern that this would create two standards for
nullification or impairment: one
applicable to all Members and another one with a premium for a subset of
Members. Concern was also expressed that
an a contrario reading of the proposed text
should not change the concept of nullification or impairment for other
Members.
825.
The proponents
responded that their proposal did not intend to change the concept of
nullification or impairment and would not create two levels of nullification or
impairment. It merely suggested that, in
addition to trade effects, an estimate of economic impact be included in the
calculation of nullification or impairment for developing country Members. The proponents stressed that it was important
to see the motive of their proposal.
An inconsistent measure against imports from a developing country
complainant involved nullification or impairment that went beyond mere trade
losses. The measure had an impact on the
entire economy of the developing country.
The proposed second sentence of Article 22.4 added value to the current
text for those Members.
826.
Certain
participants wondered how economic impact would be calculated, and asked if the
complainant would need to quantify and justify the impact before the arbitrator
determines it. One Member considered
that economic impact could be problematic as an element of nullification or
impairment per se, and also from a practical
interpretive perspective. The boundaries
and methods of that calculation would be unclear, so the proposal should
specify what the arbitrator should assess in this regard.
827.
The proponents
explained that they were not suggesting a sweeping amendment to the DSU. They did not question the practice of Article
22.6 arbitrators. The DSU did not set
forth formulas or methods to calculate nullification or impairment or the level
of retaliation. The established practice
was that each party had to sustain its factual assertions. Current practice also reflected a prudent
approach, avoiding claims that could not be meaningfully quantified. The proponents were merely suggesting that a
particular factor, which was already present in the DSU, be included in the
calculation of nullification or impairment as S&D for developing countries.
Ultimately, it was for the arbitrator to determine equivalence.
828.
One Member found
that "impact" was too broad a term and that it was unclear how it
should be assessed. The proposed text
made the concept of nullification or impairment even more unclear than what it
already was. It was also suggested that
in some cases the economic impact could be non-existent or at least not
additional to trade effects. It was
questioned whether it was correct to assume that the additional factor of
economic impact would be a positive figure in each case. The proponents, in response, questioned
whether a Member would challenge a measure if it had a positive economic
impact.
829.
It was questioned
whether the term "also" was necessary, if the intent was not to
include an element additional to nullification or impairment. The proponents considered it to be necessary
because arbitrators had limited nullification or impairment to trade effects
whereas, for developing countries, the impact of inconsistent measures is not
limited to trade loss. A participant questioned
however whether practice to date implied that the concept of nullification or
impairment was limited to trade effects.
It was suggested that a variety of means of calculating the
nullification or impairment might be envisaged, depending on the circumstances
of the case. Perhaps the term
"nullification or impairment" should be defined – and not exclusively
for developing countries.
830.
A participant
suggested that the text could be redrafted to focus on the subset of developing
country complainants that faced the problem that was being addressed. It was further suggested that, if the
proposed modification served to make Article 21.8 more effective, the link
between the two provisions should be strengthened. This could be achieved either by referencing
Article 21.8 in Article 22.4 or by adapting the language of Article 22.4
to Article 21.8. For example, the
proposed second sentence of Article 22.4 might read as follows: "If the case is one brought by a
developing country Member, in determining
the level of nullification and impairment, the impact
of the inconsistent measure on the economy of such Member shall be
taken into account."
831.
It was asked what
period would be taken into account in the calculation of nullification or
impairment. In response, the proponents explained that the way in which nullification
or impairment would be calculated would not change under the proposal. It would remain prospective, from the end of
the reasonable period of time to comply.
Hence, economic impact would also be assessed as from the end of the
reasonable period of time.
832.
A participant
suggested that the text refer to "an estimated impact", instead of
"an estimate of the impact", of the inconsistent measure.
Retaliation
on behalf of another Member
833.
The proponents
suggest inserting new language into Article 22.6 of the DSU as subparagraph
(b), which would follow the current language of that provision, to be
renumbered as paragraph (a).
The proposed subparagraph (b) reads:
"Where a developing country Member has been authorised to suspend
concessions or other obligations under Article 22.6 (a), and it considers that
it is not practicable or effective to utilize that authority, the DSB shall,
upon request by such Member, authorize other Member(s) to suspend concessions
or other obligations on behalf of the requesting Member unless the DSB decides by consensus to reject the request.
The authorization established in this Article shall be the same as the initial
authorization granted under Article 22.6 (a)."
834.
The proponents
explained that the proposal was no longer called "collective retaliation"
because not all Members would be allowed to retaliate on behalf of the developing
country complainant. The complainant would approach some other Members and
explain that it faces difficulties in using the authorized retaliation. If specific Members are prepared to do so in
its stead, the DSB would then authorize the transfer of the original
authorization.
835.
It was asked
whether the transfer should be decided by the DSB or by the Member originally
authorized to retaliate. A participant
questioned whether the term "unless the DSB decides by consensus to reject
the request" was necessary. It was also asked whether the term "on
behalf of the requesting Member" was accurate, as retaliation was formally
authorized by the DSB. Clarification was
also sought as to whether the right would be fully transferred to another
Member or would remain formally vested with the complaining Member. The proponents explained that the right
itself would remain with the complaining Member.
836.
It was asked
whether the term "same" would entail that both the authorized level
and sectors of retaliation would remain unchanged. The proponents responded that Article 22.6
clearly specified what retaliation would be authorized. Other Members could not deviate from the
sectors and levels originally authorized.
837.
It was further
asked how the proposed Article 22.6(b) would work together with the proposed
Article 22.3bis.
If the authorization to retaliate was transferred to a developed Member
under Article 22.6(b), would that Member benefit from any cross-retaliation
flexibilities obtained by the complainant under Article 22.3bis? The proponents confirmed that the flexibility of
Article 22.3bis would also apply to a developed
Member retaliating on behalf of a developing country under Article 22.6(b). This was confirmed by the second sentence of
the proposed Article 22.6(b).
838.
It was also asked
whether a specific amount of authorized retaliation could be passed on to more
than one other Member and if so, whether and how the original amount would be
divided among these Members. Another participant asked whether the DSB
authorization would specify which Members may retaliate on behalf of the
developing country and in regard to what amount.
839.
It was further
asked whether the Members exercising the right would have any margin of
manoeuvre. For instance, if after a year
a Member ceases to retaliate, could that Member or the original complainant
transfer the right to retaliate to another Member? The respondents answered that any margin of
manoeuvre would undermine the predictability of WTO dispute settlement. Article 22.1 of the DSU provided that
retaliation shall be temporary.
840.
One participant
supported the proposal and considered it might be necessary in certain
situations. Another participant welcomed
the fact that this proposal, which resembled an earlier one, was being
discussed again.
841.
A number of
participants questioned the proposal's systemic and practical implications.
Several participants indicated that they understood the underlying rationale of
the proposal and recognized the difficulties that certain Members may face in
retaliating effectively against larger economies. They also recognized the importance of prompt
compliance. At the same time they were
not persuaded that the means proposed to address this issue were suitable. Certain participants were supportive of
looking positively to ways to solve compliance issues, but considered that it
must also be ensured that proposals are workable and don’t create more problems
than they seek to resolve. In light of
the bilateral nature of existing remedies under the DSU, multilateral
retaliation "on behalf" of others would be hard to achieve.
842.
One participant
could accept the notion of transfer of rights in this context, noting that the
notion of subrogation of rights was already present in the context of bilateral
investment treaties. Another participant, while sharing the concerns of the
proponents concerning the difficulties of inducing compliance for small
economies, expressed fundamental systemic concern with the notion of a transfer
of treaty rights in a context of state-to-state relations.
843.
It was debated
whether Article 14 of the Anti-Dumping Agreement already led to a comparable situation
within the WTO system, in which a Member acted on behalf of another. A participant considered that this was the
case, while another considered the situation not to be comparable because under
that provision, the investigation and related actions are taken by the
importing Member itself.
844.
A participant
considered that the notion of transfer of retaliatory rights to a Member who
had not invoked the dispute settlement procedures was fundamentally at odds
with the principles embodied in the DSU.
In particular, Article 3.7 made clear that retaliatory measures were
authorized as a last resort available to a Member having invoked the procedures
and after following a number of procedural steps. The proponents observed in response that the
complaining Member would have followed all the relevant procedural steps, which
would not be circumvented. Only after
these steps have taken place, would the complaining party look for
partners.
845.
It was also noted
that the proposal would involve the transfer of the right to a Member without a
direct interest in the matter at issue. It was questioned what the incentives
might be for the Member exercising the retaliation rights to do so, and it was
suggested that this may give rise to situations of abuse. In response, the proponents observed that the
starting point for the proposal was a situation in which a developing country Member
was unable to exercise its rights. The
non-compliant Member had an obligation to abide by its obligation and the
objective was to induce compliance by that Member. A participant noted that the
existence of asymmetries between Members should not create an advantage for
developed Members to the detriment of small economies.
846.
A participant
considered the proposal unworkable as it referred only to Article 22.6, not
Article 22.7 of the DSU. In cases where
the original respondent objected to the requested retaliation, the DSB
authorized retaliation on the basis of Article 22.7 of the DSU, following
arbitration. So far, most requests for
authorization to retaliate pursuant to Article 22.6 had been challenged by the
respondent. Hence, the proposal would
not cover the most typical situation.
847.
A participant
noted that under this proposal, as with certain others considered previously,
the DSB would need to adjudicate the development status of a Member, which was
problematic. Questions were also raised
about the practical workability of the proposal. It was observed that there appeared to be no
opportunity for the Member concerned to raise an objection to the complainant's
assessment that it is not practicable or effective for it to retaliate, and no
mechanism to ensure that the measures would be applied consistently with the
authorization. It was asked who would be accountable for the application of the
retaliatory measures in the event that the authorization was applied by several
Members and how disputes concerning such authorisation would be handled, in a
post-retaliation scenario. A participant
noted that experience suggested that calculation and application of the level
of suspension was not straightforward. Many questions remained today in this
respect. The proponents observed that
the question of ensuring that equivalence was respected in the application of
the measures already arose in current practice, as illustrated by the EC – Bananas III and
US ‑ Gambling cases.[109]
This was not modified by the proposal.
848.
A participant
considered that some of the underlying premises of the proposal, i.e. that
large economies were less compliant than others and that retaliation was the
principal motivation for compliance, were questionable. If that were the case, Members would wait until
the last moment prior to facing retaliation to comply, which was in fact not
the case. The system was overall
functioning very well and care should be taken to make improvements without
making things worse. It was also suggested that the threat of retaliation was
not the fundamental reason for Members to comply or not comply. Rather, they complied because they were
committed to the system. Absence of
compliance could arise for a number of reasons.
Remedies were an instrument provided by the system to retain balance in
trade relations in the event of non-compliance.
However the complaining party may not achieve much, if other Members
retaliate on its behalf but the situation ultimately remains the same because
retaliation is not the best mechanism to induce compliance. The proponents observed that retaliation was
the remedy currently available under the DSU.
They were open to suggestions as to other means of inducing compliance.
849.
It was asked
whether the proponents had considered looking to a strengthening of
compensation, the other remedy available under the DSU. The proponents explained that they had
discussed this possibility, but that compensation also raised issues as a means
to induce compliance.
850.
In closing, I
noted the efforts of proponents in presenting draft legal text and encouraged
delegations to continue to discuss. It
appeared that there was broad recognition of the difficulties faced by small
developing country Members in retaliating effectively, but a number of
questions remained on the proposed solution that needed to be addressed in
order to move forward.
Administrative
measures
851.
A proposed
Article 22.8bis focuses on administrative measures
to be authorized by the DSB, when non-compliance continues after the end of
RPT.
852.
The proponents
explained that the objective of this proposal was also to achieve effective
compliance in situations of prolonged non-compliance. Reference was made to Article 3 of the DSU,
which defines dispute settlement as a key element of security and predictability
in the multilateral trading system and to Article 21.1, which recognizes prompt
compliance as essential to the resolution of disputes. The proponents observed that in practice, a
long time elapsed before obtaining remedies.
Finally, 21.7 established that in matters raised by developing country
Members the DSB would consider what action to take, as appropriate to the
circumstances.
853.
Under this
proposal, temporary measures would be applied, comparable to measures imposed
in the Budget and Finance Committee for non-payment of WTO contributions, as
recently modified and adopted by the General Council. This would be another alternative available to
developing countries unable to suspend obligations. The
measures proposed include barring from chairmanship of WTO bodies, no access to
the WTO documentation and website, reporting by the Secretariat on
implementation of the measures and a yearly notification to the Minister.
854.
Participants
noted that the proposed Article 22.8bis would apply
to all Members. One participant welcomed
this, as neutral provisions seemed more workable.
855.
Certain
participants supported objective of inducing compliance. Some believed the systemic implications of
the proposal needed further reflection. Several participants found the
proposal problematic in light of its systemic and practical implications. It was suggested that the proposal was
punitive and thus different from other proposals on developing country
issues. It was also noted that the scope
of the measures, which extended to access to WTO chairmanships and documents
generally, reached beyond dispute settlement activities. It was also noted that the usual way of
achieving compliance was through consultations and engagement with the other
party, while the proposed measures would disconnect Members from the WTO and
impede them from participating in dispute settlement and other WTO activities. Also, it could impinge on the interests of
Members that wished to share documents with Members that happened not to have
complied with DSB recommendations and rulings.
856.
In response, the
proponents explained that the proposal served to improve the surveillance of
implementation by the DSB and to induce effective compliance, including by
involving the Director-General and the WTO Secretariat. The objective was not to impose punitive
sanctions such as fines. Nor did the
proponents intend to cut Members off the WTO.
They referred to the recently adopted procedures for Members whose dues
were in arrears. Those procedures
covered all Members, even developing countries that faced serious economic
constraints. Access to documents was important, the Budget and Finance
Committee adopted its procedures nonetheless.
Also, Members' legislatures had committed to comply with WTO rules when
they approved WTO accession.
857.
Various
participants noted that the text suggested that measures would be available
upon the expiration of the reasonable period of time to comply. However,
proceedings may be necessary to determine whether compliance had been
achieved. Thus, either the proposed administrative measures would be imposed
only if the Member concerned admitted absence of compliance, or this proposal
entailed a conflict with compliance proceedings as foreseen under the
sequencing proposal. The proponents explained
that they had considered the relationship of this proposal with sequencing and
were not suggesting applying administrative sanctions before there was a
multilateral determination of non-compliance.
The proponents were ready to discuss this issue with interested Members.
858.
It was noted that
the list of proposed measures differed somewhat from the set of measures
available in the context of Members in arrears.
It was also asked whether the measures would be gradual, by initially
blocking access only to certain types of documents, for instance. The
proponents responded that the various administrative measures would not be
compulsory; the complainant could choose which ones to apply. The proponents were ready to discuss this
aspect of their proposal with interested participants.
859.
A participant
voiced concerns over the proposed blocking of chairmanship of WTO bodies: this
would need to apply at least on an annual basis, as serving chairpersons could
not be replaced during their term with nationals of Members who achieved
compliance. The proponents pointed out
that the proposal was limited to nominations, and did not affect serving
chairpersons.
860.
It was suggested
that to the extent any link existed, there was a qualitative difference between
non-compliance in dispute settlement and non-payment of dues. The latter was entirely under the control of
a Member's executive, whereas compliance often involved other branches.
861.
The proponents
noted that a number of interventions expressed concerns with the proposed text.
They would look at these with an open mind in reviewing it.
DS Fund/Litigation
Costs
862.
The non-paper
contains text for a "DSB Fund" under Article 28 of the DSU, to
facilitate developing countries' effective participation in WTO dispute
settlement. This Fund would be available
to developing country complainants and respondents, irrespective of the other
disputing party's development status. A proposed "Annex X" to the DSU
would address its detailed operation.
863.
If a developing
country Member could not access the DSB Fund "due to lack of budget",
under the proposal, the panel and the Appellate Body would award certain legal
costs to such Member. This possibility
would be available only in disputes between developing and developed countries
– provided that either "the developed country Member's measures have been
found inconsistent with the covered agreements" or "a developed
Member's claims do not succeed in a dispute against a developing country
Member."
Dispute
settlement Fund
864.
The proponents
argued that WTO dispute settlement had become too expensive for developing
countries. Some of the costs needed to
be shared. The proposed Annex X tried to
address questions raised in earlier discussions as to what would happen when
the DSB Fund would be exhausted. The
Fund would be part of the regular WTO budget, while it could also receive
voluntary contributions. The Fund's
initial budget would be CHF 4 million, half of which would be a DS operation
fund – similar to the Appellate Body operation fund set aside for a sudden
surge of disputes. After the first year,
the Fund's budget would amount to CHF 2 million p.a.,
which represented about 1% of the annual regular WTO budget. The Fund would reimburse a developing
country's dispute settlement costs for no more than 2 disputes per year, only
as regards legal fees and costs, and up to a specific ceiling for each dispute
settlement stage. The Fund's operation
would be overseen by the Budget and Finance Committee, and reviewed annually by
the General Council.
865.
One participant
expressed its wish to work closely with the proponents on this issue. Another found that the proposal struck the
right balance. Some participants asked questions
about specific aspects of the proposal's implementation.
866.
Several
delegations expressed concerns with the proposal, either for technical reasons
or because of its perceived negative impact on the Advisory Centre on WTO Law
(ACWL). In particular, several
participants emphasised that the ACWL had been useful in providing assistance
in dispute settlement and dispute avoidance, and it should not be
undermined. Instead of creating a
parallel system, the reflection should start from, and build upon, the existing
mechanism of the ACWL. The ACWL could be
strengthened, for instance, by making its funding more stable. Various participants considered the ACWL an
institutionally more appropriate forum.
Unlike the WTO, the ACWL could differentiate between developing countries
in need of dispute settlement assistance and developing countries with major
litigation capacity. One participant considered that the DSB Fund would not
involve any costs to beneficiaries, so these Members would have no incentive to
use the ACWL. According to another participant, if the proposal was accepted,
donor governments would start making a choice between the DSB Fund and the
ACWL. Ultimately, the question would be
whether it was reasonable to contribute also to the ACWL.
867.
The proponents
explained that their proposal did not intend to weaken the ACWL but to
strengthen it. If anything, the work of
the ACWL would increase with time - for instance, because it would be used more
frequently as a result of the DSB Fund.
Further, even ACWL participation cost money: CHF 276,000 was a significant amount.
868.
According to the
proponents, a solution to the financial problems of developing countries in
accessing WTO dispute settlement had to be devised at the WTO, in the DSU. The ACWL was outside the WTO. It was not multilateral as it did not involve
all WTO Members. A number of trust funds
existed already in the WTO as well as in other international judicial fora,
such as the ICJ Trust Fund. WTO Members
were already contributing to the WTO budget.
869.
It was asked how
the proponents had arrived at the reimbursement ceilings in paragraph 5 of
Annex X. The proponents responded that
they had calculated these by averaging the rates charged by the ACWL to all
categories of beneficiary countries. The
proponents added that they could provide separate figures for LDCs and
developing countries in light of the discussion.
870.
One participant noted
that in the ACWL, LDCs paid only CHF 34,000 for a dispute, which was
significantly lower than the CHF 276,000 evoked by the proponents. In fact, around 90% of the ACWL budget came
from its Endowment Fund, which was financed by contributing members, not
beneficiaries. This delegation wondered
if the proposal's fundamental rationale was a concern with the fees charged by
the ACWL. The proponents clarified that
they did not have such a concern.
Rather, they wanted to introduce a solution that would be part of the
multilateral system.
871.
A participant
asked if in a dispute involving multiple developing country parties, they would
all benefit from the DSB Fund. The
proponents confirmed that this would be the case.
872.
A participant
asked whether the DSB Fund would cover costs other than those related to
dispute settlement. The proponents
answered that they would reflect upon this.
873.
A participant asked
whether the Budget and Finance Committee would oversee the operation of the
Fund only in general or would also verify individual bills submitted for
reimbursement. Another participant
wondered whether the Secretariat would have any discretion to refuse
reimbursing a frivolous or exaggerated bill under paragraph 7 of the proposed
Annex X, and whether any recourse would be available against another Member's
reimbursement requests.
874.
The proponents
responded that their proposal would introduce checks and balances. There would be a ceiling on the reimbursable
amount at each stage, and reimbursements would be made only upon the
presentation of bills for work already done.
If the bill was below the ceiling, only the amount on the bill would be
reimbursed. The WTO Secretariat had
experience with disbursements. In any event,
the proponents would reflect on the idea of a challenge against Members'
reimbursement requests.
Litigation
costs
875.
The proponents
explained that paragraph (b) (litigation costs) of the proposed Article 28
would be automatically triggered when the DSB Fund under paragraph (a) was
unavailable.
876.
Some participants
suggested that the proposal should allow the reimbursement of litigation costs
also in disputes between developing countries.
The proponents signalled that developing countries had strongly resisted
that idea, and the proposal tried to limit the instances in which litigation
costs could be reimbursed.
877.
A participant asked
whether the triggering criteria for litigation costs were linked to
unsuccessful claims or to a finding of inconsistency, and what would happen if only
certain claims were successful. Several
participants noted that it was often difficult to establish which party lost or
won a dispute. The proponents explained
that litigation costs would probably be awarded on a pro rata basis of the
claims won by a developing country party.
878.
It was asked
whether the costs of government officials would also be reimbursed under the
proposal. It was suggested that ancillary
litigation costs also included, for instance, interpretation costs during consultations. The proponents explained that they wished to
keep their proposal simple. Hence, only
legal fees and costs would be reimbursed, not other expenses such as the costs
of experts and government officials. The
proponents recognized that developing countries would incur additional costs in
dispute settlement. They also recognized
that half of the WTO disputes are settled at the consultation stage. Still, in light of their internal
discussions, they had determined that litigation costs during consultations
should not be reimbursed. The DSB Fund,
however, would cover the consultation stage.
879.
A participant
noted that it was never simple to establish litigation costs. It questioned whether awarding litigation
costs was the most effective use of taxpayers' money, given that the process
leading to the award was very complex because costs were difficult to quantify. The proponents responded that awarding
litigation costs might be complex but not impossible. A survey had found at least 56 jurisdictions
that awarded litigation costs.
__________
[2] See Statement by the Director-General regarding dispute settlement
activities, 26 September 2014, at WT/DSB/M/350.
[4] See the Chairman's summaries, reproduced hereafter as Annex 2. For summaries of work conducted between May
2010 and April 2011, see TN/DS/25, Appendix B.
[5] See TN/C/M/32, para. 1.22.
[6] See the Chairman's summary of issues raised, reproduced hereafter
as Annex 1.
[7] See the Chairman's report to the TNC of 7 April 2014 at TN/C/M34,
para. 2.28; see also the Chairman's report to the TNC of 25 June 2014 at JOB/TNC/39,
Annex VIII and the Chairman's report to the TNC of 16 October 2014 at TN/C/M35,
para. 2.23.
[8] See the Chairman's summary of the informal open-ended meeting of 21
November 2013 at JOB/DS/17; and the Chairman's report to the TNC of 25 June
2014 at JOB/TNC/39.
[9] See Annex 1 hereafter.
[10] Previously issued as JOB/DS/15.
Footnotes have been added for ease of reference.
[11] See draft legal text at JOB/DS/14, pp. 12-14.
[12] See draft legal text at JOB/DS/14, p. 2 and JOB/DS/3, para. 46
(reproduced hereafter in Annex 2 at para. 166); see also JOB/DS/4, paras. 77-79
and JOB/DS/2, p. 7.
[13] See draft legal text at JOB/DS/14, pp. 10 and 17-20.
[14] See JOB/DS/14, p. 3; see also hereafter Annex 2, at para. 785.
[15] See draft legal text at JOB/DS/14, p. 5, and JOB/DS/4, para. 34 (reproduced
hereafter in Annex 2, at para. 203).
[16] See draft legal text at JOB/DS/14, p. 7 and JOB/DS/1, p. 4
(reproduced hereafter in Annex 2, at para. 19).
[17] See draft legal text at JOB/DS/14, p. 4 and JOB/DS/7, paras. 22-23 (reproduced
hereafter in Annex 2, at paras. 334 and 335).
[18] See draft legal text at JOB/DS/14, p. 4, and JOB/DS/7, paras. 22-23
(reproduced hereafter in Annex 2, at paras. 334 and 335).
[19] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/1.
[20] See document TN/DS/25, Appendix A, Article 18 at pp. A-12 to A-13, and
Appendix 5 at pp. A-21 to A-24.
[21] See also document TN/DS/25, Appendix A at pp. A-25 to A-26.
[22] See document TN/DS/25, Article 12.7 at p. A-8, Article 12.12 at pp.
A-8 to A-9, Article 16.4 at p. A‑9, Article 17.5(b) at p. A-10, Article
17.5(c) at p A-10; Article 17.13 at p. A-11, pp. A-25, A-27 to A-32.
[23] See document TN/DS/25, Article 12.12 at pp. A-8 to A-9.
[24] See document TN/DS/25, Article 17.5(c) at p. A-10.
[25] See document TN/DS/25, Article 17.5(b) at p. A-10.
[26] See document TN/DS/25, Article 12.7 at p. A-8, Article 16.4 at p.
A-9, Article 17.13 at p. A-11, p A‑25.
[27] See document TN/DS/25, Article 18.2 at p. A-12.
[28] See document TN/DS/25, Appendix 3 at p. A-20.
[29] See document TN/DS/25, p. A-24.
[30] See document TN/DS/25, Article 18.3 at p. A-13.
[31] See document TN/DS/25, Appendix 3 at p. A-20.
[32] See document TN/DS/25, at pp. A-37 to A-38.
[33] See document TN/DS/25, Article 13 a p. A-9, Article 17.4(e) at p.
A-10.
[34] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/2.
[35] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/3.
[36] See document TN/DS/25, Appendix A, Article 18 at pp. A-12 to A-13, and
Appendix 5 at pp. A-21 to A-24.
[37] See document TN/DS/25, Appendix A at pp. A-25 to A-26.
[38] See document TN/DS/25, Article 12.7 at p. A-8, Article 12.12 at pp.
A-8 to A-9, Article 16.4 at p. A‑9, Article 17.5(b) at p. A-10, Article
17.5(c) at p A-10; Article 17.13 at p. A-11, pp. A-25, A-27 to A-32.
[39] See document TN/DS/25, Article 13 at p. A-9, Article 17.4(e) at p.
A-10.
[40] See Job/DS/2, at p. 5.
[41] See document TN/DS/25, Article 3 at p. A-5.
[42] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/4.
[43] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-10 to A-12.
[44] See TN/DS/25, p. A-16 (Article 22.6, subparagraphs (b) and (c)).
[45] See TN/DS/25, p. A-15 (Article 22.3bis).
[46] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-16 and B-11 (para. 69).
[47] See TN/DS/25, p. B-12 (paras. 70 and 73) and p. B-17 (para. 102).
[48] See TN/DS/25, p. A-19, B-12 (para. 74), B-17 (para. 102), B-23
(paras. 138 and 139) and p. 6 of this document below.
[49] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-14 and A-15 (Article 22, paragraphs 1 to 2bis).
[50] This proposal was submitted as a non-paper.
[51] See TN/DS/25, p. B-11 (paras. 65 to 69).
[52] See TN/DS/25, pp. B-17 (para. 101) and B-22 (para. 132).
[53] See TN/DS/25, p. B-22 (paras. 133 to 136).
[54] See JOB/DS/1, p. 10 and JOB/DS/2, p. 8.
[56] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-8, A-9, A-11 and A-25.
[58] See TN/DS/25, p. A-32.
[59] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-28 to A-30.
[60] See JOB/DS/3, pp. 1 and 2.
[61] See JOB/DS/3, para. 47.
[62] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/5.
[63] See Job/DS/4, paras. 77-78.
[64] See the summary of the previous discussion in Job/DS/4, paras.
58-66.
[65] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-30 to A-32.
[66] See Job/DS/3, paras. 12-19.
[67] See JOB/DS/3, para. 1. See
also the discussion reflected in JOB/DS/4, starting at para. 67.
[69] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/7.
[70] See para. 362 below.
[71] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-31 and A-32.
[72] See TN/DS/25, p. A-32.
[73] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/8.
[74] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/9 and JOB/DS/9/Corr.1.
[75] Circulated as JOB/DS/6.
[76] "Only parties to the dispute, not third parties, may appeal a
panel report. Third parties which have
notified the DSB of a substantial interest in the matter pursuant to paragraph
2 of Article 10, shall have an opportunity to be heard and
to may make written submissions to, and be given an
opportunity to be heard by, the Appellate Body." (See also TN/DS/25, p. A-10, proposed Article
17.4(c).)
[77] See TN/DS/25, page B-4, para. 19: "As regards the role of consultations
in compliance proceedings, there was general support in the extended small
group for consultations being possible, but not required, prior to the
establishment of a compliance panel, and an understanding that
Article 21.5(c)(i) properly reflects this.
Further, there was general support, given the reference in
Article 21.5(c)(i) to Article 4, for third party participation being
possible if such consultations are requested."
[78] See WT/DS26/ARB and WT/DS48/ARB.
[79] See EC – Bananas III (Article 22.6 ) (Ecuador), WT/DS27/ARB; EC —
Hormones (Canada) (Article 22.6 — EC), WT/DS48/ARB; EC – Hormones (US) (Article 22.6 – EC), WT/DS26/ARB; Brazil –Aircraft (Article 22.6), WT/DS46/ARB; and US – Gambling (Article 22.6 – US), WT/DS285/ARB.
[80] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-29 and A-30.
[81] See JOB/DS/4 paras. 58 to 66 and JOB/DS/7 paras. 2 to 6.
[82] See TN/DS/25, pp. A-11 and A-12.
[83] See JOB/DS/4, paras. 6 to 24.
[84] See JOB/DS/5, paras. 20 to 36.
[85] This question was discussed with reference to three scenarios
identified in earlier discussions last year.
See JOB/DS/4, para. 7.
[86] This non-paper was presented jointly by the African group, Cuba,
Ecuador, India and Pakistan.
[87] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/10.
[88] See TN/DS/25, Article 17bis, para. 2,
at p. A-12.
[89] See also the discussion reflected in paragraphs 17 to 19 below on factual
vs. legal findings.
[90] See TN/DS/25, p. A-27.
[91] See Article 31.3(c) of the Vienna Convention on the Law of
Treaties.
[92] See Job/DS/7, para. 22.
[93] See TN/DS/25, p. A-8, Article 12.10 (grey-shaded text).
[94] See TN/DS/25, p. A-3, footnote h.
[96] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/11.
[97] The text is co-sponsored by the Africa Group, Cuba, Ecuador, India, Malaysia and
Pakistan.
[98] See JOB/DS/9, para. 84 and JOB/DS/10, para. 44.
[99] Tables on:
the timeframes from consultation requests to panel establishment; the
timeframes from panel establishment to the establishment of the RPT; the
duration of the RPT; the timeframes for compliance panel proceedings; and the
timeframes for recourse to arbitration under Article 22.6.
[101] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/12 and JOB/DS/12/Corr.1.
[102] See JOB/DS/8, paras. 48 to 53.
[103] See Minutes of the DSB meeting of 27 July 2000, WT/DSB/M/86, paras.
94 to 97.
[104] See Award of the Arbitrator, Indonesia – Autos,
WT/DS54/15, para. 24.
[105] Previously circulated as JOB/DS/13.
[106] See Decision of 5 April 1966 on Procedures under Article XXIII, paragraph
6 (BISD 14S/18, reproduced in The WTO Dispute Settlement Procedures, A
collection of the Relevant Legal Texts, Third Edition, 2012).
[107] See Understanding regarding Notification, Consultation, Dispute
Settlement and Surveillance, Adopted on 28 November 1979, para. 23 (L/4907,
BISD 26S/210).
[108] See EC – Bananas III, Recourse by the
European Communities to Arbitration under Article 22.6 of the DSU, Decision by
the Arbitrator, WT/DS27/ARB/ECU.
[109] See EC – Bananas III, Recourse by the
European Communities to Article 22.6 of the DSU, Decision by the Arbitrators,
WT/DS27/ARB/ECU and US – Gambling,
Recourse by the United States to Arbitration under Article 22.6 of the DSU,
Decision by the Arbitrator, WT/DS285/ARB.